diff --git a/CHANGES b/CHANGES
index 057405b0bff9..7ea3d2b82322 100644
--- a/CHANGES
+++ b/CHANGES
@@ -7,6 +7,33 @@
  https://github.com/openssl/openssl/commits/ and pick the appropriate
  release branch.
 
+ Changes between 1.1.1g and 1.1.1h [22 Sep 2020]
+
+  *) Certificates with explicit curve parameters are now disallowed in
+     verification chains if the X509_V_FLAG_X509_STRICT flag is used.
+     [Tomas Mraz]
+
+  *) The 'MinProtocol' and 'MaxProtocol' configuration commands now silently
+     ignore TLS protocol version bounds when configuring DTLS-based contexts, and
+     conversely, silently ignore DTLS protocol version bounds when configuring
+     TLS-based contexts.  The commands can be repeated to set bounds of both
+     types.  The same applies with the corresponding "min_protocol" and
+     "max_protocol" command-line switches, in case some application uses both TLS
+     and DTLS.
+  
+     SSL_CTX instances that are created for a fixed protocol version (e.g.
+     TLSv1_server_method()) also silently ignore version bounds.  Previously
+     attempts to apply bounds to these protocol versions would result in an
+     error.  Now only the "version-flexible" SSL_CTX instances are subject to
+     limits in configuration files in command-line options.
+     [Viktor Dukhovni]
+
+  *) Handshake now fails if Extended Master Secret extension is dropped
+     on renegotiation.
+     [Tomas Mraz]
+
+  *) The Oracle Developer Studio compiler will start reporting deprecated APIs
+
  Changes between 1.1.1f and 1.1.1g [21 Apr 2020]
 
   *) Fixed segmentation fault in SSL_check_chain()
diff --git a/Configure b/Configure
index 2e9efaa5f3da..1d73d06e1b3b 100755
--- a/Configure
+++ b/Configure
@@ -217,12 +217,22 @@ sub resolve_config;
 # Unified build supports separate build dir
 my $srcdir = catdir(absolutedir(dirname($0))); # catdir ensures local syntax
 my $blddir = catdir(absolutedir("."));         # catdir ensures local syntax
+
+# File::Spec::Unix doesn't detect case insensitivity, so we make sure to
+# check if the source and build directory are really the same, and make
+# them so.  This avoids all kinds of confusion later on.
+# We must check @File::Spec::ISA rather than using File::Spec->isa() to
+# know if File::Spec ended up loading File::Spec::Unix.
+$srcdir = $blddir
+    if (grep(/::Unix$/, @File::Spec::ISA)
+        && samedir($srcdir, $blddir));
+
 my $dofile = abs2rel(catfile($srcdir, "util/dofile.pl"));
 
 my $local_config_envname = 'OPENSSL_LOCAL_CONFIG_DIR';
 
-$config{sourcedir} = abs2rel($srcdir);
-$config{builddir} = abs2rel($blddir);
+$config{sourcedir} = abs2rel($srcdir, $blddir);
+$config{builddir} = abs2rel($blddir, $blddir);
 
 # Collect reconfiguration information if needed
 my @argvcopy=@ARGV;
@@ -1049,6 +1059,9 @@ if (scalar(@seed_sources) == 0) {
     print "Using os-specific seed configuration\n";
     push @seed_sources, 'os';
 }
+if (scalar(grep { $_ eq 'egd' } @seed_sources) > 0) {
+    delete $disabled{'egd'};
+}
 if (scalar(grep { $_ eq 'none' } @seed_sources) > 0) {
     die "Cannot seed with none and anything else" if scalar(@seed_sources) > 1;
     warn <<_____ if scalar(@seed_sources) == 1;
@@ -3424,6 +3437,27 @@ sub absolutedir {
     return realpath($dir);
 }
 
+# Check if all paths are one and the same, using stat.  They must both exist
+# We need this for the cases when File::Spec doesn't detect case insensitivity
+# (File::Spec::Unix assumes case sensitivity)
+sub samedir {
+    die "samedir expects two arguments\n" unless scalar @_ == 2;
+
+    my @stat0 = stat($_[0]);    # First argument
+    my @stat1 = stat($_[1]);    # Second argument
+
+    die "Couldn't stat $_[0]" unless @stat0;
+    die "Couldn't stat $_[1]" unless @stat1;
+
+    # Compare device number
+    return 0 unless ($stat0[0] == $stat1[0]);
+    # Compare "inode".  The perl manual recommends comparing as
+    # string rather than as number.
+    return 0 unless ($stat0[1] eq $stat1[1]);
+
+    return 1;                   # All the same
+}
+
 sub quotify {
     my %processors = (
         perl    => sub { my $x = shift;
diff --git a/FREEBSD-upgrade b/FREEBSD-upgrade
index 01132629bf21..e3b02f0327cd 100644
--- a/FREEBSD-upgrade
+++ b/FREEBSD-upgrade
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ First, read http://wiki.freebsd.org/SubversionPrimer/VendorImports
 # Xlist
 setenv XLIST /FreeBSD/work/openssl/svn-FREEBSD-files/FREEBSD-Xlist
 setenv FSVN "svn+ssh://repo.freebsd.org/base"
-setenv OSSLVER 1.1.1g
+setenv OSSLVER 1.1.1h
 
 ###setenv OSSLTAG v`echo ${OSSLVER} | tr . _`
 
diff --git a/NEWS b/NEWS
index 455b02dcb264..5529a260e4e5 100644
--- a/NEWS
+++ b/NEWS
@@ -5,6 +5,14 @@
   This file gives a brief overview of the major changes between each OpenSSL
   release. For more details please read the CHANGES file.
 
+  Major changes between OpenSSL 1.1.1g and OpenSSL 1.1.1h [22 Sep 2020]
+
+      o Disallow explicit curve parameters in verifications chains when
+        X509_V_FLAG_X509_STRICT is used
+      o Enable 'MinProtocol' and 'MaxProtocol' to configure both TLS and DTLS
+        contexts
+      o Oracle Developer Studio will start reporting deprecation warnings
+
   Major changes between OpenSSL 1.1.1f and OpenSSL 1.1.1g [21 Apr 2020]
 
       o Fixed segmentation fault in SSL_check_chain() (CVE-2020-1967)
diff --git a/NOTES.PERL b/NOTES.PERL
index 42c6127724b4..201b14386729 100644
--- a/NOTES.PERL
+++ b/NOTES.PERL
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
 
         $ cpan -f -i Text::Template
 
-    Note: on VMS, you must quote any argument that contains upper case
+    Note: on VMS, you must quote any argument that contains uppercase
     characters, so the lines above would be:
 
         $ cpan -i "Text::Template"
diff --git a/README b/README
index 46c2b537bed4..0bcce5b487cb 100644
--- a/README
+++ b/README
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
- OpenSSL 1.1.1g 21 Apr 2020
+ OpenSSL 1.1.1h 22 Sep 2020
 
  Copyright (c) 1998-2020 The OpenSSL Project
  Copyright (c) 1995-1998 Eric A. Young, Tim J. Hudson
diff --git a/apps/genpkey.c b/apps/genpkey.c
index 39fa73c91cf4..3fe87e853c57 100644
--- a/apps/genpkey.c
+++ b/apps/genpkey.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2006-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -177,9 +177,12 @@ int genpkey_main(int argc, char **argv)
         goto end;
     }
 
+    ret = 0;
+
     if (rv <= 0) {
         BIO_puts(bio_err, "Error writing key\n");
         ERR_print_errors(bio_err);
+        ret = 1;
     }
 
     if (text) {
@@ -191,11 +194,10 @@ int genpkey_main(int argc, char **argv)
         if (rv <= 0) {
             BIO_puts(bio_err, "Error printing key\n");
             ERR_print_errors(bio_err);
+            ret = 1;
         }
     }
 
-    ret = 0;
-
  end:
     EVP_PKEY_free(pkey);
     EVP_PKEY_CTX_free(ctx);
diff --git a/apps/rsa8192.pem b/apps/rsa8192.pem
index 946a6e5433ce..83d962f40f0f 100644
--- a/apps/rsa8192.pem
+++ b/apps/rsa8192.pem
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
 -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
-
 MIISKAIBAAKCBAEAiQ2f1X6Bte1DKD0OoCBKEikzPW+5w3oXk3WwnE97Wxzy6wJZ
 ebbZC3CZKKBnJeBMrysPf+lK+9+fP6Vm8bp1wvbcSIA59BDrX6irFSuM/bdnkbuF
 MFlDjt+uVrxwoyqfPi2IPot1HQg3l5mdyBqcTWvbOnU2L9HZxJfPUCjfzdTMPrMY
@@ -62,7 +61,7 @@ JH1/Qx7C/mTAMRsN5SkOthnGq0djCNWfPv/3JV0H67Uf5krFlnwLebrgfTYoPPdo
 yO7iBUNJzv6Qh22malLp4P8gzACkD7DGlSTnoB5cLwcjmDGg+i9WrUBbOiVTeQfZ
 kOj1o+Tz35ndpq/DDUVlqliB9krcxva+QHeJPH53EGI+YVg1nD+s/vUDZ3mQMGX9
 DQou2L8uU6RnWNv/BihGcL8QvS4Ty6QyPOUPpD3zc70JQAEcQk9BxQNaELgJX0IN
-22cYn22tYvElew9G41OpDqzBRcfbdJmKXQ2HcroShutYJQRGUpAXHk24fy6JVkIU
+2cYUn22tYvElew9G41OpDqzBRcfbdJmKXQ2HcroShutYJQRGUpAXHk24fy6JVkIU
 ojF5U6cwextMja1ZIIZgh9eugIRUeIE7319nQNDzuXWjRCcoBLA25P7wnpHWDRpz
 D9ovXCIvdja74lL5psqobV6L5+fbLPkSgXoImKR0LQKCAgAIC9Jk8kxumCyIVGCP
 PeM5Uby9M3GMuKrfYsn0Y5e97+kSJF1dpojTodBgR2KQar6eVrvXt+8uZCcIjfx8
@@ -98,4 +97,3 @@ TwEgE67iOb2iIoUpon/NyP4LesMzvdpsu2JFlfz13PmmQ34mFI7tWvOb3NA5DP3c
 rMlMLtKfp2w8HlMZpsUlToNCx6CI+tJrohzcs3BAVAbjFAXRKWGijB1rxwyDdHPv
 I+/wJTNaRNPQ1M0SwtEL/zJd21y3KSPn4eL+GP3efhlDSjtlDvZqkdAUsU8=
 -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
-
diff --git a/apps/s_client.c b/apps/s_client.c
index 26a6789d811a..83b3fc9c7f13 100644
--- a/apps/s_client.c
+++ b/apps/s_client.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -1283,22 +1283,42 @@ int s_client_main(int argc, char **argv)
         case OPT_SSL3:
             min_version = SSL3_VERSION;
             max_version = SSL3_VERSION;
+            socket_type = SOCK_STREAM;
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS
+            isdtls = 0;
+#endif
             break;
         case OPT_TLS1_3:
             min_version = TLS1_3_VERSION;
             max_version = TLS1_3_VERSION;
+            socket_type = SOCK_STREAM;
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS
+            isdtls = 0;
+#endif
             break;
         case OPT_TLS1_2:
             min_version = TLS1_2_VERSION;
             max_version = TLS1_2_VERSION;
+            socket_type = SOCK_STREAM;
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS
+            isdtls = 0;
+#endif
             break;
         case OPT_TLS1_1:
             min_version = TLS1_1_VERSION;
             max_version = TLS1_1_VERSION;
+            socket_type = SOCK_STREAM;
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS
+            isdtls = 0;
+#endif
             break;
         case OPT_TLS1:
             min_version = TLS1_VERSION;
             max_version = TLS1_VERSION;
+            socket_type = SOCK_STREAM;
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS
+            isdtls = 0;
+#endif
             break;
         case OPT_DTLS:
 #ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS
diff --git a/apps/x509.c b/apps/x509.c
index 5bb110fe4a0a..1043eba0c8a0 100644
--- a/apps/x509.c
+++ b/apps/x509.c
@@ -140,9 +140,9 @@ const OPTIONS x509_options[] = {
     {"", OPT_MD, '-', "Any supported digest"},
 #ifndef OPENSSL_NO_MD5
     {"subject_hash_old", OPT_SUBJECT_HASH_OLD, '-',
-     "Print old-style (MD5) issuer hash value"},
-    {"issuer_hash_old", OPT_ISSUER_HASH_OLD, '-',
      "Print old-style (MD5) subject hash value"},
+    {"issuer_hash_old", OPT_ISSUER_HASH_OLD, '-',
+     "Print old-style (MD5) issuer hash value"},
 #endif
 #ifndef OPENSSL_NO_ENGINE
     {"engine", OPT_ENGINE, 's', "Use engine, possibly a hardware device"},
diff --git a/appveyor.yml b/appveyor.yml
index 242d6a9ffe6f..6210391f204a 100644
--- a/appveyor.yml
+++ b/appveyor.yml
@@ -46,7 +46,8 @@ before_build:
     - cd ..
     - ps: >-
         if (-not $env:APPVEYOR_PULL_REQUEST_NUMBER`
-            -or (&git log -2 | Select-String "\[extended tests\]") ) {
+            -or (&git log -1 $env:APPVEYOR_PULL_REQUEST_HEAD_COMMIT |
+                 Select-String "\[extended tests\]") ) {
             $env:EXTENDED_TESTS="yes"
         }
 
diff --git a/crypto/aes/aes_core.c b/crypto/aes/aes_core.c
index 687dd5829baa..ad00c729e700 100644
--- a/crypto/aes/aes_core.c
+++ b/crypto/aes/aes_core.c
@@ -673,357 +673,6 @@ void AES_decrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
 
     InvCipher(in, out, rk, key->rounds);
 }
-
-# ifndef OPENSSL_SMALL_FOOTPRINT
-void AES_ctr32_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
-                       size_t blocks, const AES_KEY *key,
-                       const unsigned char *ivec);
-
-static void RawToBits(const u8 raw[64], u64 bits[8])
-{
-    int i, j;
-    u64 in, out;
-
-    memset(bits, 0, 64);
-    for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {
-        in = 0;
-        for (j = 0; j < 8; j++)
-            in |= ((u64)raw[i * 8 + j]) << (8 * j);
-        out = in & 0xF0F0F0F00F0F0F0FuLL;
-        out |= (in & 0x0F0F0F0F00000000uLL) >> 28;
-        out |= (in & 0x00000000F0F0F0F0uLL) << 28;
-        in = out & 0xCCCC3333CCCC3333uLL;
-        in |= (out & 0x3333000033330000uLL) >> 14;
-        in |= (out & 0x0000CCCC0000CCCCuLL) << 14;
-        out = in & 0xAA55AA55AA55AA55uLL;
-        out |= (in & 0x5500550055005500uLL) >> 7;
-        out |= (in & 0x00AA00AA00AA00AAuLL) << 7;
-        for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
-            bits[j] |= (out & 0xFFuLL) << (8 * i);
-            out = out >> 8;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void BitsToRaw(const u64 bits[8], u8 raw[64])
-{
-    int i, j;
-    u64 in, out;
-
-    for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {
-        in = 0;
-        for (j = 0; j < 8; j++)
-            in |= ((bits[j] >> (8 * i)) & 0xFFuLL) << (8 * j);
-        out = in & 0xF0F0F0F00F0F0F0FuLL;
-        out |= (in & 0x0F0F0F0F00000000uLL) >> 28;
-        out |= (in & 0x00000000F0F0F0F0uLL) << 28;
-        in = out & 0xCCCC3333CCCC3333uLL;
-        in |= (out & 0x3333000033330000uLL) >> 14;
-        in |= (out & 0x0000CCCC0000CCCCuLL) << 14;
-        out = in & 0xAA55AA55AA55AA55uLL;
-        out |= (in & 0x5500550055005500uLL) >> 7;
-        out |= (in & 0x00AA00AA00AA00AAuLL) << 7;
-        for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
-            raw[i * 8 + j] = (u8)out;
-            out = out >> 8;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void BitsXtime(u64 state[8])
-{
-    u64 b;
-
-    b = state[7];
-    state[7] = state[6];
-    state[6] = state[5];
-    state[5] = state[4];
-    state[4] = state[3] ^ b;
-    state[3] = state[2] ^ b;
-    state[2] = state[1];
-    state[1] = state[0] ^ b;
-    state[0] = b;
-}
-
-/*
- * This S-box implementation follows a circuit described in
- * Boyar and Peralta: "A new combinational logic minimization
- * technique with applications to cryptology."
- * https://eprint.iacr.org/2009/191.pdf
- *
- * The math is similar to above, in that it uses
- * a tower field of GF(2^2^2^2) but with a different
- * basis representation, that is better suited to
- * logic designs.
- */
-static void BitsSub(u64 state[8])
-{
-    u64 x0, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6, x7;
-    u64 y1, y2, y3, y4, y5, y6, y7, y8, y9, y10, y11;
-    u64 y12, y13, y14, y15, y16, y17, y18, y19, y20, y21;
-    u64 t0, t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, t6, t7, t8, t9, t10, t11;
-    u64 t12, t13, t14, t15, t16, t17, t18, t19, t20, t21;
-    u64 t22, t23, t24, t25, t26, t27, t28, t29, t30, t31;
-    u64 t32, t33, t34, t35, t36, t37, t38, t39, t40, t41;
-    u64 t42, t43, t44, t45, t46, t47, t48, t49, t50, t51;
-    u64 t52, t53, t54, t55, t56, t57, t58, t59, t60, t61;
-    u64 t62, t63, t64, t65, t66, t67;
-    u64 z0, z1, z2, z3, z4, z5, z6, z7, z8, z9, z10, z11;
-    u64 z12, z13, z14, z15, z16, z17;
-    u64 s0, s1, s2, s3, s4, s5, s6, s7;
-
-    x7 = state[0];
-    x6 = state[1];
-    x5 = state[2];
-    x4 = state[3];
-    x3 = state[4];
-    x2 = state[5];
-    x1 = state[6];
-    x0 = state[7];
-    y14 = x3 ^ x5;
-    y13 = x0 ^ x6;
-    y9 = x0 ^ x3;
-    y8 = x0 ^ x5;
-    t0 = x1 ^ x2;
-    y1 = t0 ^ x7;
-    y4 = y1 ^ x3;
-    y12 = y13 ^ y14;
-    y2 = y1 ^ x0;
-    y5 = y1 ^ x6;
-    y3 = y5 ^ y8;
-    t1 = x4 ^ y12;
-    y15 = t1 ^ x5;
-    y20 = t1 ^ x1;
-    y6 = y15 ^ x7;
-    y10 = y15 ^ t0;
-    y11 = y20 ^ y9;
-    y7 = x7 ^ y11;
-    y17 = y10 ^ y11;
-    y19 = y10 ^ y8;
-    y16 = t0 ^ y11;
-    y21 = y13 ^ y16;
-    y18 = x0 ^ y16;
-    t2 = y12 & y15;
-    t3 = y3 & y6;
-    t4 = t3 ^ t2;
-    t5 = y4 & x7;
-    t6 = t5 ^ t2;
-    t7 = y13 & y16;
-    t8 = y5 & y1;
-    t9 = t8 ^ t7;
-    t10 = y2 & y7;
-    t11 = t10 ^ t7;
-    t12 = y9 & y11;
-    t13 = y14 & y17;
-    t14 = t13 ^ t12;
-    t15 = y8 & y10;
-    t16 = t15 ^ t12;
-    t17 = t4 ^ t14;
-    t18 = t6 ^ t16;
-    t19 = t9 ^ t14;
-    t20 = t11 ^ t16;
-    t21 = t17 ^ y20;
-    t22 = t18 ^ y19;
-    t23 = t19 ^ y21;
-    t24 = t20 ^ y18;
-    t25 = t21 ^ t22;
-    t26 = t21 & t23;
-    t27 = t24 ^ t26;
-    t28 = t25 & t27;
-    t29 = t28 ^ t22;
-    t30 = t23 ^ t24;
-    t31 = t22 ^ t26;
-    t32 = t31 & t30;
-    t33 = t32 ^ t24;
-    t34 = t23 ^ t33;
-    t35 = t27 ^ t33;
-    t36 = t24 & t35;
-    t37 = t36 ^ t34;
-    t38 = t27 ^ t36;
-    t39 = t29 & t38;
-    t40 = t25 ^ t39;
-    t41 = t40 ^ t37;
-    t42 = t29 ^ t33;
-    t43 = t29 ^ t40;
-    t44 = t33 ^ t37;
-    t45 = t42 ^ t41;
-    z0 = t44 & y15;
-    z1 = t37 & y6;
-    z2 = t33 & x7;
-    z3 = t43 & y16;
-    z4 = t40 & y1;
-    z5 = t29 & y7;
-    z6 = t42 & y11;
-    z7 = t45 & y17;
-    z8 = t41 & y10;
-    z9 = t44 & y12;
-    z10 = t37 & y3;
-    z11 = t33 & y4;
-    z12 = t43 & y13;
-    z13 = t40 & y5;
-    z14 = t29 & y2;
-    z15 = t42 & y9;
-    z16 = t45 & y14;
-    z17 = t41 & y8;
-    t46 = z15 ^ z16;
-    t47 = z10 ^ z11;
-    t48 = z5 ^ z13;
-    t49 = z9 ^ z10;
-    t50 = z2 ^ z12;
-    t51 = z2 ^ z5;
-    t52 = z7 ^ z8;
-    t53 = z0 ^ z3;
-    t54 = z6 ^ z7;
-    t55 = z16 ^ z17;
-    t56 = z12 ^ t48;
-    t57 = t50 ^ t53;
-    t58 = z4 ^ t46;
-    t59 = z3 ^ t54;
-    t60 = t46 ^ t57;
-    t61 = z14 ^ t57;
-    t62 = t52 ^ t58;
-    t63 = t49 ^ t58;
-    t64 = z4 ^ t59;
-    t65 = t61 ^ t62;
-    t66 = z1 ^ t63;
-    s0 = t59 ^ t63;
-    s6 = ~(t56 ^ t62);
-    s7 = ~(t48 ^ t60);
-    t67 = t64 ^ t65;
-    s3 = t53 ^ t66;
-    s4 = t51 ^ t66;
-    s5 = t47 ^ t65;
-    s1 = ~(t64 ^ s3);
-    s2 = ~(t55 ^ t67);
-    state[0] = s7;
-    state[1] = s6;
-    state[2] = s5;
-    state[3] = s4;
-    state[4] = s3;
-    state[5] = s2;
-    state[6] = s1;
-    state[7] = s0;
-}
-
-static void BitsShiftRows(u64 state[8])
-{
-    u64 s, s0;
-    int i;
-
-    for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {
-        s = state[i];
-        s0 = s & 0x1111111111111111uLL;
-        s0 |= ((s & 0x2220222022202220uLL) >> 4) | ((s & 0x0002000200020002uLL) << 12);
-        s0 |= ((s & 0x4400440044004400uLL) >> 8) | ((s & 0x0044004400440044uLL) << 8);
-        s0 |= ((s & 0x8000800080008000uLL) >> 12) | ((s & 0x0888088808880888uLL) << 4);
-        state[i] = s0;
-    }
-}
-
-static void BitsMixColumns(u64 state[8])
-{
-    u64 s1, s;
-    u64 s0[8];
-    int i;
-
-    for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {
-        s1 = state[i];
-        s = s1;
-        s ^= ((s & 0xCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCuLL) >> 2) | ((s & 0x3333333333333333uLL) << 2);
-        s ^= ((s & 0xAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAuLL) >> 1) | ((s & 0x5555555555555555uLL) << 1);
-        s ^= s1;
-        s0[i] = s;
-    }
-    BitsXtime(state);
-    for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {
-        s1 = state[i];
-        s = s0[i];
-        s ^= s1;
-        s ^= ((s1 & 0xEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEuLL) >> 1) | ((s1 & 0x1111111111111111uLL) << 3);
-        state[i] = s;
-    }
-}
-
-static void BitsAddRoundKey(u64 state[8], const u64 key[8])
-{
-    int i;
-
-    for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
-        state[i] ^= key[i];
-}
-
-void AES_ctr32_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
-                       size_t blocks, const AES_KEY *key,
-                       const unsigned char *ivec)
-{
-    struct {
-        u8 cipher[64];
-        u64 state[8];
-        u64 rd_key[AES_MAXNR + 1][8];
-    } *bs;
-    u32 ctr32;
-    int i;
-
-    ctr32 = GETU32(ivec + 12);
-    if (blocks >= 4
-            && (bs = OPENSSL_malloc(sizeof(*bs)))) {
-        for (i = 0; i < key->rounds + 1; i++) {
-            memcpy(bs->cipher + 0, &key->rd_key[4 * i], 16);
-            memcpy(bs->cipher + 16, bs->cipher, 16);
-            memcpy(bs->cipher + 32, bs->cipher, 32);
-            RawToBits(bs->cipher, bs->rd_key[i]);
-        }
-        while (blocks) {
-            memcpy(bs->cipher, ivec, 12);
-            PUTU32(bs->cipher + 12, ctr32);
-            ctr32++;
-            memcpy(bs->cipher + 16, ivec, 12);
-            PUTU32(bs->cipher + 28, ctr32);
-            ctr32++;
-            memcpy(bs->cipher + 32, ivec, 12);
-            PUTU32(bs->cipher + 44, ctr32);
-            ctr32++;
-            memcpy(bs->cipher + 48, ivec, 12);
-            PUTU32(bs->cipher + 60, ctr32);
-            ctr32++;
-            RawToBits(bs->cipher, bs->state);
-            BitsAddRoundKey(bs->state, bs->rd_key[0]);
-            for (i = 1; i < key->rounds; i++) {
-                BitsSub(bs->state);
-                BitsShiftRows(bs->state);
-                BitsMixColumns(bs->state);
-                BitsAddRoundKey(bs->state, bs->rd_key[i]);
-            }
-            BitsSub(bs->state);
-            BitsShiftRows(bs->state);
-            BitsAddRoundKey(bs->state, bs->rd_key[key->rounds]);
-            BitsToRaw(bs->state, bs->cipher);
-            for (i = 0; i < 64 && blocks; i++) {
-                out[i] = in[i] ^ bs->cipher[i];
-                if ((i & 15) == 15)
-                    blocks--;
-            }
-            in += i;
-            out += i;
-        }
-        OPENSSL_clear_free(bs, sizeof(*bs));
-    } else {
-        unsigned char cipher[16];
-
-        while (blocks) {
-            memcpy(cipher, ivec, 12);
-            PUTU32(cipher + 12, ctr32);
-            AES_encrypt(cipher, cipher, key);
-            for (i = 0; i < 16; i++)
-                out[i] = in[i] ^ cipher[i];
-            in += 16;
-            out += 16;
-            ctr32++;
-            blocks--;
-        }
-    }
-}
-# endif
 #elif !defined(AES_ASM)
 /*-
 Te0[x] = S [x].[02, 01, 01, 03];
diff --git a/crypto/aes/aes_ige.c b/crypto/aes/aes_ige.c
index dce4ef11be4f..804b3a723d1f 100644
--- a/crypto/aes/aes_ige.c
+++ b/crypto/aes/aes_ige.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2006-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -12,11 +12,6 @@
 #include <openssl/aes.h>
 #include "aes_local.h"
 
-#define N_WORDS (AES_BLOCK_SIZE / sizeof(unsigned long))
-typedef struct {
-    unsigned long data[N_WORDS];
-} aes_block_t;
-
 /* XXX: probably some better way to do this */
 #if defined(__i386__) || defined(__x86_64__)
 # define UNALIGNED_MEMOPS_ARE_FAST 1
@@ -24,6 +19,15 @@ typedef struct {
 # define UNALIGNED_MEMOPS_ARE_FAST 0
 #endif
 
+#define N_WORDS (AES_BLOCK_SIZE / sizeof(unsigned long))
+typedef struct {
+    unsigned long data[N_WORDS];
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && UNALIGNED_MEMOPS_ARE_FAST
+} aes_block_t __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+} aes_block_t;
+#endif
+
 #if UNALIGNED_MEMOPS_ARE_FAST
 # define load_block(d, s)        (d) = *(const aes_block_t *)(s)
 # define store_block(d, s)       *(aes_block_t *)(d) = (s)
diff --git a/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-mb-x86_64.pl b/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-mb-x86_64.pl
index be2434f12041..a80cfdc13948 100755
--- a/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-mb-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-mb-x86_64.pl
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha1-x86_64.pl b/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha1-x86_64.pl
index 42fe5d469ea6..04fd13be5e09 100755
--- a/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha1-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha1-x86_64.pl
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ $avx=1 if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /nasm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /nasm/) &&
 $avx=1 if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	   `ml64 2>&1` =~ /Version ([0-9]+)\./ &&
 	   $1>=10);
-$avx=1 if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/ && $2>=3.0);
+$avx=1 if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/ && $2>=3.0);
 
 $shaext=1;	### set to zero if compiling for 1.0.1
 
diff --git a/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha256-x86_64.pl b/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha256-x86_64.pl
index f1b144eccbdd..ff9b18507da0 100755
--- a/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha256-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/aes/asm/aesni-sha256-x86_64.pl
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/asn1/d2i_pr.c b/crypto/asn1/d2i_pr.c
index 6ec010738049..7b127d2092fa 100644
--- a/crypto/asn1/d2i_pr.c
+++ b/crypto/asn1/d2i_pr.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -56,6 +56,8 @@ EVP_PKEY *d2i_PrivateKey(int type, EVP_PKEY **a, const unsigned char **pp,
                 goto err;
             EVP_PKEY_free(ret);
             ret = tmp;
+            if (EVP_PKEY_type(type) != EVP_PKEY_base_id(ret))
+                goto err;
         } else {
             ASN1err(ASN1_F_D2I_PRIVATEKEY, ERR_R_ASN1_LIB);
             goto err;
diff --git a/crypto/asn1/x_algor.c b/crypto/asn1/x_algor.c
index 4c4a718850ee..c9a8f1e9d1d4 100644
--- a/crypto/asn1/x_algor.c
+++ b/crypto/asn1/x_algor.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1998-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1998-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -92,3 +92,35 @@ int X509_ALGOR_cmp(const X509_ALGOR *a, const X509_ALGOR *b)
         return 0;
     return ASN1_TYPE_cmp(a->parameter, b->parameter);
 }
+
+int X509_ALGOR_copy(X509_ALGOR *dest, const X509_ALGOR *src)
+{
+    if (src == NULL || dest == NULL)
+	return 0;
+
+    if (dest->algorithm)
+         ASN1_OBJECT_free(dest->algorithm);
+    dest->algorithm = NULL;
+
+    if (dest->parameter)
+        ASN1_TYPE_free(dest->parameter);
+    dest->parameter = NULL;
+
+    if (src->algorithm)
+        if ((dest->algorithm = OBJ_dup(src->algorithm)) == NULL)
+	    return 0;
+
+    if (src->parameter) {
+        dest->parameter = ASN1_TYPE_new();
+        if (dest->parameter == NULL)
+            return 0;
+
+        /* Assuming this is also correct for a BOOL.
+         * set does copy as a side effect.
+         */
+        if (ASN1_TYPE_set1(dest->parameter, 
+                src->parameter->type, src->parameter->value.ptr) == 0)
+            return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
diff --git a/crypto/bio/b_print.c b/crypto/bio/b_print.c
index 8ef90ac1d4f8..41b7f5e2f61d 100644
--- a/crypto/bio/b_print.c
+++ b/crypto/bio/b_print.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -635,7 +635,11 @@ fmtfp(char **sbuffer,
             fvalue = tmpvalue;
     }
     ufvalue = abs_val(fvalue);
-    if (ufvalue > ULONG_MAX) {
+    /*
+     * By subtracting 65535 (2^16-1) we cancel the low order 15 bits
+     * of ULONG_MAX to avoid using imprecise floating point values.
+     */
+    if (ufvalue >= (double)(ULONG_MAX - 65535) + 65536.0) {
         /* Number too big */
         return 0;
     }
diff --git a/crypto/bio/bss_acpt.c b/crypto/bio/bss_acpt.c
index 5a2cb50dfc39..4461eae2333d 100644
--- a/crypto/bio/bss_acpt.c
+++ b/crypto/bio/bss_acpt.c
@@ -434,8 +434,10 @@ static long acpt_ctrl(BIO *b, int cmd, long num, void *ptr)
                 b->init = 1;
             } else if (num == 1) {
                 OPENSSL_free(data->param_serv);
-                data->param_serv = BUF_strdup(ptr);
-                b->init = 1;
+                if ((data->param_serv = OPENSSL_strdup(ptr)) == NULL)
+                    ret = 0;
+                else
+                    b->init = 1;
             } else if (num == 2) {
                 data->bind_mode |= BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK;
             } else if (num == 3) {
diff --git a/crypto/bio/bss_conn.c b/crypto/bio/bss_conn.c
index dd43a406018c..807a82b23ba2 100644
--- a/crypto/bio/bss_conn.c
+++ b/crypto/bio/bss_conn.c
@@ -186,8 +186,17 @@ static int conn_state(BIO *b, BIO_CONNECT *c)
 
         case BIO_CONN_S_BLOCKED_CONNECT:
             i = BIO_sock_error(b->num);
-            if (i) {
+            if (i != 0) {
                 BIO_clear_retry_flags(b);
+                if ((c->addr_iter = BIO_ADDRINFO_next(c->addr_iter)) != NULL) {
+                    /*
+                     * if there are more addresses to try, do that first
+                     */
+                    BIO_closesocket(b->num);
+                    c->state = BIO_CONN_S_CREATE_SOCKET;
+                    ERR_clear_error();
+                    break;
+                }
                 SYSerr(SYS_F_CONNECT, i);
                 ERR_add_error_data(4,
                                    "hostname=", c->param_hostname,
@@ -407,12 +416,13 @@ static long conn_ctrl(BIO *b, int cmd, long num, void *ptr)
     case BIO_C_SET_CONNECT:
         if (ptr != NULL) {
             b->init = 1;
-            if (num == 0) {
+            if (num == 0) { /* BIO_set_conn_hostname */
                 char *hold_service = data->param_service;
                 /* We affect the hostname regardless.  However, the input
                  * string might contain a host:service spec, so we must
                  * parse it, which might or might not affect the service
                  */
+
                 OPENSSL_free(data->param_hostname);
                 data->param_hostname = NULL;
                 ret = BIO_parse_hostserv(ptr,
@@ -421,19 +431,29 @@ static long conn_ctrl(BIO *b, int cmd, long num, void *ptr)
                                          BIO_PARSE_PRIO_HOST);
                 if (hold_service != data->param_service)
                     OPENSSL_free(hold_service);
-            } else if (num == 1) {
+            } else if (num == 1) { /* BIO_set_conn_port */
                 OPENSSL_free(data->param_service);
-                data->param_service = BUF_strdup(ptr);
-            } else if (num == 2) {
+                if ((data->param_service = OPENSSL_strdup(ptr)) == NULL)
+                    ret = 0;
+            } else if (num == 2) { /* BIO_set_conn_address */
                 const BIO_ADDR *addr = (const BIO_ADDR *)ptr;
+                char *host = BIO_ADDR_hostname_string(addr, 1);
+                char *service = BIO_ADDR_service_string(addr, 1);
+
+                ret = host != NULL && service != NULL;
                 if (ret) {
-                    data->param_hostname = BIO_ADDR_hostname_string(addr, 1);
-                    data->param_service = BIO_ADDR_service_string(addr, 1);
+                    OPENSSL_free(data->param_hostname);
+                    data->param_hostname = host;
+                    OPENSSL_free(data->param_service);
+                    data->param_service = service;
                     BIO_ADDRINFO_free(data->addr_first);
                     data->addr_first = NULL;
                     data->addr_iter = NULL;
+                } else {
+                    OPENSSL_free(host);
+                    OPENSSL_free(service);
                 }
-            } else if (num == 3) {
+            } else if (num == 3) { /* BIO_set_conn_ip_family */
                 data->connect_family = *(int *)ptr;
             } else {
                 ret = 0;
diff --git a/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-avx2.pl b/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-avx2.pl
index 9b54f9d9ed3c..0be771febc16 100755
--- a/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-avx2.pl
+++ b/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-avx2.pl
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$addx = ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
 	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
 	$avx = ($ver>=3.0) + ($ver>=3.01);
 	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
diff --git a/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-x86_64.pl b/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-x86_64.pl
index 8172dace74ee..cf08ce9b8356 100755
--- a/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/bn/asm/rsaz-x86_64.pl
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$addx = ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
 	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
 	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
 }
diff --git a/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont.pl b/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont.pl
index e00cac448b89..f14d4e63b975 100755
--- a/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont.pl
+++ b/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont.pl
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$addx = ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
 	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
 	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
 }
diff --git a/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont5.pl b/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont5.pl
index 887770b30db1..8c37d132e476 100755
--- a/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont5.pl
+++ b/crypto/bn/asm/x86_64-mont5.pl
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$addx = ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
 	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
 	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
 }
diff --git a/crypto/bn/bn_gcd.c b/crypto/bn/bn_gcd.c
index ef81acb77ba6..0941f7b97f3f 100644
--- a/crypto/bn/bn_gcd.c
+++ b/crypto/bn/bn_gcd.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -10,22 +10,189 @@
 #include "internal/cryptlib.h"
 #include "bn_local.h"
 
-/* solves ax == 1 (mod n) */
-static BIGNUM *BN_mod_inverse_no_branch(BIGNUM *in,
-                                        const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n,
-                                        BN_CTX *ctx);
-
-BIGNUM *BN_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *in,
-                       const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n, BN_CTX *ctx)
+/*
+ * bn_mod_inverse_no_branch is a special version of BN_mod_inverse. It does
+ * not contain branches that may leak sensitive information.
+ *
+ * This is a static function, we ensure all callers in this file pass valid
+ * arguments: all passed pointers here are non-NULL.
+ */
+static ossl_inline
+BIGNUM *bn_mod_inverse_no_branch(BIGNUM *in,
+                                 const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n,
+                                 BN_CTX *ctx, int *pnoinv)
 {
-    BIGNUM *rv;
-    int noinv;
-    rv = int_bn_mod_inverse(in, a, n, ctx, &noinv);
-    if (noinv)
-        BNerr(BN_F_BN_MOD_INVERSE, BN_R_NO_INVERSE);
-    return rv;
+    BIGNUM *A, *B, *X, *Y, *M, *D, *T, *R = NULL;
+    BIGNUM *ret = NULL;
+    int sign;
+
+    bn_check_top(a);
+    bn_check_top(n);
+
+    BN_CTX_start(ctx);
+    A = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    B = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    X = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    D = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    M = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    Y = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    T = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
+    if (T == NULL)
+        goto err;
+
+    if (in == NULL)
+        R = BN_new();
+    else
+        R = in;
+    if (R == NULL)
+        goto err;
+
+    BN_one(X);
+    BN_zero(Y);
+    if (BN_copy(B, a) == NULL)
+        goto err;
+    if (BN_copy(A, n) == NULL)
+        goto err;
+    A->neg = 0;
+
+    if (B->neg || (BN_ucmp(B, A) >= 0)) {
+        /*
+         * Turn BN_FLG_CONSTTIME flag on, so that when BN_div is invoked,
+         * BN_div_no_branch will be called eventually.
+         */
+         {
+            BIGNUM local_B;
+            bn_init(&local_B);
+            BN_with_flags(&local_B, B, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME);
+            if (!BN_nnmod(B, &local_B, A, ctx))
+                goto err;
+            /* Ensure local_B goes out of scope before any further use of B */
+        }
+    }
+    sign = -1;
+    /*-
+     * From  B = a mod |n|,  A = |n|  it follows that
+     *
+     *      0 <= B < A,
+     *     -sign*X*a  ==  B   (mod |n|),
+     *      sign*Y*a  ==  A   (mod |n|).
+     */
+
+    while (!BN_is_zero(B)) {
+        BIGNUM *tmp;
+
+        /*-
+         *      0 < B < A,
+         * (*) -sign*X*a  ==  B   (mod |n|),
+         *      sign*Y*a  ==  A   (mod |n|)
+         */
+
+        /*
+         * Turn BN_FLG_CONSTTIME flag on, so that when BN_div is invoked,
+         * BN_div_no_branch will be called eventually.
+         */
+        {
+            BIGNUM local_A;
+            bn_init(&local_A);
+            BN_with_flags(&local_A, A, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME);
+
+            /* (D, M) := (A/B, A%B) ... */
+            if (!BN_div(D, M, &local_A, B, ctx))
+                goto err;
+            /* Ensure local_A goes out of scope before any further use of A */
+        }
+
+        /*-
+         * Now
+         *      A = D*B + M;
+         * thus we have
+         * (**)  sign*Y*a  ==  D*B + M   (mod |n|).
+         */
+
+        tmp = A;                /* keep the BIGNUM object, the value does not
+                                 * matter */
+
+        /* (A, B) := (B, A mod B) ... */
+        A = B;
+        B = M;
+        /* ... so we have  0 <= B < A  again */
+
+        /*-
+         * Since the former  M  is now  B  and the former  B  is now  A,
+         * (**) translates into
+         *       sign*Y*a  ==  D*A + B    (mod |n|),
+         * i.e.
+         *       sign*Y*a - D*A  ==  B    (mod |n|).
+         * Similarly, (*) translates into
+         *      -sign*X*a  ==  A          (mod |n|).
+         *
+         * Thus,
+         *   sign*Y*a + D*sign*X*a  ==  B  (mod |n|),
+         * i.e.
+         *        sign*(Y + D*X)*a  ==  B  (mod |n|).
+         *
+         * So if we set  (X, Y, sign) := (Y + D*X, X, -sign), we arrive back at
+         *      -sign*X*a  ==  B   (mod |n|),
+         *       sign*Y*a  ==  A   (mod |n|).
+         * Note that  X  and  Y  stay non-negative all the time.
+         */
+
+        if (!BN_mul(tmp, D, X, ctx))
+            goto err;
+        if (!BN_add(tmp, tmp, Y))
+            goto err;
+
+        M = Y;                  /* keep the BIGNUM object, the value does not
+                                 * matter */
+        Y = X;
+        X = tmp;
+        sign = -sign;
+    }
+
+    /*-
+     * The while loop (Euclid's algorithm) ends when
+     *      A == gcd(a,n);
+     * we have
+     *       sign*Y*a  ==  A  (mod |n|),
+     * where  Y  is non-negative.
+     */
+
+    if (sign < 0) {
+        if (!BN_sub(Y, n, Y))
+            goto err;
+    }
+    /* Now  Y*a  ==  A  (mod |n|).  */
+
+    if (BN_is_one(A)) {
+        /* Y*a == 1  (mod |n|) */
+        if (!Y->neg && BN_ucmp(Y, n) < 0) {
+            if (!BN_copy(R, Y))
+                goto err;
+        } else {
+            if (!BN_nnmod(R, Y, n, ctx))
+                goto err;
+        }
+    } else {
+        *pnoinv = 1;
+        /* caller sets the BN_R_NO_INVERSE error */
+        goto err;
+    }
+
+    ret = R;
+    *pnoinv = 0;
+
+ err:
+    if ((ret == NULL) && (in == NULL))
+        BN_free(R);
+    BN_CTX_end(ctx);
+    bn_check_top(ret);
+    return ret;
 }
 
+/*
+ * This is an internal function, we assume all callers pass valid arguments:
+ * all pointers passed here are assumed non-NULL.
+ */
 BIGNUM *int_bn_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *in,
                            const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n, BN_CTX *ctx,
                            int *pnoinv)
@@ -36,17 +203,15 @@ BIGNUM *int_bn_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *in,
 
     /* This is invalid input so we don't worry about constant time here */
     if (BN_abs_is_word(n, 1) || BN_is_zero(n)) {
-        if (pnoinv != NULL)
-            *pnoinv = 1;
+        *pnoinv = 1;
         return NULL;
     }
 
-    if (pnoinv != NULL)
-        *pnoinv = 0;
+    *pnoinv = 0;
 
     if ((BN_get_flags(a, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME) != 0)
         || (BN_get_flags(n, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME) != 0)) {
-        return BN_mod_inverse_no_branch(in, a, n, ctx);
+        return bn_mod_inverse_no_branch(in, a, n, ctx, pnoinv);
     }
 
     bn_check_top(a);
@@ -332,8 +497,7 @@ BIGNUM *int_bn_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *in,
                 goto err;
         }
     } else {
-        if (pnoinv)
-            *pnoinv = 1;
+        *pnoinv = 1;
         goto err;
     }
     ret = R;
@@ -345,175 +509,27 @@ BIGNUM *int_bn_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *in,
     return ret;
 }
 
-/*
- * BN_mod_inverse_no_branch is a special version of BN_mod_inverse. It does
- * not contain branches that may leak sensitive information.
- */
-static BIGNUM *BN_mod_inverse_no_branch(BIGNUM *in,
-                                        const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n,
-                                        BN_CTX *ctx)
+/* solves ax == 1 (mod n) */
+BIGNUM *BN_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *in,
+                       const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n, BN_CTX *ctx)
 {
-    BIGNUM *A, *B, *X, *Y, *M, *D, *T, *R = NULL;
-    BIGNUM *ret = NULL;
-    int sign;
+    BN_CTX *new_ctx = NULL;
+    BIGNUM *rv;
+    int noinv = 0;
 
-    bn_check_top(a);
-    bn_check_top(n);
-
-    BN_CTX_start(ctx);
-    A = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    B = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    X = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    D = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    M = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    Y = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    T = BN_CTX_get(ctx);
-    if (T == NULL)
-        goto err;
-
-    if (in == NULL)
-        R = BN_new();
-    else
-        R = in;
-    if (R == NULL)
-        goto err;
-
-    BN_one(X);
-    BN_zero(Y);
-    if (BN_copy(B, a) == NULL)
-        goto err;
-    if (BN_copy(A, n) == NULL)
-        goto err;
-    A->neg = 0;
-
-    if (B->neg || (BN_ucmp(B, A) >= 0)) {
-        /*
-         * Turn BN_FLG_CONSTTIME flag on, so that when BN_div is invoked,
-         * BN_div_no_branch will be called eventually.
-         */
-         {
-            BIGNUM local_B;
-            bn_init(&local_B);
-            BN_with_flags(&local_B, B, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME);
-            if (!BN_nnmod(B, &local_B, A, ctx))
-                goto err;
-            /* Ensure local_B goes out of scope before any further use of B */
+    if (ctx == NULL) {
+        ctx = new_ctx = BN_CTX_new();
+        if (ctx == NULL) {
+            BNerr(BN_F_BN_MOD_INVERSE, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
+            return NULL;
         }
     }
-    sign = -1;
-    /*-
-     * From  B = a mod |n|,  A = |n|  it follows that
-     *
-     *      0 <= B < A,
-     *     -sign*X*a  ==  B   (mod |n|),
-     *      sign*Y*a  ==  A   (mod |n|).
-     */
 
-    while (!BN_is_zero(B)) {
-        BIGNUM *tmp;
-
-        /*-
-         *      0 < B < A,
-         * (*) -sign*X*a  ==  B   (mod |n|),
-         *      sign*Y*a  ==  A   (mod |n|)
-         */
-
-        /*
-         * Turn BN_FLG_CONSTTIME flag on, so that when BN_div is invoked,
-         * BN_div_no_branch will be called eventually.
-         */
-        {
-            BIGNUM local_A;
-            bn_init(&local_A);
-            BN_with_flags(&local_A, A, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME);
-
-            /* (D, M) := (A/B, A%B) ... */
-            if (!BN_div(D, M, &local_A, B, ctx))
-                goto err;
-            /* Ensure local_A goes out of scope before any further use of A */
-        }
-
-        /*-
-         * Now
-         *      A = D*B + M;
-         * thus we have
-         * (**)  sign*Y*a  ==  D*B + M   (mod |n|).
-         */
-
-        tmp = A;                /* keep the BIGNUM object, the value does not
-                                 * matter */
-
-        /* (A, B) := (B, A mod B) ... */
-        A = B;
-        B = M;
-        /* ... so we have  0 <= B < A  again */
-
-        /*-
-         * Since the former  M  is now  B  and the former  B  is now  A,
-         * (**) translates into
-         *       sign*Y*a  ==  D*A + B    (mod |n|),
-         * i.e.
-         *       sign*Y*a - D*A  ==  B    (mod |n|).
-         * Similarly, (*) translates into
-         *      -sign*X*a  ==  A          (mod |n|).
-         *
-         * Thus,
-         *   sign*Y*a + D*sign*X*a  ==  B  (mod |n|),
-         * i.e.
-         *        sign*(Y + D*X)*a  ==  B  (mod |n|).
-         *
-         * So if we set  (X, Y, sign) := (Y + D*X, X, -sign), we arrive back at
-         *      -sign*X*a  ==  B   (mod |n|),
-         *       sign*Y*a  ==  A   (mod |n|).
-         * Note that  X  and  Y  stay non-negative all the time.
-         */
-
-        if (!BN_mul(tmp, D, X, ctx))
-            goto err;
-        if (!BN_add(tmp, tmp, Y))
-            goto err;
-
-        M = Y;                  /* keep the BIGNUM object, the value does not
-                                 * matter */
-        Y = X;
-        X = tmp;
-        sign = -sign;
-    }
-
-    /*-
-     * The while loop (Euclid's algorithm) ends when
-     *      A == gcd(a,n);
-     * we have
-     *       sign*Y*a  ==  A  (mod |n|),
-     * where  Y  is non-negative.
-     */
-
-    if (sign < 0) {
-        if (!BN_sub(Y, n, Y))
-            goto err;
-    }
-    /* Now  Y*a  ==  A  (mod |n|).  */
-
-    if (BN_is_one(A)) {
-        /* Y*a == 1  (mod |n|) */
-        if (!Y->neg && BN_ucmp(Y, n) < 0) {
-            if (!BN_copy(R, Y))
-                goto err;
-        } else {
-            if (!BN_nnmod(R, Y, n, ctx))
-                goto err;
-        }
-    } else {
-        BNerr(BN_F_BN_MOD_INVERSE_NO_BRANCH, BN_R_NO_INVERSE);
-        goto err;
-    }
-    ret = R;
- err:
-    if ((ret == NULL) && (in == NULL))
-        BN_free(R);
-    BN_CTX_end(ctx);
-    bn_check_top(ret);
-    return ret;
+    rv = int_bn_mod_inverse(in, a, n, ctx, &noinv);
+    if (noinv)
+        BNerr(BN_F_BN_MOD_INVERSE, BN_R_NO_INVERSE);
+    BN_CTX_free(new_ctx);
+    return rv;
 }
 
 /*-
diff --git a/crypto/bn/bn_lib.c b/crypto/bn/bn_lib.c
index 86d4956c8a8c..eb4a31849bef 100644
--- a/crypto/bn/bn_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/bn/bn_lib.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -87,6 +87,15 @@ const BIGNUM *BN_value_one(void)
     return &const_one;
 }
 
+/*
+ * Old Visual Studio ARM compiler miscompiles BN_num_bits_word()
+ * https://mta.openssl.org/pipermail/openssl-users/2018-August/008465.html
+ */
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && defined(_ARM_) && defined(_WIN32_WCE) \
+    && _MSC_VER>=1400 && _MSC_VER<1501
+# define MS_BROKEN_BN_num_bits_word
+# pragma optimize("", off)
+#endif
 int BN_num_bits_word(BN_ULONG l)
 {
     BN_ULONG x, mask;
@@ -131,6 +140,9 @@ int BN_num_bits_word(BN_ULONG l)
 
     return bits;
 }
+#ifdef MS_BROKEN_BN_num_bits_word
+# pragma optimize("", on)
+#endif
 
 /*
  * This function still leaks `a->dmax`: it's caller's responsibility to
@@ -322,15 +334,19 @@ BIGNUM *BN_dup(const BIGNUM *a)
 
 BIGNUM *BN_copy(BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *b)
 {
+    int bn_words;
+
     bn_check_top(b);
 
+    bn_words = BN_get_flags(b, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME) ? b->dmax : b->top;
+
     if (a == b)
         return a;
-    if (bn_wexpand(a, b->top) == NULL)
+    if (bn_wexpand(a, bn_words) == NULL)
         return NULL;
 
     if (b->top > 0)
-        memcpy(a->d, b->d, sizeof(b->d[0]) * b->top);
+        memcpy(a->d, b->d, sizeof(b->d[0]) * bn_words);
 
     a->neg = b->neg;
     a->top = b->top;
diff --git a/crypto/bn/bn_mpi.c b/crypto/bn/bn_mpi.c
index bdbe822415c7..0902da5d076e 100644
--- a/crypto/bn/bn_mpi.c
+++ b/crypto/bn/bn_mpi.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ BIGNUM *BN_mpi2bn(const unsigned char *d, int n, BIGNUM *ain)
     int neg = 0;
     BIGNUM *a = NULL;
 
-    if (n < 4) {
+    if (n < 4 || (d[0] & 0x80) != 0) {
         BNerr(BN_F_BN_MPI2BN, BN_R_INVALID_LENGTH);
         return NULL;
     }
diff --git a/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86.pl b/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86.pl
index a1f5694b691e..492fda5f114c 100755
--- a/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86.pl
+++ b/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86.pl
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ $ymm=1 if ($xmm && !$ymm && $ARGV[0] eq "win32" &&
 		$1>=10);	# first version supporting AVX
 
 $ymm=1 if ($xmm && !$ymm &&
-		`$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/ &&
+		`$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/ &&
 		$2>=3.0);	# first version supporting AVX
 
 $a="eax";
diff --git a/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86_64.pl b/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86_64.pl
index 647d2537ceae..227ee59ff2ba 100755
--- a/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/chacha/asm/chacha-x86_64.pl
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/cmac/cmac.c b/crypto/cmac/cmac.c
index 6989c32d0660..1fac53101687 100644
--- a/crypto/cmac/cmac.c
+++ b/crypto/cmac/cmac.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2010-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2010-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -116,11 +116,18 @@ int CMAC_Init(CMAC_CTX *ctx, const void *key, size_t keylen,
         return 1;
     }
     /* Initialise context */
-    if (cipher && !EVP_EncryptInit_ex(ctx->cctx, cipher, impl, NULL, NULL))
-        return 0;
+    if (cipher != NULL) {
+        /* Ensure we can't use this ctx until we also have a key */
+        ctx->nlast_block = -1;
+        if (!EVP_EncryptInit_ex(ctx->cctx, cipher, impl, NULL, NULL))
+            return 0;
+    }
     /* Non-NULL key means initialisation complete */
-    if (key) {
+    if (key != NULL) {
         int bl;
+
+        /* If anything fails then ensure we can't use this ctx */
+        ctx->nlast_block = -1;
         if (!EVP_CIPHER_CTX_cipher(ctx->cctx))
             return 0;
         if (!EVP_CIPHER_CTX_set_key_length(ctx->cctx, keylen))
@@ -128,7 +135,7 @@ int CMAC_Init(CMAC_CTX *ctx, const void *key, size_t keylen,
         if (!EVP_EncryptInit_ex(ctx->cctx, NULL, NULL, key, zero_iv))
             return 0;
         bl = EVP_CIPHER_CTX_block_size(ctx->cctx);
-        if (!EVP_Cipher(ctx->cctx, ctx->tbl, zero_iv, bl))
+        if (EVP_Cipher(ctx->cctx, ctx->tbl, zero_iv, bl) <= 0)
             return 0;
         make_kn(ctx->k1, ctx->tbl, bl);
         make_kn(ctx->k2, ctx->k1, bl);
@@ -166,12 +173,12 @@ int CMAC_Update(CMAC_CTX *ctx, const void *in, size_t dlen)
             return 1;
         data += nleft;
         /* Else not final block so encrypt it */
-        if (!EVP_Cipher(ctx->cctx, ctx->tbl, ctx->last_block, bl))
+        if (EVP_Cipher(ctx->cctx, ctx->tbl, ctx->last_block, bl) <= 0)
             return 0;
     }
     /* Encrypt all but one of the complete blocks left */
     while (dlen > bl) {
-        if (!EVP_Cipher(ctx->cctx, ctx->tbl, data, bl))
+        if (EVP_Cipher(ctx->cctx, ctx->tbl, data, bl) <= 0)
             return 0;
         dlen -= bl;
         data += bl;
diff --git a/crypto/cms/cms_lib.c b/crypto/cms/cms_lib.c
index 57afba436115..be4c2c703f1a 100644
--- a/crypto/cms/cms_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/cms/cms_lib.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -92,12 +92,13 @@ BIO *CMS_dataInit(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, BIO *icont)
 
     default:
         CMSerr(CMS_F_CMS_DATAINIT, CMS_R_UNSUPPORTED_TYPE);
-        return NULL;
+        goto err;
     }
 
     if (cmsbio)
         return BIO_push(cmsbio, cont);
 
+err:
     if (!icont)
         BIO_free(cont);
     return NULL;
diff --git a/crypto/cms/cms_sd.c b/crypto/cms/cms_sd.c
index 29ba4c1b1334..3f2a782565a8 100644
--- a/crypto/cms/cms_sd.c
+++ b/crypto/cms/cms_sd.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2008-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -897,8 +897,10 @@ int CMS_add_simple_smimecap(STACK_OF(X509_ALGOR) **algs,
     ASN1_INTEGER *key = NULL;
     if (keysize > 0) {
         key = ASN1_INTEGER_new();
-        if (key == NULL || !ASN1_INTEGER_set(key, keysize))
+        if (key == NULL || !ASN1_INTEGER_set(key, keysize)) {
+            ASN1_INTEGER_free(key);
             return 0;
+        }
     }
     alg = X509_ALGOR_new();
     if (alg == NULL) {
diff --git a/crypto/conf/conf_def.c b/crypto/conf/conf_def.c
index ca76fa3679b8..3d710f12ae07 100644
--- a/crypto/conf/conf_def.c
+++ b/crypto/conf/conf_def.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -376,11 +376,13 @@ static int def_load_bio(CONF *conf, BIO *in, long *line)
                     if (biosk == NULL) {
                         if ((biosk = sk_BIO_new_null()) == NULL) {
                             CONFerr(CONF_F_DEF_LOAD_BIO, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
+                            BIO_free(next);
                             goto err;
                         }
                     }
                     if (!sk_BIO_push(biosk, in)) {
                         CONFerr(CONF_F_DEF_LOAD_BIO, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
+                        BIO_free(next);
                         goto err;
                     }
                     /* continue with reading from the included BIO */
diff --git a/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-armv4.pl b/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-armv4.pl
index ea538c0698d5..fa833ce6aaf3 100755
--- a/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-armv4.pl
+++ b/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-armv4.pl
@@ -1517,9 +1517,9 @@ ecp_nistz256_point_add:
 	ldr	$t2,[sp,#32*18+12]	@ ~is_equal(S1,S2)
 	mvn	$t0,$t0			@ -1/0 -> 0/-1
 	mvn	$t1,$t1			@ -1/0 -> 0/-1
-	orr	$a0,$t0
-	orr	$a0,$t1
-	orrs	$a0,$t2			@ set flags
+	orr	$a0,$a0,$t0
+	orr	$a0,$a0,$t1
+	orrs	$a0,$a0,$t2		@ set flags
 
 	@ if(~is_equal(U1,U2) | in1infty | in2infty | ~is_equal(S1,S2))
 	bne	.Ladd_proceed
diff --git a/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-avx2.pl b/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-avx2.pl
deleted file mode 100755
index 5071d09ac2ec..000000000000
--- a/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-avx2.pl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2080 +0,0 @@
-#! /usr/bin/env perl
-# Copyright 2014-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
-# Copyright (c) 2014, Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
-#
-# Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
-# this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
-# in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
-# https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html
-#
-# Originally written by Shay Gueron (1, 2), and Vlad Krasnov (1)
-# (1) Intel Corporation, Israel Development Center, Haifa, Israel
-# (2) University of Haifa, Israel
-#
-# Reference:
-# S.Gueron and V.Krasnov, "Fast Prime Field Elliptic Curve Cryptography with
-#                          256 Bit Primes"
-
-$flavour = shift;
-$output  = shift;
-if ($flavour =~ /\./) { $output = $flavour; undef $flavour; }
-
-$win64=0; $win64=1 if ($flavour =~ /[nm]asm|mingw64/ || $output =~ /\.asm$/);
-
-$0 =~ m/(.*[\/\\])[^\/\\]+$/; $dir=$1;
-( $xlate="${dir}x86_64-xlate.pl" and -f $xlate ) or
-( $xlate="${dir}../../perlasm/x86_64-xlate.pl" and -f $xlate) or
-die "can't locate x86_64-xlate.pl";
-
-open OUT,"| \"$^X\" $xlate $flavour $output";
-*STDOUT=*OUT;
-
-if (`$ENV{CC} -Wa,-v -c -o /dev/null -x assembler /dev/null 2>&1`
-		=~ /GNU assembler version ([2-9]\.[0-9]+)/) {
-	$avx = ($1>=2.19) + ($1>=2.22);
-	$addx = ($1>=2.23);
-}
-
-if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /nasm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /nasm/) &&
-	    `nasm -v 2>&1` =~ /NASM version ([2-9]\.[0-9]+)/) {
-	$avx = ($1>=2.09) + ($1>=2.10);
-	$addx = ($1>=2.10);
-}
-
-if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
-	    `ml64 2>&1` =~ /Version ([0-9]+)\./) {
-	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
-	$addx = ($1>=12);
-}
-
-if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
-	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
-	$avx = ($ver>=3.0) + ($ver>=3.01);
-	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
-}
-
-if ($avx>=2) {{
-$digit_size = "\$29";
-$n_digits = "\$9";
-
-$code.=<<___;
-.text
-
-.align 64
-.LAVX2_AND_MASK:
-.LAVX2_POLY:
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x000001ff, 0x000001ff, 0x000001ff, 0x000001ff
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x00040000, 0x00040000, 0x00040000, 0x00040000
-.quad 0x1fe00000, 0x1fe00000, 0x1fe00000, 0x1fe00000
-.quad 0x00ffffff, 0x00ffffff, 0x00ffffff, 0x00ffffff
-
-.LAVX2_POLY_x2:
-.quad 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC
-.quad 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC
-.quad 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC
-.quad 0x400007FC, 0x400007FC, 0x400007FC, 0x400007FC
-.quad 0x3FFFFFFE, 0x3FFFFFFE, 0x3FFFFFFE, 0x3FFFFFFE
-.quad 0x3FFFFFFE, 0x3FFFFFFE, 0x3FFFFFFE, 0x3FFFFFFE
-.quad 0x400FFFFE, 0x400FFFFE, 0x400FFFFE, 0x400FFFFE
-.quad 0x7F7FFFFE, 0x7F7FFFFE, 0x7F7FFFFE, 0x7F7FFFFE
-.quad 0x03FFFFFC, 0x03FFFFFC, 0x03FFFFFC, 0x03FFFFFC
-
-.LAVX2_POLY_x8:
-.quad 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8
-.quad 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8
-.quad 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8, 0xFFFFFFF8
-.quad 0x80000FF8, 0x80000FF8, 0x80000FF8, 0x80000FF8
-.quad 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC
-.quad 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC, 0x7FFFFFFC
-.quad 0x801FFFFC, 0x801FFFFC, 0x801FFFFC, 0x801FFFFC
-.quad 0xFEFFFFFC, 0xFEFFFFFC, 0xFEFFFFFC, 0xFEFFFFFC
-.quad 0x07FFFFF8, 0x07FFFFF8, 0x07FFFFF8, 0x07FFFFF8
-
-.LONE:
-.quad 0x00000020, 0x00000020, 0x00000020, 0x00000020
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x1fffc000, 0x1fffc000, 0x1fffc000, 0x1fffc000
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1f7fffff, 0x1f7fffff, 0x1f7fffff, 0x1f7fffff
-.quad 0x03ffffff, 0x03ffffff, 0x03ffffff, 0x03ffffff
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-
-# RR = 2^266 mod p in AVX2 format, to transform from the native OpenSSL
-# Montgomery form (*2^256) to our format (*2^261)
-
-.LTO_MONT_AVX2:
-.quad 0x00000400, 0x00000400, 0x00000400, 0x00000400
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x1ff80000, 0x1ff80000, 0x1ff80000, 0x1ff80000
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x0fffffff, 0x0fffffff, 0x0fffffff, 0x0fffffff
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x00000003, 0x00000003, 0x00000003, 0x00000003
-
-.LFROM_MONT_AVX2:
-.quad 0x00000001, 0x00000001, 0x00000001, 0x00000001
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-.quad 0x1ffffe00, 0x1ffffe00, 0x1ffffe00, 0x1ffffe00
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff, 0x1fffffff
-.quad 0x1ffbffff, 0x1ffbffff, 0x1ffbffff, 0x1ffbffff
-.quad 0x001fffff, 0x001fffff, 0x001fffff, 0x001fffff
-.quad 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000, 0x00000000
-
-.LIntOne:
-.long 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
-___
-
-{
-# This function receives a pointer to an array of four affine points
-# (X, Y, <1>) and rearranges the data for AVX2 execution, while
-# converting it to 2^29 radix redundant form
-
-my ($X0,$X1,$X2,$X3, $Y0,$Y1,$Y2,$Y3,
-    $T0,$T1,$T2,$T3, $T4,$T5,$T6,$T7)=map("%ymm$_",(0..15));
-
-$code.=<<___;
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert,\@function,2
-.align 64
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert:
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-8-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	# Load the data
-	vmovdqa		32*0(%rsi), $X0
-	lea		112(%rsi), %rax		# size optimization
-	vmovdqa		32*1(%rsi), $Y0
-	lea		.LAVX2_AND_MASK(%rip), %rdx
-	vmovdqa		32*2(%rsi), $X1
-	vmovdqa		32*3(%rsi), $Y1
-	vmovdqa		32*4-112(%rax), $X2
-	vmovdqa		32*5-112(%rax), $Y2
-	vmovdqa		32*6-112(%rax), $X3
-	vmovdqa		32*7-112(%rax), $Y3
-
-	# Transpose X and Y independently
-	vpunpcklqdq	$X1, $X0, $T0		# T0 = [B2 A2 B0 A0]
-	vpunpcklqdq	$X3, $X2, $T1		# T1 = [D2 C2 D0 C0]
-	vpunpckhqdq	$X1, $X0, $T2		# T2 = [B3 A3 B1 A1]
-	vpunpckhqdq	$X3, $X2, $T3		# T3 = [D3 C3 D1 C1]
-
-	vpunpcklqdq	$Y1, $Y0, $T4
-	vpunpcklqdq	$Y3, $Y2, $T5
-	vpunpckhqdq	$Y1, $Y0, $T6
-	vpunpckhqdq	$Y3, $Y2, $T7
-
-	vperm2i128	\$0x20, $T1, $T0, $X0	# X0 = [D0 C0 B0 A0]
-	vperm2i128	\$0x20, $T3, $T2, $X1	# X1 = [D1 C1 B1 A1]
-	vperm2i128	\$0x31, $T1, $T0, $X2	# X2 = [D2 C2 B2 A2]
-	vperm2i128	\$0x31, $T3, $T2, $X3	# X3 = [D3 C3 B3 A3]
-
-	vperm2i128	\$0x20, $T5, $T4, $Y0
-	vperm2i128	\$0x20, $T7, $T6, $Y1
-	vperm2i128	\$0x31, $T5, $T4, $Y2
-	vperm2i128	\$0x31, $T7, $T6, $Y3
-	vmovdqa		(%rdx), $T7
-
-	vpand		(%rdx), $X0, $T0	# out[0] = in[0] & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $X0, $X0
-	vpand		$T7, $X0, $T1		# out[1] = (in[0] >> shift) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $X0, $X0
-	vpsllq		\$6, $X1, $T2
-	vpxor		$X0, $T2, $T2
-	vpand		$T7, $T2, $T2		# out[2] = ((in[0] >> (shift*2)) ^ (in[1] << (64-shift*2))) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$23, $X1, $X1
-	vpand		$T7, $X1, $T3		# out[3] = (in[1] >> ((shift*3)%64)) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $X1, $X1
-	vpsllq		\$12, $X2, $T4
-	vpxor		$X1, $T4, $T4
-	vpand		$T7, $T4, $T4		# out[4] = ((in[1] >> ((shift*4)%64)) ^ (in[2] << (64*2-shift*4))) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$17, $X2, $X2
-	vpand		$T7, $X2, $T5		# out[5] = (in[2] >> ((shift*5)%64)) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $X2, $X2
-	vpsllq		\$18, $X3, $T6
-	vpxor		$X2, $T6, $T6
-	vpand		$T7, $T6, $T6		# out[6] = ((in[2] >> ((shift*6)%64)) ^ (in[3] << (64*3-shift*6))) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$11, $X3, $X3
-	 vmovdqa	$T0, 32*0(%rdi)
-	 lea		112(%rdi), %rax		# size optimization
-	vpand		$T7, $X3, $T0		# out[7] = (in[3] >> ((shift*7)%64)) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $X3, $X3		# out[8] = (in[3] >> ((shift*8)%64)) & mask;
-
-	vmovdqa		$T1, 32*1(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$T2, 32*2(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$T3, 32*3(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$T4, 32*4-112(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T5, 32*5-112(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T6, 32*6-112(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T0, 32*7-112(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$X3, 32*8-112(%rax)
-	lea		448(%rdi), %rax		# size optimization
-
-	vpand		$T7, $Y0, $T0		# out[0] = in[0] & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $Y0, $Y0
-	vpand		$T7, $Y0, $T1		# out[1] = (in[0] >> shift) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $Y0, $Y0
-	vpsllq		\$6, $Y1, $T2
-	vpxor		$Y0, $T2, $T2
-	vpand		$T7, $T2, $T2		# out[2] = ((in[0] >> (shift*2)) ^ (in[1] << (64-shift*2))) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$23, $Y1, $Y1
-	vpand		$T7, $Y1, $T3		# out[3] = (in[1] >> ((shift*3)%64)) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $Y1, $Y1
-	vpsllq		\$12, $Y2, $T4
-	vpxor		$Y1, $T4, $T4
-	vpand		$T7, $T4, $T4		# out[4] = ((in[1] >> ((shift*4)%64)) ^ (in[2] << (64*2-shift*4))) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$17, $Y2, $Y2
-	vpand		$T7, $Y2, $T5		# out[5] = (in[2] >> ((shift*5)%64)) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $Y2, $Y2
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y3, $T6
-	vpxor		$Y2, $T6, $T6
-	vpand		$T7, $T6, $T6		# out[6] = ((in[2] >> ((shift*6)%64)) ^ (in[3] << (64*3-shift*6))) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$11, $Y3, $Y3
-	 vmovdqa	$T0, 32*9-448(%rax)
-	vpand		$T7, $Y3, $T0		# out[7] = (in[3] >> ((shift*7)%64)) & mask;
-	vpsrlq		\$29, $Y3, $Y3		# out[8] = (in[3] >> ((shift*8)%64)) & mask;
-
-	vmovdqa		$T1, 32*10-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T2, 32*11-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T3, 32*12-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T4, 32*13-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T5, 32*14-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T6, 32*15-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$T0, 32*16-448(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$Y3, 32*17-448(%rax)
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	16*0(%rsp), %xmm6
-	movaps	16*1(%rsp), %xmm7
-	movaps	16*2(%rsp), %xmm8
-	movaps	16*3(%rsp), %xmm9
-	movaps	16*4(%rsp), %xmm10
-	movaps	16*5(%rsp), %xmm11
-	movaps	16*6(%rsp), %xmm12
-	movaps	16*7(%rsp), %xmm13
-	movaps	16*8(%rsp), %xmm14
-	movaps	16*9(%rsp), %xmm15
-	lea	8+16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert
-___
-}
-{
-################################################################################
-# This function receives a pointer to an array of four AVX2 formatted points
-# (X, Y, Z) convert the data to normal representation, and rearranges the data
-
-my ($D0,$D1,$D2,$D3, $D4,$D5,$D6,$D7, $D8)=map("%ymm$_",(0..8));
-my ($T0,$T1,$T2,$T3, $T4,$T5,$T6)=map("%ymm$_",(9..15));
-
-$code.=<<___;
-
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back,\@function,2
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back:
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-8-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	mov	\$3, %ecx
-
-.Lconv_loop:
-	vmovdqa		32*0(%rsi), $D0
-	lea		160(%rsi), %rax		# size optimization
-	vmovdqa		32*1(%rsi), $D1
-	vmovdqa		32*2(%rsi), $D2
-	vmovdqa		32*3(%rsi), $D3
-	vmovdqa		32*4-160(%rax), $D4
-	vmovdqa		32*5-160(%rax), $D5
-	vmovdqa		32*6-160(%rax), $D6
-	vmovdqa		32*7-160(%rax), $D7
-	vmovdqa		32*8-160(%rax), $D8
-
-	vpsllq		\$29, $D1, $D1
-	vpsllq		\$58, $D2, $T0
-	vpaddq		$D1, $D0, $D0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $D0, $D0		# out[0] = (in[0]) ^ (in[1] << shift*1) ^ (in[2] << shift*2);
-
-	vpsrlq		\$6, $D2, $D2
-	vpsllq		\$23, $D3, $D3
-	vpsllq		\$52, $D4, $T1
-	vpaddq		$D2, $D3, $D3
-	vpaddq		$D3, $T1, $D1		# out[1] = (in[2] >> (64*1-shift*2)) ^ (in[3] << shift*3%64) ^ (in[4] << shift*4%64);
-
-	vpsrlq		\$12, $D4, $D4
-	vpsllq		\$17, $D5, $D5
-	vpsllq		\$46, $D6, $T2
-	vpaddq		$D4, $D5, $D5
-	vpaddq		$D5, $T2, $D2		# out[2] = (in[4] >> (64*2-shift*4)) ^ (in[5] << shift*5%64) ^ (in[6] << shift*6%64);
-
-	vpsrlq		\$18, $D6, $D6
-	vpsllq		\$11, $D7, $D7
-	vpsllq		\$40, $D8, $T3
-	vpaddq		$D6, $D7, $D7
-	vpaddq		$D7, $T3, $D3		# out[3] = (in[6] >> (64*3-shift*6)) ^ (in[7] << shift*7%64) ^ (in[8] << shift*8%64);
-
-	vpunpcklqdq	$D1, $D0, $T0		# T0 = [B2 A2 B0 A0]
-	vpunpcklqdq	$D3, $D2, $T1		# T1 = [D2 C2 D0 C0]
-	vpunpckhqdq	$D1, $D0, $T2		# T2 = [B3 A3 B1 A1]
-	vpunpckhqdq	$D3, $D2, $T3		# T3 = [D3 C3 D1 C1]
-
-	vperm2i128	\$0x20, $T1, $T0, $D0	# X0 = [D0 C0 B0 A0]
-	vperm2i128	\$0x20, $T3, $T2, $D1	# X1 = [D1 C1 B1 A1]
-	vperm2i128	\$0x31, $T1, $T0, $D2	# X2 = [D2 C2 B2 A2]
-	vperm2i128	\$0x31, $T3, $T2, $D3	# X3 = [D3 C3 B3 A3]
-
-	vmovdqa		$D0, 32*0(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$D1, 32*3(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$D2, 32*6(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$D3, 32*9(%rdi)
-
-	lea		32*9(%rsi), %rsi
-	lea		32*1(%rdi), %rdi
-
-	dec	%ecx
-	jnz	.Lconv_loop
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	16*0(%rsp), %xmm6
-	movaps	16*1(%rsp), %xmm7
-	movaps	16*2(%rsp), %xmm8
-	movaps	16*3(%rsp), %xmm9
-	movaps	16*4(%rsp), %xmm10
-	movaps	16*5(%rsp), %xmm11
-	movaps	16*6(%rsp), %xmm12
-	movaps	16*7(%rsp), %xmm13
-	movaps	16*8(%rsp), %xmm14
-	movaps	16*9(%rsp), %xmm15
-	lea	8+16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back
-___
-}
-{
-my ($r_ptr,$a_ptr,$b_ptr,$itr)=("%rdi","%rsi","%rdx","%ecx");
-my ($ACC0,$ACC1,$ACC2,$ACC3,$ACC4,$ACC5,$ACC6,$ACC7,$ACC8)=map("%ymm$_",(0..8));
-my ($B,$Y,$T0,$AND_MASK,$OVERFLOW)=map("%ymm$_",(9..13));
-
-sub NORMALIZE {
-my $ret=<<___;
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC0, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC1
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC1, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC2, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC3
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC3, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC4, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC5, $ACC5
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC5, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC6, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC7, $ACC7
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC7, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	#vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC8, $ACC8
-___
-    $ret;
-}
-
-sub STORE {
-my $ret=<<___;
-	vmovdqa		$ACC0, 32*0(%rdi)
-	lea		160(%rdi), %rax		# size optimization
-	vmovdqa		$ACC1, 32*1(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC2, 32*2(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC3, 32*3(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, 32*4-160(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, 32*5-160(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC6, 32*6-160(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC7, 32*7-160(%rax)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC8, 32*8-160(%rax)
-___
-    $ret;
-}
-
-$code.=<<___;
-.type	avx2_normalize,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_normalize:
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC0, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC1
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC1, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC2, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC3
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC3, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC4, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC5, $ACC5
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC5, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC6, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC7, $ACC7
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC7, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	#vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_normalize,.-avx2_normalize
-
-.type	avx2_normalize_n_store,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_normalize_n_store:
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC0, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC1
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC1, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC0, 32*0(%rdi)
-	 lea		160(%rdi), %rax		# size optimization
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC2, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC1, 32*1(%rdi)
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC3
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC3, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC2, 32*2(%rdi)
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC4, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC3, 32*3(%rdi)
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC5, $ACC5
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC5, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC4, 32*4-160(%rax)
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC6, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC5, 32*5-160(%rax)
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC7, $ACC7
-
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $ACC7, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC6, 32*6-160(%rax)
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	#vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC7, 32*7-160(%rax)
-	 vmovdqa	$ACC8, 32*8-160(%rax)
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_normalize_n_store,.-avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-################################################################################
-# void avx2_mul_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4, void *Bx4);
-.type	avx2_mul_x4,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_mul_x4:
-	lea	.LAVX2_POLY(%rip), %rax
-
-	vpxor	$ACC0, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpxor	$ACC1, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpxor	$ACC2, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpxor	$ACC3, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpxor	$ACC4, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpxor	$ACC5, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpxor	$ACC6, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpxor	$ACC7, $ACC7, $ACC7
-
-	vmovdqa	32*7(%rax), %ymm14
-	vmovdqa	32*8(%rax), %ymm15
-
-	mov	$n_digits, $itr
-	lea	-512($a_ptr), $a_ptr	# strategic bias to control u-op density
-	jmp	.Lavx2_mul_x4_loop
-
-.align	32
-.Lavx2_mul_x4_loop:
-	vmovdqa		32*0($b_ptr), $B
-	lea		32*1($b_ptr), $b_ptr
-
-	vpmuludq	32*0+512($a_ptr), $B, $T0
-	vpmuludq	32*1+512($a_ptr), $B, $OVERFLOW	# borrow $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpmuludq	32*2+512($a_ptr), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpmuludq	32*3+512($a_ptr), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpmuludq	32*4+512($a_ptr), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpmuludq	32*5+512($a_ptr), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	32*6+512($a_ptr), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	32*7+512($a_ptr), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	# Skip some multiplications, optimizing for the constant poly
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*8+512($a_ptr), $B, $ACC8
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	.byte		0x67
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	.byte		0x67
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	dec	$itr
-	jnz	.Lavx2_mul_x4_loop
-
-	vpxor	$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_mul_x4,.-avx2_mul_x4
-
-# Function optimized for the constant 1
-################################################################################
-# void avx2_mul_by1_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4);
-.type	avx2_mul_by1_x4,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_mul_by1_x4:
-	lea	.LAVX2_POLY(%rip), %rax
-
-	vpxor	$ACC0, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpxor	$ACC1, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpxor	$ACC2, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpxor	$ACC3, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpxor	$ACC4, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpxor	$ACC5, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpxor	$ACC6, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpxor	$ACC7, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpxor	$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	vmovdqa	32*3+.LONE(%rip), %ymm14
-	vmovdqa	32*7+.LONE(%rip), %ymm15
-
-	mov	$n_digits, $itr
-	jmp	.Lavx2_mul_by1_x4_loop
-
-.align	32
-.Lavx2_mul_by1_x4_loop:
-	vmovdqa		32*0($a_ptr), $B
-	.byte		0x48,0x8d,0xb6,0x20,0,0,0	# lea	32*1($a_ptr), $a_ptr
-
-	vpsllq		\$5, $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	.byte		0x67
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $B, $T0
-	vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpsllq		\$23, $B, $T0
-
-	.byte		0x67,0x67
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpsubq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	.byte		0x67,0x67
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	32*7(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpmuludq	32*8(%rax), $Y, $ACC7
-
-	dec	$itr
-	jnz	.Lavx2_mul_by1_x4_loop
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_mul_by1_x4,.-avx2_mul_by1_x4
-
-################################################################################
-# void avx2_sqr_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4, void *Bx4);
-.type	avx2_sqr_x4,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_sqr_x4:
-	lea		.LAVX2_POLY(%rip), %rax
-
-	vmovdqa		32*7(%rax), %ymm14
-	vmovdqa		32*8(%rax), %ymm15
-
-	vmovdqa		32*0($a_ptr), $B
-	vmovdqa		32*1($a_ptr), $ACC1
-	vmovdqa		32*2($a_ptr), $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		32*3($a_ptr), $ACC3
-	vmovdqa		32*4($a_ptr), $ACC4
-	vmovdqa		32*5($a_ptr), $ACC5
-	vmovdqa		32*6($a_ptr), $ACC6
-	vmovdqa		32*7($a_ptr), $ACC7
-	vpaddq		$ACC1, $ACC1, $ACC1	# 2*$ACC0..7
-	vmovdqa		32*8($a_ptr), $ACC8
-	vpaddq		$ACC2, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC1, 32*0(%rcx)
-	vpaddq		$ACC3, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vmovdqa		$ACC2, 32*1(%rcx)
-	vpaddq		$ACC4, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vmovdqa		$ACC3, 32*2(%rcx)
-	vpaddq		$ACC5, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, 32*3(%rcx)
-	vpaddq		$ACC6, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, 32*4(%rcx)
-	vpaddq		$ACC7, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vmovdqa		$ACC6, 32*5(%rcx)
-	vpaddq		$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	vmovdqa		$ACC7, 32*6(%rcx)
-	vmovdqa		$ACC8, 32*7(%rcx)
-
-	#itr		1
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $ACC0
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	 vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpmuludq	$B, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*1($a_ptr), $B
-
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		2
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $OVERFLOW
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpmuludq	32*1(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*2(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpmuludq	32*4(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	32*5(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	32*6(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*2($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		3
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpmuludq	32*2(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpmuludq	32*4(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	32*5(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	32*6(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*3($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		4
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpmuludq	32*4(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	32*5(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	32*6(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*4($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		5
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $T0
-	vpmuludq	32*4(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	32*5(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	32*6(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*5($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3+.LAVX2_POLY(%rip), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		6
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpmuludq	32*5(%rcx), $B, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	32*6(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*6($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		7
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $T0
-	vpmuludq	32*6(%rcx), $B, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*7($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		8
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $OVERFLOW
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	 vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	 vpmuludq	32*7(%rcx), $B, $ACC8
-	 vmovdqa	32*8($a_ptr), $B
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	 vpand		$AND_MASK, $ACC0, $Y
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	#itr		9
-	vpmuludq	$B, $B, $ACC8
-
-	vpmuludq	$AND_MASK, $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC0, $OVERFLOW
-	vpsrlq		$digit_size, $OVERFLOW, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC1, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC2, $ACC1
-	vpmuludq	32*3(%rax), $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC3, $ACC2
-	vmovdqa		$ACC4, $ACC3
-	vpsllq		\$18, $Y, $T0
-	vmovdqa		$ACC5, $ACC4
-	vpmuludq	%ymm14, $Y, $OVERFLOW
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC6, $ACC5
-	vpmuludq	%ymm15, $Y, $T0
-	vpaddq		$OVERFLOW, $ACC7, $ACC6
-	vpaddq		$T0, $ACC8, $ACC7
-
-	vpxor		$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_sqr_x4,.-avx2_sqr_x4
-
-################################################################################
-# void avx2_sub_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4, void *Bx4);
-.type	avx2_sub_x4,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_sub_x4:
-	vmovdqa	32*0($a_ptr), $ACC0
-	lea	160($a_ptr), $a_ptr
-	lea	.LAVX2_POLY_x8+128(%rip), %rax
-	lea	128($b_ptr), $b_ptr
-	vmovdqa	32*1-160($a_ptr), $ACC1
-	vmovdqa	32*2-160($a_ptr), $ACC2
-	vmovdqa	32*3-160($a_ptr), $ACC3
-	vmovdqa	32*4-160($a_ptr), $ACC4
-	vmovdqa	32*5-160($a_ptr), $ACC5
-	vmovdqa	32*6-160($a_ptr), $ACC6
-	vmovdqa	32*7-160($a_ptr), $ACC7
-	vmovdqa	32*8-160($a_ptr), $ACC8
-
-	vpaddq	32*0-128(%rax), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq	32*1-128(%rax), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq	32*2-128(%rax), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq	32*3-128(%rax), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq	32*4-128(%rax), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq	32*5-128(%rax), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq	32*6-128(%rax), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq	32*7-128(%rax), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq	32*8-128(%rax), $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	vpsubq	32*0-128($b_ptr), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpsubq	32*1-128($b_ptr), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpsubq	32*2-128($b_ptr), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpsubq	32*3-128($b_ptr), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpsubq	32*4-128($b_ptr), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpsubq	32*5-128($b_ptr), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpsubq	32*6-128($b_ptr), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpsubq	32*7-128($b_ptr), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpsubq	32*8-128($b_ptr), $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_sub_x4,.-avx2_sub_x4
-
-.type	avx2_select_n_store,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_select_n_store:
-	vmovdqa	`8+32*9*8`(%rsp), $Y
-	vpor	`8+32*9*8+32`(%rsp), $Y, $Y
-
-	vpandn	$ACC0, $Y, $ACC0
-	vpandn	$ACC1, $Y, $ACC1
-	vpandn	$ACC2, $Y, $ACC2
-	vpandn	$ACC3, $Y, $ACC3
-	vpandn	$ACC4, $Y, $ACC4
-	vpandn	$ACC5, $Y, $ACC5
-	vpandn	$ACC6, $Y, $ACC6
-	vmovdqa	`8+32*9*8+32`(%rsp), $B
-	vpandn	$ACC7, $Y, $ACC7
-	vpandn	`8+32*9*8`(%rsp), $B, $B
-	vpandn	$ACC8, $Y, $ACC8
-
-	vpand	32*0(%rsi), $B, $T0
-	lea	160(%rsi), %rax
-	vpand	32*1(%rsi), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpand	32*2(%rsi), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpand	32*3(%rsi), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpand	32*4-160(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpand	32*5-160(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpand	32*6-160(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpand	32*7-160(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpand	32*8-160(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vmovdqa	`8+32*9*8+32`(%rsp), $B
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC7, $ACC7
-
-	vpand	32*0(%rdx), $B, $Y
-	lea	160(%rdx), %rax
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	vpand	32*1(%rdx), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpand	32*2(%rdx), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpand	32*3(%rdx), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpand	32*4-160(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpand	32*5-160(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpand	32*6-160(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpand	32*7-160(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpand	32*8-160(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	`&STORE`
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_select_n_store,.-avx2_select_n_store
-___
-$code.=<<___	if (0);				# inlined
-################################################################################
-# void avx2_mul_by2_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4);
-.type	avx2_mul_by2_x4,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-avx2_mul_by2_x4:
-	vmovdqa	32*0($a_ptr), $ACC0
-	lea	160($a_ptr), %rax
-	vmovdqa	32*1($a_ptr), $ACC1
-	vmovdqa	32*2($a_ptr), $ACC2
-	vmovdqa	32*3($a_ptr), $ACC3
-	vmovdqa	32*4-160(%rax), $ACC4
-	vmovdqa	32*5-160(%rax), $ACC5
-	vmovdqa	32*6-160(%rax), $ACC6
-	vmovdqa	32*7-160(%rax), $ACC7
-	vmovdqa	32*8-160(%rax), $ACC8
-
-	vpaddq	$ACC0, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq	$ACC1, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq	$ACC2, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq	$ACC3, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq	$ACC4, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq	$ACC5, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq	$ACC6, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq	$ACC7, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq	$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	ret
-.size	avx2_mul_by2_x4,.-avx2_mul_by2_x4
-___
-my ($r_ptr_in,$a_ptr_in,$b_ptr_in)=("%rdi","%rsi","%rdx");
-my ($r_ptr,$a_ptr,$b_ptr)=("%r8","%r9","%r10");
-
-$code.=<<___;
-################################################################################
-# void ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4, void *Bx4);
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4,\@function,3
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4:
-	mov	%rsp, %rax
-	push    %rbp
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	lea	-8(%rax), %rbp
-
-# Result + 32*0 = Result.X
-# Result + 32*9 = Result.Y
-# Result + 32*18 = Result.Z
-
-# A + 32*0 = A.X
-# A + 32*9 = A.Y
-# A + 32*18 = A.Z
-
-# B + 32*0 = B.X
-# B + 32*9 = B.Y
-
-	sub	\$`32*9*8+32*2+32*8`, %rsp
-	and	\$-64, %rsp
-
-	mov	$r_ptr_in, $r_ptr
-	mov	$a_ptr_in, $a_ptr
-	mov	$b_ptr_in, $b_ptr
-
-	vmovdqa	32*0($a_ptr_in), %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	.LAVX2_AND_MASK(%rip), $AND_MASK
-	vpxor	%ymm1, %ymm1, %ymm1
-	lea	256($a_ptr_in), %rax		# size optimization
-	vpor	32*1($a_ptr_in), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*2($a_ptr_in), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*3($a_ptr_in), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*4-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	lea	256(%rax), %rcx			# size optimization
-	vpor	32*5-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*6-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*7-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*8-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*9-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*10-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*11-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*12-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*13-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*14-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*15-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*16-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*17-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpcmpeqq %ymm1, %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	%ymm0, `32*9*8`(%rsp)
-
-	vpxor	%ymm1, %ymm1, %ymm1
-	vmovdqa	32*0($b_ptr), %ymm0
-	lea	256($b_ptr), %rax		# size optimization
-	vpor	32*1($b_ptr), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*2($b_ptr), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*3($b_ptr), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*4-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	lea	256(%rax), %rcx			# size optimization
-	vpor	32*5-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*6-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*7-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*8-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*9-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*10-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*11-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*12-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*13-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*14-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*15-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*16-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*17-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpcmpeqq %ymm1, %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	%ymm0, `32*9*8+32`(%rsp)
-
-	#	Z1^2 = Z1*Z1
-	lea	`32*9*2`($a_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*2`(%rsp), %rdi
-	lea	`32*9*8+32*2`(%rsp), %rcx	# temporary vector
-	call	avx2_sqr_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	U2 = X2*Z1^2
-	lea	`32*9*0`($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*2`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*0`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	#call	avx2_normalize
-	`&STORE`
-
-	#	S2 = Z1*Z1^2 = Z1^3
-	lea	`32*9*2`($a_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*2`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	S2 = S2*Y2 = Y2*Z1^3
-	lea	`32*9*1`($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	H = U2 - U1 = U2 - X1
-	lea	`32*9*0`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*0`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	R = S2 - S1 = S2 - Y1
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*4`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	Z3 = H*Z1*Z2
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*2`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*2`($r_ptr), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize
-
-	lea	.LONE(%rip), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*2`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	call	avx2_select_n_store
-
-	#	R^2 = R^2
-	lea	`32*9*4`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*6`(%rsp), %rdi
-	lea	`32*9*8+32*2`(%rsp), %rcx	# temporary vector
-	call	avx2_sqr_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	H^2 = H^2
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sqr_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	H^3 = H^2*H
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*7`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	U2 = U1*H^2
-	lea	`32*9*0`($a_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*0`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	#call	avx2_normalize
-	`&STORE`
-
-	#	Hsqr = U2*2
-	#lea	32*9*0(%rsp), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*5(%rsp), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_mul_by2_x4
-
-	vpaddq	$ACC0, $ACC0, $ACC0	# inlined avx2_mul_by2_x4
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdi
-	vpaddq	$ACC1, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq	$ACC2, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq	$ACC3, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq	$ACC4, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq	$ACC5, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq	$ACC6, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq	$ACC7, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq	$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	X3 = R^2 - H^3
-	#lea	32*9*6(%rsp), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*7(%rsp), %rdx
-	#lea	32*9*5(%rsp), %rcx
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_sub_x4
-	#NORMALIZE
-	#STORE
-
-	#	X3 = X3 - U2*2
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_sub_x4
-	#NORMALIZE
-	#STORE
-
-	lea	`32*9*6+128`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	.LAVX2_POLY_x2+128(%rip), %rax
-	lea	`32*9*7+128`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*5+128`(%rsp), %rcx
-	lea	`32*9*0`($r_ptr), %rdi
-
-	vmovdqa	32*0-128(%rsi), $ACC0
-	vmovdqa	32*1-128(%rsi), $ACC1
-	vmovdqa	32*2-128(%rsi), $ACC2
-	vmovdqa	32*3-128(%rsi), $ACC3
-	vmovdqa	32*4-128(%rsi), $ACC4
-	vmovdqa	32*5-128(%rsi), $ACC5
-	vmovdqa	32*6-128(%rsi), $ACC6
-	vmovdqa	32*7-128(%rsi), $ACC7
-	vmovdqa	32*8-128(%rsi), $ACC8
-
-	vpaddq	32*0-128(%rax), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq	32*1-128(%rax), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq	32*2-128(%rax), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq	32*3-128(%rax), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq	32*4-128(%rax), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq	32*5-128(%rax), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq	32*6-128(%rax), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq	32*7-128(%rax), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq	32*8-128(%rax), $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	vpsubq	32*0-128(%rdx), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpsubq	32*1-128(%rdx), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpsubq	32*2-128(%rdx), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpsubq	32*3-128(%rdx), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpsubq	32*4-128(%rdx), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpsubq	32*5-128(%rdx), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpsubq	32*6-128(%rdx), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpsubq	32*7-128(%rdx), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpsubq	32*8-128(%rdx), $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	vpsubq	32*0-128(%rcx), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpsubq	32*1-128(%rcx), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpsubq	32*2-128(%rcx), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpsubq	32*3-128(%rcx), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpsubq	32*4-128(%rcx), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpsubq	32*5-128(%rcx), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpsubq	32*6-128(%rcx), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpsubq	32*7-128(%rcx), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpsubq	32*8-128(%rcx), $ACC8, $ACC8
-	call	avx2_normalize
-
-	lea	32*0($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	32*0($a_ptr), %rdx
-	call	avx2_select_n_store
-
-	#	H = U2 - X3
-	lea	`32*9*0`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*0`($r_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*4`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#
-	lea	`32*9*7`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*1`($r_ptr), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize
-
-	lea	32*9($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	32*9($a_ptr), %rdx
-	call	avx2_select_n_store
-
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_mul_by1_x4
-	#NORMALIZE
-	#STORE
-
-	lea	`32*9*1`($r_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`($r_ptr), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_by1_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	%xmm6, -16*10(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm7, -16*9(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm8, -16*8(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm9, -16*7(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm10, -16*6(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm11, -16*5(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm12, -16*4(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm13, -16*3(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm14, -16*2(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm15, -16*1(%rbp)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	mov	%rbp, %rsp
-	pop	%rbp
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4
-
-################################################################################
-# void ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4, void *Bx4);
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4,\@function,3
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4:
-	mov	%rsp, %rax
-	push    %rbp
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	lea	-8(%rax), %rbp
-
-# Result + 32*0 = Result.X
-# Result + 32*9 = Result.Y
-# Result + 32*18 = Result.Z
-
-# A + 32*0 = A.X
-# A + 32*9 = A.Y
-
-# B + 32*0 = B.X
-# B + 32*9 = B.Y
-
-	sub	\$`32*9*8+32*2+32*8`, %rsp
-	and	\$-64, %rsp
-
-	mov	$r_ptr_in, $r_ptr
-	mov	$a_ptr_in, $a_ptr
-	mov	$b_ptr_in, $b_ptr
-
-	vmovdqa	32*0($a_ptr_in), %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	.LAVX2_AND_MASK(%rip), $AND_MASK
-	vpxor	%ymm1, %ymm1, %ymm1
-	lea	256($a_ptr_in), %rax		# size optimization
-	vpor	32*1($a_ptr_in), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*2($a_ptr_in), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*3($a_ptr_in), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*4-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	lea	256(%rax), %rcx			# size optimization
-	vpor	32*5-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*6-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*7-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*8-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*9-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*10-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*11-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*12-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*13-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*14-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*15-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*16-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*17-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpcmpeqq %ymm1, %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	%ymm0, `32*9*8`(%rsp)
-
-	vpxor	%ymm1, %ymm1, %ymm1
-	vmovdqa	32*0($b_ptr), %ymm0
-	lea	256($b_ptr), %rax		# size optimization
-	vpor	32*1($b_ptr), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*2($b_ptr), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*3($b_ptr), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*4-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	lea	256(%rax), %rcx			# size optimization
-	vpor	32*5-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*6-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*7-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*8-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*9-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*10-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*11-256(%rax), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*12-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*13-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*14-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*15-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*16-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpor	32*17-512(%rcx), %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vpcmpeqq %ymm1, %ymm0, %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	%ymm0, `32*9*8+32`(%rsp)
-
-	#	H = U2 - U1 = X2 - X1
-	lea	`32*9*0`($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*0`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	R = S2 - S1 = Y2 - Y1
-	lea	`32*9*1`($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*4`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	Z3 = H*Z1*Z2 = H
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*2`($r_ptr), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_by1_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize
-
-	vmovdqa	`32*9*8`(%rsp), $B
-	vpor	`32*9*8+32`(%rsp), $B, $B
-
-	vpandn	$ACC0, $B, $ACC0
-	lea	.LONE+128(%rip), %rax
-	vpandn	$ACC1, $B, $ACC1
-	vpandn	$ACC2, $B, $ACC2
-	vpandn	$ACC3, $B, $ACC3
-	vpandn	$ACC4, $B, $ACC4
-	vpandn	$ACC5, $B, $ACC5
-	vpandn	$ACC6, $B, $ACC6
-	vpandn	$ACC7, $B, $ACC7
-
-	vpand	32*0-128(%rax), $B, $T0
-	 vpandn	$ACC8, $B, $ACC8
-	vpand	32*1-128(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpand	32*2-128(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpand	32*3-128(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpand	32*4-128(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpand	32*5-128(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpand	32*6-128(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpand	32*7-128(%rax), $B, $Y
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpand	32*8-128(%rax), $B, $T0
-	vpxor	$Y, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpxor	$T0, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	`&STORE`
-
-	#	R^2 = R^2
-	lea	`32*9*4`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*6`(%rsp), %rdi
-	lea	`32*9*8+32*2`(%rsp), %rcx	# temporary vector
-	call	avx2_sqr_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	H^2 = H^2
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sqr_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	H^3 = H^2*H
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*7`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	U2 = U1*H^2
-	lea	`32*9*0`($a_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*0`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	#call	avx2_normalize
-	`&STORE`
-
-	#	Hsqr = U2*2
-	#lea	32*9*0(%rsp), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*5(%rsp), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_mul_by2_x4
-
-	vpaddq	$ACC0, $ACC0, $ACC0	# inlined avx2_mul_by2_x4
-	lea	`32*9*5`(%rsp), %rdi
-	vpaddq	$ACC1, $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq	$ACC2, $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq	$ACC3, $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq	$ACC4, $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq	$ACC5, $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq	$ACC6, $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq	$ACC7, $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq	$ACC8, $ACC8, $ACC8
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	X3 = R^2 - H^3
-	#lea	32*9*6(%rsp), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*7(%rsp), %rdx
-	#lea	32*9*5(%rsp), %rcx
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_sub_x4
-	#NORMALIZE
-	#STORE
-
-	#	X3 = X3 - U2*2
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_sub_x4
-	#NORMALIZE
-	#STORE
-
-	lea	`32*9*6+128`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	.LAVX2_POLY_x2+128(%rip), %rax
-	lea	`32*9*7+128`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*5+128`(%rsp), %rcx
-	lea	`32*9*0`($r_ptr), %rdi
-
-	vmovdqa	32*0-128(%rsi), $ACC0
-	vmovdqa	32*1-128(%rsi), $ACC1
-	vmovdqa	32*2-128(%rsi), $ACC2
-	vmovdqa	32*3-128(%rsi), $ACC3
-	vmovdqa	32*4-128(%rsi), $ACC4
-	vmovdqa	32*5-128(%rsi), $ACC5
-	vmovdqa	32*6-128(%rsi), $ACC6
-	vmovdqa	32*7-128(%rsi), $ACC7
-	vmovdqa	32*8-128(%rsi), $ACC8
-
-	vpaddq	32*0-128(%rax), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpaddq	32*1-128(%rax), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpaddq	32*2-128(%rax), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpaddq	32*3-128(%rax), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpaddq	32*4-128(%rax), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpaddq	32*5-128(%rax), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpaddq	32*6-128(%rax), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpaddq	32*7-128(%rax), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpaddq	32*8-128(%rax), $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	vpsubq	32*0-128(%rdx), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpsubq	32*1-128(%rdx), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpsubq	32*2-128(%rdx), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpsubq	32*3-128(%rdx), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpsubq	32*4-128(%rdx), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpsubq	32*5-128(%rdx), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpsubq	32*6-128(%rdx), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpsubq	32*7-128(%rdx), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpsubq	32*8-128(%rdx), $ACC8, $ACC8
-
-	vpsubq	32*0-128(%rcx), $ACC0, $ACC0
-	vpsubq	32*1-128(%rcx), $ACC1, $ACC1
-	vpsubq	32*2-128(%rcx), $ACC2, $ACC2
-	vpsubq	32*3-128(%rcx), $ACC3, $ACC3
-	vpsubq	32*4-128(%rcx), $ACC4, $ACC4
-	vpsubq	32*5-128(%rcx), $ACC5, $ACC5
-	vpsubq	32*6-128(%rcx), $ACC6, $ACC6
-	vpsubq	32*7-128(%rcx), $ACC7, $ACC7
-	vpsubq	32*8-128(%rcx), $ACC8, $ACC8
-	call	avx2_normalize
-
-	lea	32*0($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	32*0($a_ptr), %rdx
-	call	avx2_select_n_store
-
-	#	H = U2 - X3
-	lea	`32*9*0`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*0`($r_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	H = H*R
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*4`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#	S2 = S1 * H^3
-	lea	`32*9*7`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`($a_ptr), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	#
-	lea	`32*9*3`(%rsp), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`(%rsp), %rdx
-	lea	`32*9*1`($r_ptr), %rdi
-	call	avx2_sub_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize
-
-	lea	32*9($b_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	32*9($a_ptr), %rdx
-	call	avx2_select_n_store
-
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rsi
-	#lea	32*9*0($r_ptr), %rdi
-	#call	avx2_mul_by1_x4
-	#NORMALIZE
-	#STORE
-
-	lea	`32*9*1`($r_ptr), %rsi
-	lea	`32*9*1`($r_ptr), %rdi
-	call	avx2_mul_by1_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	%xmm6, -16*10(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm7, -16*9(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm8, -16*8(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm9, -16*7(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm10, -16*6(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm11, -16*5(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm12, -16*4(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm13, -16*3(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm14, -16*2(%rbp)
-	movaps	%xmm15, -16*1(%rbp)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	mov	%rbp, %rsp
-	pop	%rbp
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4
-
-################################################################################
-# void ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4);
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont,\@function,2
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont:
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-8-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	vmovdqa	.LAVX2_AND_MASK(%rip), $AND_MASK
-	lea	.LTO_MONT_AVX2(%rip), %rdx
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	16*0(%rsp), %xmm6
-	movaps	16*1(%rsp), %xmm7
-	movaps	16*2(%rsp), %xmm8
-	movaps	16*3(%rsp), %xmm9
-	movaps	16*4(%rsp), %xmm10
-	movaps	16*5(%rsp), %xmm11
-	movaps	16*6(%rsp), %xmm12
-	movaps	16*7(%rsp), %xmm13
-	movaps	16*8(%rsp), %xmm14
-	movaps	16*9(%rsp), %xmm15
-	lea	8+16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont
-
-################################################################################
-# void ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont(void* RESULTx4, void *Ax4);
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont,\@function,2
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont:
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-8-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	vmovdqa	.LAVX2_AND_MASK(%rip), $AND_MASK
-	lea	.LFROM_MONT_AVX2(%rip), %rdx
-	call	avx2_mul_x4
-	call	avx2_normalize_n_store
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	16*0(%rsp), %xmm6
-	movaps	16*1(%rsp), %xmm7
-	movaps	16*2(%rsp), %xmm8
-	movaps	16*3(%rsp), %xmm9
-	movaps	16*4(%rsp), %xmm10
-	movaps	16*5(%rsp), %xmm11
-	movaps	16*6(%rsp), %xmm12
-	movaps	16*7(%rsp), %xmm13
-	movaps	16*8(%rsp), %xmm14
-	movaps	16*9(%rsp), %xmm15
-	lea	8+16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont
-
-################################################################################
-# void ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1(void* RESULTx4);
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1,\@function,1
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1:
-	lea	.LONE+128(%rip), %rax
-	lea	128(%rdi), %rdi
-	vzeroupper
-	vmovdqa	32*0-128(%rax), %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	32*1-128(%rax), %ymm1
-	vmovdqa	32*2-128(%rax), %ymm2
-	vmovdqa	32*3-128(%rax), %ymm3
-	vmovdqa	32*4-128(%rax), %ymm4
-	vmovdqa	32*5-128(%rax), %ymm5
-	vmovdqa	%ymm0, 32*0-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	32*6-128(%rax), %ymm0
-	vmovdqa	%ymm1, 32*1-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	32*7-128(%rax), %ymm1
-	vmovdqa	%ymm2, 32*2-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	32*8-128(%rax), %ymm2
-	vmovdqa	%ymm3, 32*3-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	%ymm4, 32*4-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	%ymm5, 32*5-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	%ymm0, 32*6-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	%ymm1, 32*7-128(%rdi)
-	vmovdqa	%ymm2, 32*8-128(%rdi)
-
-	vzeroupper
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1
-___
-}
-{
-################################################################################
-# void ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7(void* RESULT, void *in,
-#			    int index0, int index1, int index2, int index3);
-################################################################################
-
-my ($val,$in_t,$index0,$index1,$index2,$index3)=("%rdi","%rsi","%edx","%ecx","%r8d","%r9d");
-my ($INDEX0,$INDEX1,$INDEX2,$INDEX3)=map("%ymm$_",(0..3));
-my ($R0a,$R0b,$R1a,$R1b,$R2a,$R2b,$R3a,$R3b)=map("%ymm$_",(4..11));
-my ($M0,$T0,$T1,$TMP0)=map("%ymm$_",(12..15));
-
-$code.=<<___;
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7,\@function,6
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7:
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	lea	-8-16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-	vmovaps	%xmm6, -8-16*10(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm7, -8-16*9(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm8, -8-16*8(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm9, -8-16*7(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm10, -8-16*6(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm11, -8-16*5(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm12, -8-16*4(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm13, -8-16*3(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm14, -8-16*2(%rax)
-	vmovaps	%xmm15, -8-16*1(%rax)
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	lea	.LIntOne(%rip), %rax
-
-	vmovd	$index0, %xmm0
-	vmovd	$index1, %xmm1
-	vmovd	$index2, %xmm2
-	vmovd	$index3, %xmm3
-
-	vpxor	$R0a, $R0a, $R0a
-	vpxor	$R0b, $R0b, $R0b
-	vpxor	$R1a, $R1a, $R1a
-	vpxor	$R1b, $R1b, $R1b
-	vpxor	$R2a, $R2a, $R2a
-	vpxor	$R2b, $R2b, $R2b
-	vpxor	$R3a, $R3a, $R3a
-	vpxor	$R3b, $R3b, $R3b
-	vmovdqa	(%rax), $M0
-
-	vpermd	$INDEX0, $R0a, $INDEX0
-	vpermd	$INDEX1, $R0a, $INDEX1
-	vpermd	$INDEX2, $R0a, $INDEX2
-	vpermd	$INDEX3, $R0a, $INDEX3
-
-	mov	\$64, %ecx
-	lea	112($val), $val		# size optimization
-	jmp	.Lmulti_select_loop_avx2
-
-# INDEX=0, corresponds to the point at infty (0,0)
-.align	32
-.Lmulti_select_loop_avx2:
-	vpcmpeqd	$INDEX0, $M0, $TMP0
-
-	vmovdqa		`32*0+32*64*2*0`($in_t), $T0
-	vmovdqa		`32*1+32*64*2*0`($in_t), $T1
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T0, $T0
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T1, $T1
-	vpxor		$T0, $R0a, $R0a
-	vpxor		$T1, $R0b, $R0b
-
-	vpcmpeqd	$INDEX1, $M0, $TMP0
-
-	vmovdqa		`32*0+32*64*2*1`($in_t), $T0
-	vmovdqa		`32*1+32*64*2*1`($in_t), $T1
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T0, $T0
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T1, $T1
-	vpxor		$T0, $R1a, $R1a
-	vpxor		$T1, $R1b, $R1b
-
-	vpcmpeqd	$INDEX2, $M0, $TMP0
-
-	vmovdqa		`32*0+32*64*2*2`($in_t), $T0
-	vmovdqa		`32*1+32*64*2*2`($in_t), $T1
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T0, $T0
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T1, $T1
-	vpxor		$T0, $R2a, $R2a
-	vpxor		$T1, $R2b, $R2b
-
-	vpcmpeqd	$INDEX3, $M0, $TMP0
-
-	vmovdqa		`32*0+32*64*2*3`($in_t), $T0
-	vmovdqa		`32*1+32*64*2*3`($in_t), $T1
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T0, $T0
-	vpand		$TMP0, $T1, $T1
-	vpxor		$T0, $R3a, $R3a
-	vpxor		$T1, $R3b, $R3b
-
-	vpaddd		(%rax), $M0, $M0	# increment
-	lea		32*2($in_t), $in_t
-
-        dec	%ecx
-	jnz	.Lmulti_select_loop_avx2
-
-	vmovdqu	$R0a, 32*0-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R0b, 32*1-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R1a, 32*2-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R1b, 32*3-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R2a, 32*4-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R2b, 32*5-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R3a, 32*6-112($val)
-	vmovdqu	$R3b, 32*7-112($val)
-
-	vzeroupper
-___
-$code.=<<___	if ($win64);
-	movaps	16*0(%rsp), %xmm6
-	movaps	16*1(%rsp), %xmm7
-	movaps	16*2(%rsp), %xmm8
-	movaps	16*3(%rsp), %xmm9
-	movaps	16*4(%rsp), %xmm10
-	movaps	16*5(%rsp), %xmm11
-	movaps	16*6(%rsp), %xmm12
-	movaps	16*7(%rsp), %xmm13
-	movaps	16*8(%rsp), %xmm14
-	movaps	16*9(%rsp), %xmm15
-	lea	8+16*10(%rsp), %rsp
-___
-$code.=<<___;
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7
-
-.extern	OPENSSL_ia32cap_P
-.globl	ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible
-.type	ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible,\@abi-omnipotent
-.align	32
-ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible:
-	mov	OPENSSL_ia32cap_P+8(%rip),%eax
-	shr	\$5,%eax
-	and	\$1,%eax
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible,.-ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible
-___
-}
-}} else {{	# assembler is too old
-$code.=<<___;
-.text
-
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1
-.globl	ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7
-.type	ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7,\@abi-omnipotent
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1:
-ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7:
-	.byte	0x0f,0x0b	# ud2
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7,.-ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7
-
-.globl	ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible
-.type	ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible,\@abi-omnipotent
-ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible:
-	xor	%eax,%eax
-	ret
-.size	ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible,.-ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible
-___
-}}
-
-foreach (split("\n",$code)) {
-	s/\`([^\`]*)\`/eval($1)/geo;
-
-	print $_,"\n";
-}
-
-close STDOUT or die "error closing STDOUT: $!";
diff --git a/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-x86_64.pl b/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-x86_64.pl
index de9b194510bf..b50ee70191b2 100755
--- a/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/ec/asm/ecp_nistz256-x86_64.pl
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$addx = ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
 	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
 	$avx = ($ver>=3.0) + ($ver>=3.01);
 	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
diff --git a/crypto/ec/asm/x25519-x86_64.pl b/crypto/ec/asm/x25519-x86_64.pl
index 3d9d1dc1ad0c..62599dacaccd 100755
--- a/crypto/ec/asm/x25519-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/ec/asm/x25519-x86_64.pl
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ if (!$addx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$addx = ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$addx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+)\.([0-9]+)/) {
 	my $ver = $2 + $3/100.0;	# 3.1->3.01, 3.10->3.10
 	$addx = ($ver>=3.03);
 }
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ec_ameth.c b/crypto/ec/ec_ameth.c
index 221038373921..5098bd7a6602 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ec_ameth.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ec_ameth.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2006-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ static int ecdh_cms_decrypt(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri);
 static int ecdh_cms_encrypt(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri);
 #endif
 
-static int eckey_param2type(int *pptype, void **ppval, EC_KEY *ec_key)
+static int eckey_param2type(int *pptype, void **ppval, const EC_KEY *ec_key)
 {
     const EC_GROUP *group;
     int nid;
@@ -35,7 +35,14 @@ static int eckey_param2type(int *pptype, void **ppval, EC_KEY *ec_key)
         && (nid = EC_GROUP_get_curve_name(group)))
         /* we have a 'named curve' => just set the OID */
     {
-        *ppval = OBJ_nid2obj(nid);
+        ASN1_OBJECT *asn1obj = OBJ_nid2obj(nid);
+
+        if (asn1obj == NULL || OBJ_length(asn1obj) == 0) {
+            ASN1_OBJECT_free(asn1obj);
+            ECerr(EC_F_ECKEY_PARAM2TYPE, EC_R_MISSING_OID);
+            return 0;
+        }
+        *ppval = asn1obj;
         *pptype = V_ASN1_OBJECT;
     } else {                    /* explicit parameters */
 
@@ -43,7 +50,17 @@ static int eckey_param2type(int *pptype, void **ppval, EC_KEY *ec_key)
         pstr = ASN1_STRING_new();
         if (pstr == NULL)
             return 0;
-        pstr->length = i2d_ECParameters(ec_key, &pstr->data);
+
+        /*
+         * The cast in the following line is intentional as the
+         * `i2d_ECParameters` signature can't be constified (see discussion at
+         * https://github.com/openssl/openssl/pull/9347 where related and
+         * required constification backports were rejected).
+         *
+         * This cast should be safe anyway, because we can expect
+         * `i2d_ECParameters()` to treat the first argument as if it was const.
+         */
+        pstr->length = i2d_ECParameters((EC_KEY *)ec_key, &pstr->data);
         if (pstr->length <= 0) {
             ASN1_STRING_free(pstr);
             ECerr(EC_F_ECKEY_PARAM2TYPE, ERR_R_EC_LIB);
@@ -57,7 +74,7 @@ static int eckey_param2type(int *pptype, void **ppval, EC_KEY *ec_key)
 
 static int eckey_pub_encode(X509_PUBKEY *pk, const EVP_PKEY *pkey)
 {
-    EC_KEY *ec_key = pkey->pkey.ec;
+    const EC_KEY *ec_key = pkey->pkey.ec;
     void *pval = NULL;
     int ptype;
     unsigned char *penc = NULL, *p;
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ec_asn1.c b/crypto/ec/ec_asn1.c
index 006f9a5dea17..7b7c75ce8443 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ec_asn1.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ec_asn1.c
@@ -137,6 +137,12 @@ struct ec_parameters_st {
     ASN1_INTEGER *cofactor;
 } /* ECPARAMETERS */ ;
 
+typedef enum {
+    ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_NAMED = 0,
+    ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_EXPLICIT,
+    ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_IMPLICIT
+} ecpk_parameters_type_t;
+
 struct ecpk_parameters_st {
     int type;
     union {
@@ -535,9 +541,10 @@ ECPKPARAMETERS *EC_GROUP_get_ecpkparameters(const EC_GROUP *group,
             return NULL;
         }
     } else {
-        if (ret->type == 0)
+        if (ret->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_NAMED)
             ASN1_OBJECT_free(ret->value.named_curve);
-        else if (ret->type == 1 && ret->value.parameters)
+        else if (ret->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_EXPLICIT
+                 && ret->value.parameters != NULL)
             ECPARAMETERS_free(ret->value.parameters);
     }
 
@@ -547,15 +554,22 @@ ECPKPARAMETERS *EC_GROUP_get_ecpkparameters(const EC_GROUP *group,
          */
         tmp = EC_GROUP_get_curve_name(group);
         if (tmp) {
-            ret->type = 0;
-            if ((ret->value.named_curve = OBJ_nid2obj(tmp)) == NULL)
+            ASN1_OBJECT *asn1obj = OBJ_nid2obj(tmp);
+
+            if (asn1obj == NULL || OBJ_length(asn1obj) == 0) {
+                ASN1_OBJECT_free(asn1obj);
+                ECerr(EC_F_EC_GROUP_GET_ECPKPARAMETERS, EC_R_MISSING_OID);
                 ok = 0;
+            } else {
+                ret->type = ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_NAMED;
+                ret->value.named_curve = asn1obj;
+            }
         } else
             /* we don't know the nid => ERROR */
             ok = 0;
     } else {
         /* use the ECPARAMETERS structure */
-        ret->type = 1;
+        ret->type = ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_EXPLICIT;
         if ((ret->value.parameters =
              EC_GROUP_get_ecparameters(group, NULL)) == NULL)
             ok = 0;
@@ -894,7 +908,8 @@ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_from_ecpkparameters(const ECPKPARAMETERS *params)
         return NULL;
     }
 
-    if (params->type == 0) {    /* the curve is given by an OID */
+    if (params->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_NAMED) {
+        /* the curve is given by an OID */
         tmp = OBJ_obj2nid(params->value.named_curve);
         if ((ret = EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name(tmp)) == NULL) {
             ECerr(EC_F_EC_GROUP_NEW_FROM_ECPKPARAMETERS,
@@ -902,15 +917,16 @@ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_from_ecpkparameters(const ECPKPARAMETERS *params)
             return NULL;
         }
         EC_GROUP_set_asn1_flag(ret, OPENSSL_EC_NAMED_CURVE);
-    } else if (params->type == 1) { /* the parameters are given by a
-                                     * ECPARAMETERS structure */
+    } else if (params->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_EXPLICIT) {
+        /* the parameters are given by an ECPARAMETERS structure */
         ret = EC_GROUP_new_from_ecparameters(params->value.parameters);
         if (!ret) {
             ECerr(EC_F_EC_GROUP_NEW_FROM_ECPKPARAMETERS, ERR_R_EC_LIB);
             return NULL;
         }
         EC_GROUP_set_asn1_flag(ret, OPENSSL_EC_EXPLICIT_CURVE);
-    } else if (params->type == 2) { /* implicitlyCA */
+    } else if (params->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_IMPLICIT) {
+        /* implicit parameters inherited from CA - unsupported */
         return NULL;
     } else {
         ECerr(EC_F_EC_GROUP_NEW_FROM_ECPKPARAMETERS, EC_R_ASN1_ERROR);
@@ -940,6 +956,9 @@ EC_GROUP *d2i_ECPKParameters(EC_GROUP **a, const unsigned char **in, long len)
         return NULL;
     }
 
+    if (params->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_EXPLICIT)
+        group->decoded_from_explicit_params = 1;
+
     if (a) {
         EC_GROUP_free(*a);
         *a = group;
@@ -991,6 +1010,9 @@ EC_KEY *d2i_ECPrivateKey(EC_KEY **a, const unsigned char **in, long len)
     if (priv_key->parameters) {
         EC_GROUP_free(ret->group);
         ret->group = EC_GROUP_new_from_ecpkparameters(priv_key->parameters);
+        if (ret->group != NULL
+            && priv_key->parameters->type == ECPKPARAMETERS_TYPE_EXPLICIT)
+            ret->group->decoded_from_explicit_params = 1;
     }
 
     if (ret->group == NULL) {
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ec_err.c b/crypto/ec/ec_err.c
index ce3493823218..bfe74226503e 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ec_err.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ec_err.c
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 /*
  * Generated by util/mkerr.pl DO NOT EDIT
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -341,6 +341,7 @@ static const ERR_STRING_DATA EC_str_reasons[] = {
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_LADDER_POST_FAILURE), "ladder post failure"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_LADDER_PRE_FAILURE), "ladder pre failure"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_LADDER_STEP_FAILURE), "ladder step failure"},
+    {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_MISSING_OID), "missing OID"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_MISSING_PARAMETERS), "missing parameters"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_MISSING_PRIVATE_KEY), "missing private key"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_EC, 0, EC_R_NEED_NEW_SETUP_VALUES),
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ec_key.c b/crypto/ec/ec_key.c
index 08aaac5d8a6f..23efbd015ca4 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ec_key.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ec_key.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2002-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2002-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@
 #include "internal/refcount.h"
 #include <openssl/err.h>
 #include <openssl/engine.h>
+#include "crypto/bn.h"
 
 EC_KEY *EC_KEY_new(void)
 {
@@ -416,17 +417,86 @@ const BIGNUM *EC_KEY_get0_private_key(const EC_KEY *key)
 
 int EC_KEY_set_private_key(EC_KEY *key, const BIGNUM *priv_key)
 {
+    int fixed_top;
+    const BIGNUM *order = NULL;
+    BIGNUM *tmp_key = NULL;
+
     if (key->group == NULL || key->group->meth == NULL)
         return 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Not only should key->group be set, but it should also be in a valid
+     * fully initialized state.
+     *
+     * Specifically, to operate in constant time, we need that the group order
+     * is set, as we use its length as the fixed public size of any scalar used
+     * as an EC private key.
+     */
+    order = EC_GROUP_get0_order(key->group);
+    if (order == NULL || BN_is_zero(order))
+        return 0; /* This should never happen */
+
     if (key->group->meth->set_private != NULL
         && key->group->meth->set_private(key, priv_key) == 0)
         return 0;
     if (key->meth->set_private != NULL
         && key->meth->set_private(key, priv_key) == 0)
         return 0;
+
+    /*
+     * We should never leak the bit length of the secret scalar in the key,
+     * so we always set the `BN_FLG_CONSTTIME` flag on the internal `BIGNUM`
+     * holding the secret scalar.
+     *
+     * This is important also because `BN_dup()` (and `BN_copy()`) do not
+     * propagate the `BN_FLG_CONSTTIME` flag from the source `BIGNUM`, and
+     * this brings an extra risk of inadvertently losing the flag, even when
+     * the caller specifically set it.
+     *
+     * The propagation has been turned on and off a few times in the past
+     * years because in some conditions has shown unintended consequences in
+     * some code paths, so at the moment we can't fix this in the BN layer.
+     *
+     * In `EC_KEY_set_private_key()` we can work around the propagation by
+     * manually setting the flag after `BN_dup()` as we know for sure that
+     * inside the EC module the `BN_FLG_CONSTTIME` is always treated
+     * correctly and should not generate unintended consequences.
+     *
+     * Setting the BN_FLG_CONSTTIME flag alone is never enough, we also have
+     * to preallocate the BIGNUM internal buffer to a fixed public size big
+     * enough that operations performed during the processing never trigger
+     * a realloc which would leak the size of the scalar through memory
+     * accesses.
+     *
+     * Fixed Length
+     * ------------
+     *
+     * The order of the large prime subgroup of the curve is our choice for
+     * a fixed public size, as that is generally the upper bound for
+     * generating a private key in EC cryptosystems and should fit all valid
+     * secret scalars.
+     *
+     * For preallocating the BIGNUM storage we look at the number of "words"
+     * required for the internal representation of the order, and we
+     * preallocate 2 extra "words" in case any of the subsequent processing
+     * might temporarily overflow the order length.
+     */
+    tmp_key = BN_dup(priv_key);
+    if (tmp_key == NULL)
+        return 0;
+
+    BN_set_flags(tmp_key, BN_FLG_CONSTTIME);
+
+    fixed_top = bn_get_top(order) + 2;
+    if (bn_wexpand(tmp_key, fixed_top) == NULL) {
+        BN_clear_free(tmp_key);
+        return 0;
+    }
+
     BN_clear_free(key->priv_key);
-    key->priv_key = BN_dup(priv_key);
-    return (key->priv_key == NULL) ? 0 : 1;
+    key->priv_key = tmp_key;
+
+    return 1;
 }
 
 const EC_POINT *EC_KEY_get0_public_key(const EC_KEY *key)
@@ -494,6 +564,13 @@ void EC_KEY_clear_flags(EC_KEY *key, int flags)
     key->flags &= ~flags;
 }
 
+int EC_KEY_decoded_from_explicit_params(const EC_KEY *key)
+{
+    if (key == NULL || key->group == NULL)
+        return -1;
+    return key->group->decoded_from_explicit_params;
+}
+
 size_t EC_KEY_key2buf(const EC_KEY *key, point_conversion_form_t form,
                         unsigned char **pbuf, BN_CTX *ctx)
 {
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ec_lib.c b/crypto/ec/ec_lib.c
index 6832383cad51..08db89fceeb5 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ec_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ec_lib.c
@@ -211,6 +211,7 @@ int EC_GROUP_copy(EC_GROUP *dest, const EC_GROUP *src)
 
     dest->asn1_flag = src->asn1_flag;
     dest->asn1_form = src->asn1_form;
+    dest->decoded_from_explicit_params = src->decoded_from_explicit_params;
 
     if (src->seed) {
         OPENSSL_free(dest->seed);
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ec_local.h b/crypto/ec/ec_local.h
index e656fbd5e775..64725a9c92f4 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ec_local.h
+++ b/crypto/ec/ec_local.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -209,6 +209,8 @@ struct ec_group_st {
     BIGNUM *order, *cofactor;
     int curve_name;             /* optional NID for named curve */
     int asn1_flag;              /* flag to control the asn1 encoding */
+    int decoded_from_explicit_params; /* set if decoded from explicit
+                                       * curve parameters encoding */
     point_conversion_form_t asn1_form;
     unsigned char *seed;        /* optional seed for parameters (appears in
                                  * ASN1) */
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp224.c b/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp224.c
index 9a9ced8f1343..6f7d66c8bea4 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp224.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp224.c
@@ -72,6 +72,7 @@ typedef uint64_t u64;
  */
 
 typedef uint64_t limb;
+typedef uint64_t limb_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
 typedef uint128_t widelimb;
 
 typedef limb felem[4];
@@ -307,10 +308,10 @@ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_nistp224_method(void)
  */
 static void bin28_to_felem(felem out, const u8 in[28])
 {
-    out[0] = *((const uint64_t *)(in)) & 0x00ffffffffffffff;
-    out[1] = (*((const uint64_t *)(in + 7))) & 0x00ffffffffffffff;
-    out[2] = (*((const uint64_t *)(in + 14))) & 0x00ffffffffffffff;
-    out[3] = (*((const uint64_t *)(in+20))) >> 8;
+    out[0] = *((const limb *)(in)) & 0x00ffffffffffffff;
+    out[1] = (*((const limb_aX *)(in + 7))) & 0x00ffffffffffffff;
+    out[2] = (*((const limb_aX *)(in + 14))) & 0x00ffffffffffffff;
+    out[3] = (*((const limb_aX *)(in + 20))) >> 8;
 }
 
 static void felem_to_bin28(u8 out[28], const felem in)
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp521.c b/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp521.c
index 75eeba853679..08b32787293b 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp521.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ecp_nistp521.c
@@ -128,6 +128,7 @@ static const felem_bytearray nistp521_curve_params[5] = {
 # define NLIMBS 9
 
 typedef uint64_t limb;
+typedef limb limb_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
 typedef limb felem[NLIMBS];
 typedef uint128_t largefelem[NLIMBS];
 
@@ -141,14 +142,14 @@ static const limb bottom58bits = 0x3ffffffffffffff;
 static void bin66_to_felem(felem out, const u8 in[66])
 {
     out[0] = (*((limb *) & in[0])) & bottom58bits;
-    out[1] = (*((limb *) & in[7]) >> 2) & bottom58bits;
-    out[2] = (*((limb *) & in[14]) >> 4) & bottom58bits;
-    out[3] = (*((limb *) & in[21]) >> 6) & bottom58bits;
-    out[4] = (*((limb *) & in[29])) & bottom58bits;
-    out[5] = (*((limb *) & in[36]) >> 2) & bottom58bits;
-    out[6] = (*((limb *) & in[43]) >> 4) & bottom58bits;
-    out[7] = (*((limb *) & in[50]) >> 6) & bottom58bits;
-    out[8] = (*((limb *) & in[58])) & bottom57bits;
+    out[1] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[7]) >> 2) & bottom58bits;
+    out[2] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[14]) >> 4) & bottom58bits;
+    out[3] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[21]) >> 6) & bottom58bits;
+    out[4] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[29])) & bottom58bits;
+    out[5] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[36]) >> 2) & bottom58bits;
+    out[6] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[43]) >> 4) & bottom58bits;
+    out[7] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[50]) >> 6) & bottom58bits;
+    out[8] = (*((limb_aX *) & in[58])) & bottom57bits;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -159,14 +160,14 @@ static void felem_to_bin66(u8 out[66], const felem in)
 {
     memset(out, 0, 66);
     (*((limb *) & out[0])) = in[0];
-    (*((limb *) & out[7])) |= in[1] << 2;
-    (*((limb *) & out[14])) |= in[2] << 4;
-    (*((limb *) & out[21])) |= in[3] << 6;
-    (*((limb *) & out[29])) = in[4];
-    (*((limb *) & out[36])) |= in[5] << 2;
-    (*((limb *) & out[43])) |= in[6] << 4;
-    (*((limb *) & out[50])) |= in[7] << 6;
-    (*((limb *) & out[58])) = in[8];
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[7])) |= in[1] << 2;
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[14])) |= in[2] << 4;
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[21])) |= in[3] << 6;
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[29])) = in[4];
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[36])) |= in[5] << 2;
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[43])) |= in[6] << 4;
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[50])) |= in[7] << 6;
+    (*((limb_aX *) & out[58])) = in[8];
 }
 
 /* BN_to_felem converts an OpenSSL BIGNUM into an felem */
diff --git a/crypto/ec/ecp_nistz256.c b/crypto/ec/ecp_nistz256.c
index ba9268138862..5005249b05ea 100644
--- a/crypto/ec/ecp_nistz256.c
+++ b/crypto/ec/ecp_nistz256.c
@@ -929,207 +929,6 @@ __owur static int ecp_nistz256_mult_precompute(EC_GROUP *group, BN_CTX *ctx)
     return ret;
 }
 
-/*
- * Note that by default ECP_NISTZ256_AVX2 is undefined. While it's great
- * code processing 4 points in parallel, corresponding serial operation
- * is several times slower, because it uses 29x29=58-bit multiplication
- * as opposite to 64x64=128-bit in integer-only scalar case. As result
- * it doesn't provide *significant* performance improvement. Note that
- * just defining ECP_NISTZ256_AVX2 is not sufficient to make it work,
- * you'd need to compile even asm/ecp_nistz256-avx.pl module.
- */
-#if defined(ECP_NISTZ256_AVX2)
-# if !(defined(__x86_64) || defined(__x86_64__) || \
-       defined(_M_AMD64) || defined(_M_X64)) || \
-     !(defined(__GNUC__) || defined(_MSC_VER)) /* this is for ALIGN32 */
-#  undef ECP_NISTZ256_AVX2
-# else
-/* Constant time access, loading four values, from four consecutive tables */
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7(void *result, const void *in,
-                                       int index0, int index1, int index2,
-                                       int index3);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert(void *RESULTx4, const void *in);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back(void *result, const void *Ax4);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4(void *RESULTx4, const void *Ax4,
-                                           const void *Bx4);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4(void *RESULTx4, const void *Ax4,
-                                            const void *Bx4);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(void *RESULTx4, const void *Ax4);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont(void *RESULTx4, const void *Ax4);
-void ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1(void *RESULTx4);
-int ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible(void);
-
-static void booth_recode_w7(unsigned char *sign,
-                            unsigned char *digit, unsigned char in)
-{
-    unsigned char s, d;
-
-    s = ~((in >> 7) - 1);
-    d = (1 << 8) - in - 1;
-    d = (d & s) | (in & ~s);
-    d = (d >> 1) + (d & 1);
-
-    *sign = s & 1;
-    *digit = d;
-}
-
-/*
- * ecp_nistz256_avx2_mul_g performs multiplication by G, using only the
- * precomputed table. It does 4 affine point additions in parallel,
- * significantly speeding up point multiplication for a fixed value.
- */
-static void ecp_nistz256_avx2_mul_g(P256_POINT *r,
-                                    unsigned char p_str[33],
-                                    const P256_POINT_AFFINE(*preComputedTable)[64])
-{
-    const unsigned int window_size = 7;
-    const unsigned int mask = (1 << (window_size + 1)) - 1;
-    unsigned int wvalue;
-    /* Using 4 windows at a time */
-    unsigned char sign0, digit0;
-    unsigned char sign1, digit1;
-    unsigned char sign2, digit2;
-    unsigned char sign3, digit3;
-    unsigned int idx = 0;
-    BN_ULONG tmp[P256_LIMBS];
-    int i;
-
-    ALIGN32 BN_ULONG aX4[4 * 9 * 3] = { 0 };
-    ALIGN32 BN_ULONG bX4[4 * 9 * 2] = { 0 };
-    ALIGN32 P256_POINT_AFFINE point_arr[4];
-    ALIGN32 P256_POINT res_point_arr[4];
-
-    /* Initial four windows */
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[0]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue << 1) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign0, &digit0, wvalue);
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign1, &digit1, wvalue);
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign2, &digit2, wvalue);
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign3, &digit3, wvalue);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7(point_arr, preComputedTable[0],
-                                      digit0, digit1, digit2, digit3);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[0].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[0].Y, tmp, sign0);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[1].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[1].Y, tmp, sign1);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[2].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[2].Y, tmp, sign2);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[3].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[3].Y, tmp, sign3);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert(aX4, point_arr);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(aX4, aX4);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(&aX4[4 * 9], &aX4[4 * 9]);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_set1(&aX4[4 * 9 * 2]);
-
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign0, &digit0, wvalue);
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign1, &digit1, wvalue);
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign2, &digit2, wvalue);
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    idx += window_size;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign3, &digit3, wvalue);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7(point_arr, preComputedTable[4 * 1],
-                                      digit0, digit1, digit2, digit3);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[0].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[0].Y, tmp, sign0);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[1].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[1].Y, tmp, sign1);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[2].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[2].Y, tmp, sign2);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[3].Y);
-    copy_conditional(point_arr[3].Y, tmp, sign3);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert(bX4, point_arr);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(bX4, bX4);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(&bX4[4 * 9], &bX4[4 * 9]);
-    /* Optimized when both inputs are affine */
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affines_x4(aX4, aX4, bX4);
-
-    for (i = 2; i < 9; i++) {
-        wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-        wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-        idx += window_size;
-        booth_recode_w7(&sign0, &digit0, wvalue);
-        wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-        wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-        idx += window_size;
-        booth_recode_w7(&sign1, &digit1, wvalue);
-        wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-        wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-        idx += window_size;
-        booth_recode_w7(&sign2, &digit2, wvalue);
-        wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-        wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-        idx += window_size;
-        booth_recode_w7(&sign3, &digit3, wvalue);
-
-        ecp_nistz256_avx2_multi_gather_w7(point_arr,
-                                          preComputedTable[4 * i],
-                                          digit0, digit1, digit2, digit3);
-
-        ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[0].Y);
-        copy_conditional(point_arr[0].Y, tmp, sign0);
-        ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[1].Y);
-        copy_conditional(point_arr[1].Y, tmp, sign1);
-        ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[2].Y);
-        copy_conditional(point_arr[2].Y, tmp, sign2);
-        ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, point_arr[3].Y);
-        copy_conditional(point_arr[3].Y, tmp, sign3);
-
-        ecp_nistz256_avx2_transpose_convert(bX4, point_arr);
-        ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(bX4, bX4);
-        ecp_nistz256_avx2_to_mont(&bX4[4 * 9], &bX4[4 * 9]);
-
-        ecp_nistz256_avx2_point_add_affine_x4(aX4, aX4, bX4);
-    }
-
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont(&aX4[4 * 9 * 0], &aX4[4 * 9 * 0]);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont(&aX4[4 * 9 * 1], &aX4[4 * 9 * 1]);
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_from_mont(&aX4[4 * 9 * 2], &aX4[4 * 9 * 2]);
-
-    ecp_nistz256_avx2_convert_transpose_back(res_point_arr, aX4);
-    /* Last window is performed serially */
-    wvalue = *((u16 *) & p_str[(idx - 1) / 8]);
-    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-    booth_recode_w7(&sign0, &digit0, wvalue);
-    ecp_nistz256_gather_w7((P256_POINT_AFFINE *)r,
-                           preComputedTable[36], digit0);
-    ecp_nistz256_neg(tmp, r->Y);
-    copy_conditional(r->Y, tmp, sign0);
-    memcpy(r->Z, ONE, sizeof(ONE));
-    /* Sum the four windows */
-    ecp_nistz256_point_add(r, r, &res_point_arr[0]);
-    ecp_nistz256_point_add(r, r, &res_point_arr[1]);
-    ecp_nistz256_point_add(r, r, &res_point_arr[2]);
-    ecp_nistz256_point_add(r, r, &res_point_arr[3]);
-}
-# endif
-#endif
-
 __owur static int ecp_nistz256_set_from_affine(EC_POINT *out, const EC_GROUP *group,
                                                const P256_POINT_AFFINE *in,
                                                BN_CTX *ctx)
@@ -1219,6 +1018,8 @@ __owur static int ecp_nistz256_points_mul(const EC_GROUP *group,
         }
 
         if (preComputedTable) {
+            BN_ULONG infty;
+
             if ((BN_num_bits(scalar) > 256)
                 || BN_is_negative(scalar)) {
                 if ((tmp_scalar = BN_CTX_get(ctx)) == NULL)
@@ -1250,67 +1051,58 @@ __owur static int ecp_nistz256_points_mul(const EC_GROUP *group,
             for (; i < 33; i++)
                 p_str[i] = 0;
 
-#if defined(ECP_NISTZ256_AVX2)
-            if (ecp_nistz_avx2_eligible()) {
-                ecp_nistz256_avx2_mul_g(&p.p, p_str, preComputedTable);
-            } else
-#endif
-            {
-                BN_ULONG infty;
+            /* First window */
+            wvalue = (p_str[0] << 1) & mask;
+            idx += window_size;
 
-                /* First window */
-                wvalue = (p_str[0] << 1) & mask;
+            wvalue = _booth_recode_w7(wvalue);
+
+            ecp_nistz256_gather_w7(&p.a, preComputedTable[0],
+                                   wvalue >> 1);
+
+            ecp_nistz256_neg(p.p.Z, p.p.Y);
+            copy_conditional(p.p.Y, p.p.Z, wvalue & 1);
+
+            /*
+             * Since affine infinity is encoded as (0,0) and
+             * Jacobian is (,,0), we need to harmonize them
+             * by assigning "one" or zero to Z.
+             */
+            infty = (p.p.X[0] | p.p.X[1] | p.p.X[2] | p.p.X[3] |
+                     p.p.Y[0] | p.p.Y[1] | p.p.Y[2] | p.p.Y[3]);
+            if (P256_LIMBS == 8)
+                infty |= (p.p.X[4] | p.p.X[5] | p.p.X[6] | p.p.X[7] |
+                          p.p.Y[4] | p.p.Y[5] | p.p.Y[6] | p.p.Y[7]);
+
+            infty = 0 - is_zero(infty);
+            infty = ~infty;
+
+            p.p.Z[0] = ONE[0] & infty;
+            p.p.Z[1] = ONE[1] & infty;
+            p.p.Z[2] = ONE[2] & infty;
+            p.p.Z[3] = ONE[3] & infty;
+            if (P256_LIMBS == 8) {
+                p.p.Z[4] = ONE[4] & infty;
+                p.p.Z[5] = ONE[5] & infty;
+                p.p.Z[6] = ONE[6] & infty;
+                p.p.Z[7] = ONE[7] & infty;
+            }
+
+            for (i = 1; i < 37; i++) {
+                unsigned int off = (idx - 1) / 8;
+                wvalue = p_str[off] | p_str[off + 1] << 8;
+                wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
                 idx += window_size;
 
                 wvalue = _booth_recode_w7(wvalue);
 
-                ecp_nistz256_gather_w7(&p.a, preComputedTable[0],
-                                       wvalue >> 1);
+                ecp_nistz256_gather_w7(&t.a,
+                                       preComputedTable[i], wvalue >> 1);
 
-                ecp_nistz256_neg(p.p.Z, p.p.Y);
-                copy_conditional(p.p.Y, p.p.Z, wvalue & 1);
+                ecp_nistz256_neg(t.p.Z, t.a.Y);
+                copy_conditional(t.a.Y, t.p.Z, wvalue & 1);
 
-                /*
-                 * Since affine infinity is encoded as (0,0) and
-                 * Jacobian ias (,,0), we need to harmonize them
-                 * by assigning "one" or zero to Z.
-                 */
-                infty = (p.p.X[0] | p.p.X[1] | p.p.X[2] | p.p.X[3] |
-                         p.p.Y[0] | p.p.Y[1] | p.p.Y[2] | p.p.Y[3]);
-                if (P256_LIMBS == 8)
-                    infty |= (p.p.X[4] | p.p.X[5] | p.p.X[6] | p.p.X[7] |
-                              p.p.Y[4] | p.p.Y[5] | p.p.Y[6] | p.p.Y[7]);
-
-                infty = 0 - is_zero(infty);
-                infty = ~infty;
-
-                p.p.Z[0] = ONE[0] & infty;
-                p.p.Z[1] = ONE[1] & infty;
-                p.p.Z[2] = ONE[2] & infty;
-                p.p.Z[3] = ONE[3] & infty;
-                if (P256_LIMBS == 8) {
-                    p.p.Z[4] = ONE[4] & infty;
-                    p.p.Z[5] = ONE[5] & infty;
-                    p.p.Z[6] = ONE[6] & infty;
-                    p.p.Z[7] = ONE[7] & infty;
-                }
-
-                for (i = 1; i < 37; i++) {
-                    unsigned int off = (idx - 1) / 8;
-                    wvalue = p_str[off] | p_str[off + 1] << 8;
-                    wvalue = (wvalue >> ((idx - 1) % 8)) & mask;
-                    idx += window_size;
-
-                    wvalue = _booth_recode_w7(wvalue);
-
-                    ecp_nistz256_gather_w7(&t.a,
-                                           preComputedTable[i], wvalue >> 1);
-
-                    ecp_nistz256_neg(t.p.Z, t.a.Y);
-                    copy_conditional(t.a.Y, t.p.Z, wvalue & 1);
-
-                    ecp_nistz256_point_add_affine(&p.p, &p.p, &t.a);
-                }
+                ecp_nistz256_point_add_affine(&p.p, &p.p, &t.a);
             }
         } else {
             p_is_infinity = 1;
diff --git a/crypto/engine/eng_lib.c b/crypto/engine/eng_lib.c
index b851ff695756..5bd584c5999a 100644
--- a/crypto/engine/eng_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/engine/eng_lib.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -171,6 +171,7 @@ void engine_cleanup_int(void)
         cleanup_stack = NULL;
     }
     CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_free(global_engine_lock);
+    global_engine_lock = NULL;
 }
 
 /* Now the "ex_data" support */
diff --git a/crypto/err/openssl.txt b/crypto/err/openssl.txt
index 35512f9caf96..0b5873ebbcb7 100644
--- a/crypto/err/openssl.txt
+++ b/crypto/err/openssl.txt
@@ -934,6 +934,8 @@ PEM_F_PEM_READ_PRIVATEKEY:124:PEM_read_PrivateKey
 PEM_F_PEM_SIGNFINAL:112:PEM_SignFinal
 PEM_F_PEM_WRITE:113:PEM_write
 PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO:114:PEM_write_bio
+PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO_PRIVATEKEY_TRADITIONAL:147:\
+	PEM_write_bio_PrivateKey_traditional
 PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_PRIVATEKEY:139:PEM_write_PrivateKey
 PEM_F_PEM_X509_INFO_READ:115:PEM_X509_INFO_read
 PEM_F_PEM_X509_INFO_READ_BIO:116:PEM_X509_INFO_read_bio
@@ -1742,6 +1744,7 @@ X509_F_X509_NAME_PRINT:117:X509_NAME_print
 X509_F_X509_OBJECT_NEW:150:X509_OBJECT_new
 X509_F_X509_PRINT_EX_FP:118:X509_print_ex_fp
 X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_DECODE:148:x509_pubkey_decode
+X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET:161:X509_PUBKEY_get
 X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET0:119:X509_PUBKEY_get0
 X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_SET:120:X509_PUBKEY_set
 X509_F_X509_REQ_CHECK_PRIVATE_KEY:144:X509_REQ_check_private_key
@@ -2164,6 +2167,7 @@ EC_R_KEYS_NOT_SET:140:keys not set
 EC_R_LADDER_POST_FAILURE:136:ladder post failure
 EC_R_LADDER_PRE_FAILURE:153:ladder pre failure
 EC_R_LADDER_STEP_FAILURE:162:ladder step failure
+EC_R_MISSING_OID:167:missing OID
 EC_R_MISSING_PARAMETERS:124:missing parameters
 EC_R_MISSING_PRIVATE_KEY:125:missing private key
 EC_R_NEED_NEW_SETUP_VALUES:157:need new setup values
@@ -2398,6 +2402,7 @@ PEM_R_UNEXPECTED_DEK_IV:130:unexpected dek iv
 PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_CIPHER:113:unsupported cipher
 PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_ENCRYPTION:114:unsupported encryption
 PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_KEY_COMPONENTS:126:unsupported key components
+PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_PUBLIC_KEY_TYPE:110:unsupported public key type
 PKCS12_R_CANT_PACK_STRUCTURE:100:cant pack structure
 PKCS12_R_CONTENT_TYPE_NOT_DATA:121:content type not data
 PKCS12_R_DECODE_ERROR:101:decode error
diff --git a/crypto/evp/e_aes.c b/crypto/evp/e_aes.c
index a1b7d50bbff8..405ddbf9bf09 100644
--- a/crypto/evp/e_aes.c
+++ b/crypto/evp/e_aes.c
@@ -130,11 +130,6 @@ void bsaes_xts_decrypt(const unsigned char *inp, unsigned char *out,
                        size_t len, const AES_KEY *key1,
                        const AES_KEY *key2, const unsigned char iv[16]);
 #endif
-#if !defined(AES_ASM) && !defined(AES_CTR_ASM)			\
-	&& defined(OPENSSL_AES_CONST_TIME)			\
-	&& !defined(OPENSSL_SMALL_FOOTPRINT)
-# define AES_CTR_ASM
-#endif
 #ifdef AES_CTR_ASM
 void AES_ctr32_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
                        size_t blocks, const AES_KEY *key,
diff --git a/crypto/evp/encode.c b/crypto/evp/encode.c
index 9307ff046424..85926434c300 100644
--- a/crypto/evp/encode.c
+++ b/crypto/evp/encode.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ static int evp_decodeblock_int(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx, unsigned char *t,
         table = data_ascii2bin;
 
     /* trim white space from the start of the line. */
-    while ((conv_ascii2bin(*f, table) == B64_WS) && (n > 0)) {
+    while ((n > 0) && (conv_ascii2bin(*f, table) == B64_WS)) {
         f++;
         n--;
     }
diff --git a/crypto/mem_sec.c b/crypto/mem_sec.c
index 9e0f6702f406..b5f959ba15d5 100644
--- a/crypto/mem_sec.c
+++ b/crypto/mem_sec.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright 2004-2014, Akamai Technologies. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ static void sh_done(void)
     OPENSSL_free(sh.freelist);
     OPENSSL_free(sh.bittable);
     OPENSSL_free(sh.bitmalloc);
-    if (sh.map_result != NULL && sh.map_size)
+    if (sh.map_result != MAP_FAILED && sh.map_size)
         munmap(sh.map_result, sh.map_size);
     memset(&sh, 0, sizeof(sh));
 }
diff --git a/crypto/modes/asm/aesni-gcm-x86_64.pl b/crypto/modes/asm/aesni-gcm-x86_64.pl
index 959efedb0de7..60f03e4fe25b 100755
--- a/crypto/modes/asm/aesni-gcm-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/modes/asm/aesni-gcm-x86_64.pl
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/modes/asm/ghash-x86_64.pl b/crypto/modes/asm/ghash-x86_64.pl
index 0a0bfd575cee..9bdba41d1de5 100755
--- a/crypto/modes/asm/ghash-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/modes/asm/ghash-x86_64.pl
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/modes/cbc128.c b/crypto/modes/cbc128.c
index fc7e0b60510b..c85e37c6a546 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/cbc128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/cbc128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -15,6 +15,12 @@
 # define STRICT_ALIGNMENT 0
 #endif
 
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !STRICT_ALIGNMENT
+typedef size_t size_t_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+typedef size_t size_t_aX;
+#endif
+
 void CRYPTO_cbc128_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
                            size_t len, const void *key,
                            unsigned char ivec[16], block128_f block)
@@ -40,8 +46,8 @@ void CRYPTO_cbc128_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
     } else {
         while (len >= 16) {
             for (n = 0; n < 16; n += sizeof(size_t))
-                *(size_t *)(out + n) =
-                    *(size_t *)(in + n) ^ *(size_t *)(iv + n);
+                *(size_t_aX *)(out + n) =
+                    *(size_t_aX *)(in + n) ^ *(size_t_aX *)(iv + n);
             (*block) (out, out, key);
             iv = out;
             len -= 16;
@@ -96,7 +102,8 @@ void CRYPTO_cbc128_decrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
             }
         } else if (16 % sizeof(size_t) == 0) { /* always true */
             while (len >= 16) {
-                size_t *out_t = (size_t *)out, *iv_t = (size_t *)iv;
+                size_t_aX *out_t = (size_t_aX *)out;
+                size_t_aX *iv_t = (size_t_aX *)iv;
 
                 (*block) (in, out, key);
                 for (n = 0; n < 16 / sizeof(size_t); n++)
@@ -125,8 +132,10 @@ void CRYPTO_cbc128_decrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
             }
         } else if (16 % sizeof(size_t) == 0) { /* always true */
             while (len >= 16) {
-                size_t c, *out_t = (size_t *)out, *ivec_t = (size_t *)ivec;
-                const size_t *in_t = (const size_t *)in;
+                size_t c;
+                size_t_aX *out_t = (size_t_aX *)out;
+                size_t_aX *ivec_t = (size_t_aX *)ivec;
+                const size_t_aX *in_t = (const size_t_aX *)in;
 
                 (*block) (in, tmp.c, key);
                 for (n = 0; n < 16 / sizeof(size_t); n++) {
diff --git a/crypto/modes/ccm128.c b/crypto/modes/ccm128.c
index 424722811c16..655b10350201 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/ccm128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/ccm128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2011-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2011-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,6 +11,14 @@
 #include "modes_local.h"
 #include <string.h>
 
+#ifndef STRICT_ALIGNMENT
+# ifdef __GNUC__
+typedef u64 u64_a1 __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+# else
+typedef u64 u64_a1;
+# endif
+#endif
+
 /*
  * First you setup M and L parameters and pass the key schedule. This is
  * called once per session setup...
@@ -170,8 +178,8 @@ int CRYPTO_ccm128_encrypt(CCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         ctx->cmac.u[0] ^= temp.u[0];
         ctx->cmac.u[1] ^= temp.u[1];
 #else
-        ctx->cmac.u[0] ^= ((u64 *)inp)[0];
-        ctx->cmac.u[1] ^= ((u64 *)inp)[1];
+        ctx->cmac.u[0] ^= ((u64_a1 *)inp)[0];
+        ctx->cmac.u[1] ^= ((u64_a1 *)inp)[1];
 #endif
         (*block) (ctx->cmac.c, ctx->cmac.c, key);
         (*block) (ctx->nonce.c, scratch.c, key);
@@ -181,8 +189,8 @@ int CRYPTO_ccm128_encrypt(CCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         temp.u[1] ^= scratch.u[1];
         memcpy(out, temp.c, 16);
 #else
-        ((u64 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^ ((u64 *)inp)[0];
-        ((u64 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^ ((u64 *)inp)[1];
+        ((u64_a1 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^ ((u64_a1 *)inp)[0];
+        ((u64_a1 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^ ((u64_a1 *)inp)[1];
 #endif
         inp += 16;
         out += 16;
@@ -254,8 +262,10 @@ int CRYPTO_ccm128_decrypt(CCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         ctx->cmac.u[1] ^= (scratch.u[1] ^= temp.u[1]);
         memcpy(out, scratch.c, 16);
 #else
-        ctx->cmac.u[0] ^= (((u64 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^ ((u64 *)inp)[0]);
-        ctx->cmac.u[1] ^= (((u64 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^ ((u64 *)inp)[1]);
+        ctx->cmac.u[0] ^= (((u64_a1 *)out)[0]
+                            = scratch.u[0] ^ ((u64_a1 *)inp)[0]);
+        ctx->cmac.u[1] ^= (((u64_a1 *)out)[1]
+                            = scratch.u[1] ^ ((u64_a1 *)inp)[1]);
 #endif
         (*block) (ctx->cmac.c, ctx->cmac.c, key);
 
diff --git a/crypto/modes/cfb128.c b/crypto/modes/cfb128.c
index b6bec414a966..b2530007b6e4 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/cfb128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/cfb128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,6 +11,12 @@
 #include "modes_local.h"
 #include <string.h>
 
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
+typedef size_t size_t_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+typedef size_t size_t_aX;
+#endif
+
 /*
  * The input and output encrypted as though 128bit cfb mode is being used.
  * The extra state information to record how much of the 128bit block we have
@@ -43,8 +49,9 @@ void CRYPTO_cfb128_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
                 while (len >= 16) {
                     (*block) (ivec, ivec, key);
                     for (; n < 16; n += sizeof(size_t)) {
-                        *(size_t *)(out + n) =
-                            *(size_t *)(ivec + n) ^= *(size_t *)(in + n);
+                        *(size_t_aX *)(out + n) =
+                            *(size_t_aX *)(ivec + n)
+                                ^= *(size_t_aX *)(in + n);
                     }
                     len -= 16;
                     out += 16;
@@ -92,9 +99,10 @@ void CRYPTO_cfb128_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
                 while (len >= 16) {
                     (*block) (ivec, ivec, key);
                     for (; n < 16; n += sizeof(size_t)) {
-                        size_t t = *(size_t *)(in + n);
-                        *(size_t *)(out + n) = *(size_t *)(ivec + n) ^ t;
-                        *(size_t *)(ivec + n) = t;
+                        size_t t = *(size_t_aX *)(in + n);
+                        *(size_t_aX *)(out + n)
+                            = *(size_t_aX *)(ivec + n) ^ t;
+                        *(size_t_aX *)(ivec + n) = t;
                     }
                     len -= 16;
                     out += 16;
diff --git a/crypto/modes/ctr128.c b/crypto/modes/ctr128.c
index ae35116e9524..1ed7decedfd3 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/ctr128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/ctr128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,6 +11,12 @@
 #include "modes_local.h"
 #include <string.h>
 
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
+typedef size_t size_t_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+typedef size_t size_t_aX;
+#endif
+
 /*
  * NOTE: the IV/counter CTR mode is big-endian.  The code itself is
  * endian-neutral.
@@ -97,8 +103,9 @@ void CRYPTO_ctr128_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
                 (*block) (ivec, ecount_buf, key);
                 ctr128_inc_aligned(ivec);
                 for (n = 0; n < 16; n += sizeof(size_t))
-                    *(size_t *)(out + n) =
-                        *(size_t *)(in + n) ^ *(size_t *)(ecount_buf + n);
+                    *(size_t_aX *)(out + n) =
+                        *(size_t_aX *)(in + n)
+                        ^ *(size_t_aX *)(ecount_buf + n);
                 len -= 16;
                 out += 16;
                 in += 16;
diff --git a/crypto/modes/gcm128.c b/crypto/modes/gcm128.c
index 48775e6d05ff..0c0bf3cda5b5 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/gcm128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/gcm128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2010-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2010-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,6 +11,12 @@
 #include "modes_local.h"
 #include <string.h>
 
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
+typedef size_t size_t_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+typedef size_t size_t_aX;
+#endif
+
 #if defined(BSWAP4) && defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
 /* redefine, because alignment is ensured */
 # undef  GETU32
@@ -1080,8 +1086,8 @@ int CRYPTO_gcm128_encrypt(GCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
                 size_t j = GHASH_CHUNK;
 
                 while (j) {
-                    size_t *out_t = (size_t *)out;
-                    const size_t *in_t = (const size_t *)in;
+                    size_t_aX *out_t = (size_t_aX *)out;
+                    const size_t_aX *in_t = (const size_t_aX *)in;
 
                     (*block) (ctx->Yi.c, ctx->EKi.c, key);
                     ++ctr;
@@ -1107,8 +1113,8 @@ int CRYPTO_gcm128_encrypt(GCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
                 size_t j = i;
 
                 while (len >= 16) {
-                    size_t *out_t = (size_t *)out;
-                    const size_t *in_t = (const size_t *)in;
+                    size_t_aX *out_t = (size_t_aX *)out;
+                    const size_t_aX *in_t = (const size_t_aX *)in;
 
                     (*block) (ctx->Yi.c, ctx->EKi.c, key);
                     ++ctr;
@@ -1318,8 +1324,8 @@ int CRYPTO_gcm128_decrypt(GCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
 
                 GHASH(ctx, in, GHASH_CHUNK);
                 while (j) {
-                    size_t *out_t = (size_t *)out;
-                    const size_t *in_t = (const size_t *)in;
+                    size_t_aX *out_t = (size_t_aX *)out;
+                    const size_t_aX *in_t = (const size_t_aX *)in;
 
                     (*block) (ctx->Yi.c, ctx->EKi.c, key);
                     ++ctr;
@@ -1343,8 +1349,8 @@ int CRYPTO_gcm128_decrypt(GCM128_CONTEXT *ctx,
             if ((i = (len & (size_t)-16))) {
                 GHASH(ctx, in, i);
                 while (len >= 16) {
-                    size_t *out_t = (size_t *)out;
-                    const size_t *in_t = (const size_t *)in;
+                    size_t_aX *out_t = (size_t_aX *)out;
+                    const size_t_aX *in_t = (const size_t_aX *)in;
 
                     (*block) (ctx->Yi.c, ctx->EKi.c, key);
                     ++ctr;
diff --git a/crypto/modes/modes_local.h b/crypto/modes/modes_local.h
index f2ae01d11afd..28c32c0643f4 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/modes_local.h
+++ b/crypto/modes/modes_local.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2010-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2010-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -37,6 +37,14 @@ typedef unsigned char u8;
 # endif
 #endif
 
+#ifndef STRICT_ALIGNMENT
+# ifdef __GNUC__
+typedef u32 u32_a1 __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+# else
+typedef u32 u32_a1;
+# endif
+#endif
+
 #if !defined(PEDANTIC) && !defined(OPENSSL_NO_ASM) && !defined(OPENSSL_NO_INLINE_ASM)
 # if defined(__GNUC__) && __GNUC__>=2
 #  if defined(__x86_64) || defined(__x86_64__)
@@ -86,8 +94,8 @@ _asm mov eax, val _asm bswap eax}
 # endif
 #endif
 #if defined(BSWAP4) && !defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
-# define GETU32(p)       BSWAP4(*(const u32 *)(p))
-# define PUTU32(p,v)     *(u32 *)(p) = BSWAP4(v)
+# define GETU32(p)       BSWAP4(*(const u32_a1 *)(p))
+# define PUTU32(p,v)     *(u32_a1 *)(p) = BSWAP4(v)
 #else
 # define GETU32(p)       ((u32)(p)[0]<<24|(u32)(p)[1]<<16|(u32)(p)[2]<<8|(u32)(p)[3])
 # define PUTU32(p,v)     ((p)[0]=(u8)((v)>>24),(p)[1]=(u8)((v)>>16),(p)[2]=(u8)((v)>>8),(p)[3]=(u8)(v))
diff --git a/crypto/modes/ofb128.c b/crypto/modes/ofb128.c
index 44bdf888db1a..a3469712b2de 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/ofb128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/ofb128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,6 +11,12 @@
 #include "modes_local.h"
 #include <string.h>
 
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
+typedef size_t size_t_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+typedef size_t size_t_aX;
+#endif
+
 /*
  * The input and output encrypted as though 128bit ofb mode is being used.
  * The extra state information to record how much of the 128bit block we have
@@ -41,8 +47,9 @@ void CRYPTO_ofb128_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
             while (len >= 16) {
                 (*block) (ivec, ivec, key);
                 for (; n < 16; n += sizeof(size_t))
-                    *(size_t *)(out + n) =
-                        *(size_t *)(in + n) ^ *(size_t *)(ivec + n);
+                    *(size_t_aX *)(out + n) =
+                        *(size_t_aX *)(in + n)
+                        ^ *(size_t_aX *)(ivec + n);
                 len -= 16;
                 out += 16;
                 in += 16;
diff --git a/crypto/modes/xts128.c b/crypto/modes/xts128.c
index b5bda5e6402d..fe1626c62e10 100644
--- a/crypto/modes/xts128.c
+++ b/crypto/modes/xts128.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2011-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2011-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,6 +11,14 @@
 #include "modes_local.h"
 #include <string.h>
 
+#ifndef STRICT_ALIGNMENT
+# ifdef __GNUC__
+typedef u64 u64_a1 __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+# else
+typedef u64 u64_a1;
+# endif
+#endif
+
 int CRYPTO_xts128_encrypt(const XTS128_CONTEXT *ctx,
                           const unsigned char iv[16],
                           const unsigned char *inp, unsigned char *out,
@@ -45,8 +53,8 @@ int CRYPTO_xts128_encrypt(const XTS128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         scratch.u[0] ^= tweak.u[0];
         scratch.u[1] ^= tweak.u[1];
 #else
-        scratch.u[0] = ((u64 *)inp)[0] ^ tweak.u[0];
-        scratch.u[1] = ((u64 *)inp)[1] ^ tweak.u[1];
+        scratch.u[0] = ((u64_a1 *)inp)[0] ^ tweak.u[0];
+        scratch.u[1] = ((u64_a1 *)inp)[1] ^ tweak.u[1];
 #endif
         (*ctx->block1) (scratch.c, scratch.c, ctx->key1);
 #if defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
@@ -54,8 +62,8 @@ int CRYPTO_xts128_encrypt(const XTS128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         scratch.u[1] ^= tweak.u[1];
         memcpy(out, scratch.c, 16);
 #else
-        ((u64 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^= tweak.u[0];
-        ((u64 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^= tweak.u[1];
+        ((u64_a1 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^= tweak.u[0];
+        ((u64_a1 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^= tweak.u[1];
 #endif
         inp += 16;
         out += 16;
@@ -128,8 +136,8 @@ int CRYPTO_xts128_encrypt(const XTS128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         scratch.u[0] ^= tweak1.u[0];
         scratch.u[1] ^= tweak1.u[1];
 #else
-        scratch.u[0] = ((u64 *)inp)[0] ^ tweak1.u[0];
-        scratch.u[1] = ((u64 *)inp)[1] ^ tweak1.u[1];
+        scratch.u[0] = ((u64_a1 *)inp)[0] ^ tweak1.u[0];
+        scratch.u[1] = ((u64_a1 *)inp)[1] ^ tweak1.u[1];
 #endif
         (*ctx->block1) (scratch.c, scratch.c, ctx->key1);
         scratch.u[0] ^= tweak1.u[0];
@@ -148,8 +156,8 @@ int CRYPTO_xts128_encrypt(const XTS128_CONTEXT *ctx,
         scratch.u[1] ^= tweak.u[1];
         memcpy(out, scratch.c, 16);
 #else
-        ((u64 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^ tweak.u[0];
-        ((u64 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^ tweak.u[1];
+        ((u64_a1 *)out)[0] = scratch.u[0] ^ tweak.u[0];
+        ((u64_a1 *)out)[1] = scratch.u[1] ^ tweak.u[1];
 #endif
     }
 
diff --git a/crypto/o_str.c b/crypto/o_str.c
index 9ad7a89dcadf..eb9f21cc0c45 100644
--- a/crypto/o_str.c
+++ b/crypto/o_str.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2003-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2003-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ char *OPENSSL_buf2hexstr(const unsigned char *buffer, long len)
 
 int openssl_strerror_r(int errnum, char *buf, size_t buflen)
 {
-#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER>=1400
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER>=1400 && !defined(_WIN32_WCE)
     return !strerror_s(buf, buflen, errnum);
 #elif defined(_GNU_SOURCE)
     char *err;
diff --git a/crypto/o_time.c b/crypto/o_time.c
index 6d764f55e2e8..3502edda6238 100644
--- a/crypto/o_time.c
+++ b/crypto/o_time.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2001-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ struct tm *OPENSSL_gmtime(const time_t *timer, struct tm *result)
     if (gmtime_r(timer, result) == NULL)
         return NULL;
     ts = result;
-#elif defined (OPENSSL_SYS_WINDOWS) && defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1400
+#elif defined (OPENSSL_SYS_WINDOWS) && defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1400 && !defined(_WIN32_WCE)
     if (gmtime_s(result, timer))
         return NULL;
     ts = result;
diff --git a/crypto/pem/pem_err.c b/crypto/pem/pem_err.c
index f642030aa539..0f3cb02407e6 100644
--- a/crypto/pem/pem_err.c
+++ b/crypto/pem/pem_err.c
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 /*
  * Generated by util/mkerr.pl DO NOT EDIT
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -60,6 +60,8 @@ static const ERR_STRING_DATA PEM_str_functs[] = {
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, PEM_F_PEM_SIGNFINAL, 0), "PEM_SignFinal"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, PEM_F_PEM_WRITE, 0), "PEM_write"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO, 0), "PEM_write_bio"},
+    {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO_PRIVATEKEY_TRADITIONAL, 0),
+     "PEM_write_bio_PrivateKey_traditional"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_PRIVATEKEY, 0),
      "PEM_write_PrivateKey"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, PEM_F_PEM_X509_INFO_READ, 0), "PEM_X509_INFO_read"},
@@ -109,6 +111,8 @@ static const ERR_STRING_DATA PEM_str_reasons[] = {
     "unsupported encryption"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, 0, PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_KEY_COMPONENTS),
     "unsupported key components"},
+    {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_PEM, 0, PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_PUBLIC_KEY_TYPE),
+    "unsupported public key type"},
     {0, NULL}
 };
 
diff --git a/crypto/pem/pem_lib.c b/crypto/pem/pem_lib.c
index 64baf7108ea4..a26322119aa7 100644
--- a/crypto/pem/pem_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/pem/pem_lib.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ int PEM_ASN1_write_bio(i2d_of_void *i2d, const char *name, BIO *bp,
         }
     }
 
-    if ((dsize = i2d(x, NULL)) < 0) {
+    if ((dsize = i2d(x, NULL)) <= 0) {
         PEMerr(PEM_F_PEM_ASN1_WRITE_BIO, ERR_R_ASN1_LIB);
         dsize = 0;
         goto err;
@@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ static int get_header_and_data(BIO *bp, BIO **header, BIO **data, char *name,
 {
     BIO *tmp = *header;
     char *linebuf, *p;
-    int len, line, ret = 0, end = 0;
+    int len, line, ret = 0, end = 0, prev_partial_line_read = 0, partial_line_read = 0;
     /* 0 if not seen (yet), 1 if reading header, 2 if finished header */
     enum header_status got_header = MAYBE_HEADER;
     unsigned int flags_mask;
@@ -809,10 +809,18 @@ static int get_header_and_data(BIO *bp, BIO **header, BIO **data, char *name,
         flags_mask = ~0u;
         len = BIO_gets(bp, linebuf, LINESIZE);
         if (len <= 0) {
-            PEMerr(PEM_F_GET_HEADER_AND_DATA, PEM_R_SHORT_HEADER);
+            PEMerr(PEM_F_GET_HEADER_AND_DATA, PEM_R_BAD_END_LINE);
             goto err;
         }
 
+        /*
+         * Check if line has been read completely or if only part of the line
+         * has been read. Keep the previous value to ignore newlines that
+         * appear due to reading a line up until the char before the newline.
+         */
+        prev_partial_line_read = partial_line_read;
+        partial_line_read = len == LINESIZE-1 && linebuf[LINESIZE-2] != '\n';
+
         if (got_header == MAYBE_HEADER) {
             if (memchr(linebuf, ':', len) != NULL)
                 got_header = IN_HEADER;
@@ -823,13 +831,19 @@ static int get_header_and_data(BIO *bp, BIO **header, BIO **data, char *name,
 
         /* Check for end of header. */
         if (linebuf[0] == '\n') {
-            if (got_header == POST_HEADER) {
-                /* Another blank line is an error. */
-                PEMerr(PEM_F_GET_HEADER_AND_DATA, PEM_R_BAD_END_LINE);
-                goto err;
+            /*
+             * If previous line has been read only partially this newline is a
+             * regular newline at the end of a line and not an empty line.
+             */
+            if (!prev_partial_line_read) {
+                if (got_header == POST_HEADER) {
+                    /* Another blank line is an error. */
+                    PEMerr(PEM_F_GET_HEADER_AND_DATA, PEM_R_BAD_END_LINE);
+                    goto err;
+                }
+                got_header = POST_HEADER;
+                tmp = *data;
             }
-            got_header = POST_HEADER;
-            tmp = *data;
             continue;
         }
 
diff --git a/crypto/pem/pem_pkey.c b/crypto/pem/pem_pkey.c
index e58cdf4a3e0b..4a9492724487 100644
--- a/crypto/pem/pem_pkey.c
+++ b/crypto/pem/pem_pkey.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -108,6 +108,12 @@ int PEM_write_bio_PrivateKey_traditional(BIO *bp, EVP_PKEY *x,
                                          pem_password_cb *cb, void *u)
 {
     char pem_str[80];
+
+    if (x->ameth == NULL || x->ameth->old_priv_encode == NULL) {
+        PEMerr(PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO_PRIVATEKEY_TRADITIONAL,
+               PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_PUBLIC_KEY_TYPE);
+        return 0;
+    }
     BIO_snprintf(pem_str, 80, "%s PRIVATE KEY", x->ameth->pem_str);
     return PEM_ASN1_write_bio((i2d_of_void *)i2d_PrivateKey,
                               pem_str, bp, x, enc, kstr, klen, cb, u);
diff --git a/crypto/pem/pvkfmt.c b/crypto/pem/pvkfmt.c
index 1fc19c17f913..a933b7c1813c 100644
--- a/crypto/pem/pvkfmt.c
+++ b/crypto/pem/pvkfmt.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2005-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2005-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -29,10 +29,10 @@ static unsigned int read_ledword(const unsigned char **in)
 {
     const unsigned char *p = *in;
     unsigned int ret;
-    ret = *p++;
-    ret |= (*p++ << 8);
-    ret |= (*p++ << 16);
-    ret |= (*p++ << 24);
+    ret = (unsigned int)*p++;
+    ret |= (unsigned int)*p++ << 8;
+    ret |= (unsigned int)*p++ << 16;
+    ret |= (unsigned int)*p++ << 24;
     *in = p;
     return ret;
 }
@@ -875,9 +875,9 @@ int i2b_PVK_bio(BIO *out, EVP_PKEY *pk, int enclevel,
     wrlen = BIO_write(out, tmp, outlen);
     OPENSSL_free(tmp);
     if (wrlen == outlen) {
-        PEMerr(PEM_F_I2B_PVK_BIO, PEM_R_BIO_WRITE_FAILURE);
         return outlen;
     }
+    PEMerr(PEM_F_I2B_PVK_BIO, PEM_R_BIO_WRITE_FAILURE);
     return -1;
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86.pl b/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86.pl
index 4aaf63a0a1dd..2ae16a230b66 100755
--- a/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86.pl
+++ b/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86.pl
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ if ($sse2) {
 	$avx = ($1>=2.09) + ($1>=2.10);
 	}
 
-	if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+	if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 		$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 	}
 }
diff --git a/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86_64.pl b/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86_64.pl
index c014be1ca9fa..5f834d8faf2a 100755
--- a/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/poly1305/asm/poly1305-x86_64.pl
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=12);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/rand/drbg_ctr.c b/crypto/rand/drbg_ctr.c
index 0f0ad1b37be4..a757d0a258ab 100644
--- a/crypto/rand/drbg_ctr.c
+++ b/crypto/rand/drbg_ctr.c
@@ -63,15 +63,15 @@ static void ctr_XOR(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr, const unsigned char *in, size_t inlen)
  * Process a complete block using BCC algorithm of SP 800-90A 10.3.3
  */
 __owur static int ctr_BCC_block(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr, unsigned char *out,
-                                const unsigned char *in)
+                                const unsigned char *in, int len)
 {
     int i, outlen = AES_BLOCK_SIZE;
 
-    for (i = 0; i < 16; i++)
+    for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
         out[i] ^= in[i];
 
-    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_df, out, &outlen, out, AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-        || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
+    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_df, out, &outlen, out, len)
+        || outlen != len)
         return 0;
     return 1;
 }
@@ -82,12 +82,16 @@ __owur static int ctr_BCC_block(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr, unsigned char *out,
  */
 __owur static int ctr_BCC_blocks(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr, const unsigned char *in)
 {
-    if (!ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX, in)
-        || !ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX + 16, in))
-        return 0;
-    if (ctr->keylen != 16 && !ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX + 32, in))
-        return 0;
-    return 1;
+    unsigned char in_tmp[48];
+    unsigned char num_of_blk = 2;
+
+    memcpy(in_tmp, in, 16);
+    memcpy(in_tmp + 16, in, 16);
+    if (ctr->keylen != 16) {
+        memcpy(in_tmp + 32, in, 16);
+        num_of_blk = 3;
+    }
+    return ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX, in_tmp, AES_BLOCK_SIZE * num_of_blk);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -96,19 +100,14 @@ __owur static int ctr_BCC_blocks(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr, const unsigned char *in)
  */
 __owur static int ctr_BCC_init(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr)
 {
+    unsigned char bltmp[48] = {0};
+    unsigned char num_of_blk;
+
     memset(ctr->KX, 0, 48);
-    memset(ctr->bltmp, 0, 16);
-    if (!ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX, ctr->bltmp))
-        return 0;
-    ctr->bltmp[3] = 1;
-    if (!ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX + 16, ctr->bltmp))
-        return 0;
-    if (ctr->keylen != 16) {
-        ctr->bltmp[3] = 2;
-        if (!ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX + 32, ctr->bltmp))
-            return 0;
-    }
-    return 1;
+    num_of_blk = ctr->keylen == 16 ? 2 : 3;
+    bltmp[(AES_BLOCK_SIZE * 1) + 3] = 1;
+    bltmp[(AES_BLOCK_SIZE * 2) + 3] = 2;
+    return ctr_BCC_block(ctr, ctr->KX, bltmp, num_of_blk * AES_BLOCK_SIZE);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -197,20 +196,20 @@ __owur static int ctr_df(RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr,
         || !ctr_BCC_final(ctr))
         return 0;
     /* Set up key K */
-    if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx, ctr->cipher, NULL, ctr->KX, NULL, 1))
+    if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ecb, NULL, NULL, ctr->KX, NULL, -1))
         return 0;
     /* X follows key K */
-    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->KX, &outlen, ctr->KX + ctr->keylen,
+    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_ecb, ctr->KX, &outlen, ctr->KX + ctr->keylen,
                           AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
         || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
         return 0;
-    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->KX + 16, &outlen, ctr->KX,
+    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_ecb, ctr->KX + 16, &outlen, ctr->KX,
                           AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
         || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
         return 0;
     if (ctr->keylen != 16)
-        if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->KX + 32, &outlen, ctr->KX + 16,
-                              AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
+        if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_ecb, ctr->KX + 32, &outlen,
+                              ctr->KX + 16, AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
             || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
             return 0;
     return 1;
@@ -229,31 +228,25 @@ __owur static int ctr_update(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
 {
     RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr = &drbg->data.ctr;
     int outlen = AES_BLOCK_SIZE;
+    unsigned char V_tmp[48], out[48];
+    unsigned char len;
 
     /* correct key is already set up. */
+    memcpy(V_tmp, ctr->V, 16);
     inc_128(ctr);
-    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->K, &outlen, ctr->V, AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-        || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-        return 0;
-
-    /* If keylen longer than 128 bits need extra encrypt */
-    if (ctr->keylen != 16) {
+    memcpy(V_tmp + 16, ctr->V, 16);
+    if (ctr->keylen == 16) {
+        len = 32;
+    } else {
         inc_128(ctr);
-        if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->K+16, &outlen, ctr->V,
-                              AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-            || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-            return 0;
+        memcpy(V_tmp + 32, ctr->V, 16);
+        len = 48;
     }
-    inc_128(ctr);
-    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->V, &outlen, ctr->V, AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-        || outlen != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
+    if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_ecb, out, &outlen, V_tmp, len)
+            || outlen != len)
         return 0;
-
-    /* If 192 bit key part of V is on end of K */
-    if (ctr->keylen == 24) {
-        memcpy(ctr->V + 8, ctr->V, 8);
-        memcpy(ctr->V, ctr->K + 24, 8);
-    }
+    memcpy(ctr->K, out, ctr->keylen);
+    memcpy(ctr->V, out + ctr->keylen, 16);
 
     if ((drbg->flags & RAND_DRBG_FLAG_CTR_NO_DF) == 0) {
         /* If no input reuse existing derived value */
@@ -268,7 +261,8 @@ __owur static int ctr_update(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
         ctr_XOR(ctr, in2, in2len);
     }
 
-    if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx, ctr->cipher, NULL, ctr->K, NULL, 1))
+    if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ecb, NULL, NULL, ctr->K, NULL, -1)
+        || !EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ctr, NULL, NULL, ctr->K, NULL, -1))
         return 0;
     return 1;
 }
@@ -285,8 +279,10 @@ __owur static int drbg_ctr_instantiate(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
 
     memset(ctr->K, 0, sizeof(ctr->K));
     memset(ctr->V, 0, sizeof(ctr->V));
-    if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx, ctr->cipher, NULL, ctr->K, NULL, 1))
+    if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ecb, NULL, NULL, ctr->K, NULL, -1))
         return 0;
+
+    inc_128(ctr);
     if (!ctr_update(drbg, entropy, entropylen, pers, perslen, nonce, noncelen))
         return 0;
     return 1;
@@ -296,20 +292,40 @@ __owur static int drbg_ctr_reseed(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
                                   const unsigned char *entropy, size_t entropylen,
                                   const unsigned char *adin, size_t adinlen)
 {
+    RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr = &drbg->data.ctr;
+
     if (entropy == NULL)
         return 0;
+
+    inc_128(ctr);
     if (!ctr_update(drbg, entropy, entropylen, adin, adinlen, NULL, 0))
         return 0;
     return 1;
 }
 
+static void ctr96_inc(unsigned char *counter)
+{
+    u32 n = 12, c = 1;
+
+    do {
+        --n;
+        c += counter[n];
+        counter[n] = (u8)c;
+        c >>= 8;
+    } while (n);
+}
+
 __owur static int drbg_ctr_generate(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
                                     unsigned char *out, size_t outlen,
                                     const unsigned char *adin, size_t adinlen)
 {
     RAND_DRBG_CTR *ctr = &drbg->data.ctr;
+    unsigned int ctr32, blocks;
+    int outl, buflen;
 
     if (adin != NULL && adinlen != 0) {
+        inc_128(ctr);
+
         if (!ctr_update(drbg, adin, adinlen, NULL, 0, NULL, 0))
             return 0;
         /* This means we reuse derived value */
@@ -321,28 +337,53 @@ __owur static int drbg_ctr_generate(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
         adinlen = 0;
     }
 
-    for ( ; ; ) {
-        int outl = AES_BLOCK_SIZE;
+    inc_128(ctr);
 
+    if (outlen == 0) {
         inc_128(ctr);
-        if (outlen < 16) {
-            /* Use K as temp space as it will be updated */
-            if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, ctr->K, &outl, ctr->V,
-                                  AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-                || outl != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-                return 0;
-            memcpy(out, ctr->K, outlen);
-            break;
-        }
-        if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx, out, &outl, ctr->V, AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
-            || outl != AES_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+        if (!ctr_update(drbg, adin, adinlen, NULL, 0, NULL, 0))
             return 0;
-        out += 16;
-        outlen -= 16;
-        if (outlen == 0)
-            break;
+        return 1;
     }
 
+    memset(out, 0, outlen);
+
+    do {
+        if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ctr,
+                               NULL, NULL, NULL, ctr->V, -1))
+            return 0;
+
+        /*-
+         * outlen has type size_t while EVP_CipherUpdate takes an
+         * int argument and thus cannot be guaranteed to process more
+         * than 2^31-1 bytes at a time. We process such huge generate
+         * requests in 2^30 byte chunks, which is the greatest multiple
+         * of AES block size lower than or equal to 2^31-1.
+         */
+        buflen = outlen > (1U << 30) ? (1U << 30) : outlen;
+        blocks = (buflen + 15) / 16;
+
+        ctr32 = GETU32(ctr->V + 12) + blocks;
+        if (ctr32 < blocks) {
+            /* 32-bit counter overflow into V. */
+            if (ctr32 != 0) {
+                blocks -= ctr32;
+                buflen = blocks * 16;
+                ctr32 = 0;
+            }
+            ctr96_inc(ctr->V);
+        }
+        PUTU32(ctr->V + 12, ctr32);
+
+        if (!EVP_CipherUpdate(ctr->ctx_ctr, out, &outl, out, buflen)
+            || outl != buflen)
+            return 0;
+
+        out += buflen;
+        outlen -= buflen;
+    } while (outlen);
+
     if (!ctr_update(drbg, adin, adinlen, NULL, 0, NULL, 0))
         return 0;
     return 1;
@@ -350,7 +391,8 @@ __owur static int drbg_ctr_generate(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
 
 static int drbg_ctr_uninstantiate(RAND_DRBG *drbg)
 {
-    EVP_CIPHER_CTX_free(drbg->data.ctr.ctx);
+    EVP_CIPHER_CTX_free(drbg->data.ctr.ctx_ecb);
+    EVP_CIPHER_CTX_free(drbg->data.ctr.ctx_ctr);
     EVP_CIPHER_CTX_free(drbg->data.ctr.ctx_df);
     OPENSSL_cleanse(&drbg->data.ctr, sizeof(drbg->data.ctr));
     return 1;
@@ -374,25 +416,36 @@ int drbg_ctr_init(RAND_DRBG *drbg)
         return 0;
     case NID_aes_128_ctr:
         keylen = 16;
-        ctr->cipher = EVP_aes_128_ecb();
+        ctr->cipher_ecb = EVP_aes_128_ecb();
+        ctr->cipher_ctr = EVP_aes_128_ctr();
         break;
     case NID_aes_192_ctr:
         keylen = 24;
-        ctr->cipher = EVP_aes_192_ecb();
+        ctr->cipher_ecb = EVP_aes_192_ecb();
+        ctr->cipher_ctr = EVP_aes_192_ctr();
         break;
     case NID_aes_256_ctr:
         keylen = 32;
-        ctr->cipher = EVP_aes_256_ecb();
+        ctr->cipher_ecb = EVP_aes_256_ecb();
+        ctr->cipher_ctr = EVP_aes_256_ctr();
         break;
     }
 
     drbg->meth = &drbg_ctr_meth;
 
     ctr->keylen = keylen;
-    if (ctr->ctx == NULL)
-        ctr->ctx = EVP_CIPHER_CTX_new();
-    if (ctr->ctx == NULL)
+    if (ctr->ctx_ecb == NULL)
+        ctr->ctx_ecb = EVP_CIPHER_CTX_new();
+    if (ctr->ctx_ctr == NULL)
+        ctr->ctx_ctr = EVP_CIPHER_CTX_new();
+    if (ctr->ctx_ecb == NULL || ctr->ctx_ctr == NULL
+        || !EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ecb,
+                              ctr->cipher_ecb, NULL, NULL, NULL, 1)
+        || !EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_ctr,
+                              ctr->cipher_ctr, NULL, NULL, NULL, 1))
         return 0;
+
+    drbg->meth = &drbg_ctr_meth;
     drbg->strength = keylen * 8;
     drbg->seedlen = keylen + 16;
 
@@ -410,7 +463,8 @@ int drbg_ctr_init(RAND_DRBG *drbg)
         if (ctr->ctx_df == NULL)
             return 0;
         /* Set key schedule for df_key */
-        if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_df, ctr->cipher, NULL, df_key, NULL, 1))
+        if (!EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctr->ctx_df,
+                               ctr->cipher_ecb, NULL, df_key, NULL, 1))
             return 0;
 
         drbg->min_entropylen = ctr->keylen;
diff --git a/crypto/rand/drbg_lib.c b/crypto/rand/drbg_lib.c
index faf0590c6c28..8c7c28c9703a 100644
--- a/crypto/rand/drbg_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/rand/drbg_lib.c
@@ -327,13 +327,6 @@ int RAND_DRBG_instantiate(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
         max_entropylen += drbg->max_noncelen;
     }
 
-    drbg->reseed_next_counter = tsan_load(&drbg->reseed_prop_counter);
-    if (drbg->reseed_next_counter) {
-        drbg->reseed_next_counter++;
-        if(!drbg->reseed_next_counter)
-            drbg->reseed_next_counter = 1;
-    }
-
     if (drbg->get_entropy != NULL)
         entropylen = drbg->get_entropy(drbg, &entropy, min_entropy,
                                        min_entropylen, max_entropylen, 0);
@@ -359,9 +352,15 @@ int RAND_DRBG_instantiate(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
     }
 
     drbg->state = DRBG_READY;
-    drbg->reseed_gen_counter = 1;
+    drbg->generate_counter = 1;
     drbg->reseed_time = time(NULL);
-    tsan_store(&drbg->reseed_prop_counter, drbg->reseed_next_counter);
+    if (drbg->enable_reseed_propagation) {
+        if (drbg->parent == NULL)
+            tsan_counter(&drbg->reseed_counter);
+        else
+            tsan_store(&drbg->reseed_counter,
+                       tsan_load(&drbg->parent->reseed_counter));
+    }
 
  end:
     if (entropy != NULL && drbg->cleanup_entropy != NULL)
@@ -428,14 +427,6 @@ int RAND_DRBG_reseed(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
     }
 
     drbg->state = DRBG_ERROR;
-
-    drbg->reseed_next_counter = tsan_load(&drbg->reseed_prop_counter);
-    if (drbg->reseed_next_counter) {
-        drbg->reseed_next_counter++;
-        if(!drbg->reseed_next_counter)
-            drbg->reseed_next_counter = 1;
-    }
-
     if (drbg->get_entropy != NULL)
         entropylen = drbg->get_entropy(drbg, &entropy, drbg->strength,
                                        drbg->min_entropylen,
@@ -451,9 +442,15 @@ int RAND_DRBG_reseed(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
         goto end;
 
     drbg->state = DRBG_READY;
-    drbg->reseed_gen_counter = 1;
+    drbg->generate_counter = 1;
     drbg->reseed_time = time(NULL);
-    tsan_store(&drbg->reseed_prop_counter, drbg->reseed_next_counter);
+    if (drbg->enable_reseed_propagation) {
+        if (drbg->parent == NULL)
+            tsan_counter(&drbg->reseed_counter);
+        else
+            tsan_store(&drbg->reseed_counter,
+                       tsan_load(&drbg->parent->reseed_counter));
+    }
 
  end:
     if (entropy != NULL && drbg->cleanup_entropy != NULL)
@@ -554,7 +551,9 @@ int rand_drbg_restart(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
             drbg->meth->reseed(drbg, adin, adinlen, NULL, 0);
         } else if (reseeded == 0) {
             /* do a full reseeding if it has not been done yet above */
-            RAND_DRBG_reseed(drbg, NULL, 0, 0);
+            if (!RAND_DRBG_reseed(drbg, NULL, 0, 0)) {
+                RANDerr(RAND_F_RAND_DRBG_RESTART, RAND_R_RESEED_ERROR);
+            }
         }
     }
 
@@ -612,7 +611,7 @@ int RAND_DRBG_generate(RAND_DRBG *drbg, unsigned char *out, size_t outlen,
     }
 
     if (drbg->reseed_interval > 0) {
-        if (drbg->reseed_gen_counter >= drbg->reseed_interval)
+        if (drbg->generate_counter >= drbg->reseed_interval)
             reseed_required = 1;
     }
     if (drbg->reseed_time_interval > 0) {
@@ -621,11 +620,8 @@ int RAND_DRBG_generate(RAND_DRBG *drbg, unsigned char *out, size_t outlen,
             || now - drbg->reseed_time >= drbg->reseed_time_interval)
             reseed_required = 1;
     }
-    if (drbg->parent != NULL) {
-        unsigned int reseed_counter = tsan_load(&drbg->reseed_prop_counter);
-        if (reseed_counter > 0
-                && tsan_load(&drbg->parent->reseed_prop_counter)
-                   != reseed_counter)
+    if (drbg->enable_reseed_propagation && drbg->parent != NULL) {
+        if (drbg->reseed_counter != tsan_load(&drbg->parent->reseed_counter))
             reseed_required = 1;
     }
 
@@ -644,7 +640,7 @@ int RAND_DRBG_generate(RAND_DRBG *drbg, unsigned char *out, size_t outlen,
         return 0;
     }
 
-    drbg->reseed_gen_counter++;
+    drbg->generate_counter++;
 
     return 1;
 }
@@ -706,8 +702,7 @@ int RAND_DRBG_set_callbacks(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
                             RAND_DRBG_get_nonce_fn get_nonce,
                             RAND_DRBG_cleanup_nonce_fn cleanup_nonce)
 {
-    if (drbg->state != DRBG_UNINITIALISED
-            || drbg->parent != NULL)
+    if (drbg->state != DRBG_UNINITIALISED)
         return 0;
     drbg->get_entropy = get_entropy;
     drbg->cleanup_entropy = cleanup_entropy;
@@ -883,8 +878,9 @@ static RAND_DRBG *drbg_setup(RAND_DRBG *parent)
     if (parent == NULL && rand_drbg_enable_locking(drbg) == 0)
         goto err;
 
-    /* enable seed propagation */
-    tsan_store(&drbg->reseed_prop_counter, 1);
+    /* enable reseed propagation */
+    drbg->enable_reseed_propagation = 1;
+    drbg->reseed_counter = 1;
 
     /*
      * Ignore instantiation error to support just-in-time instantiation.
diff --git a/crypto/rand/rand_lib.c b/crypto/rand/rand_lib.c
index ab4e9b5486cb..ba3a29e58468 100644
--- a/crypto/rand/rand_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/rand/rand_lib.c
@@ -174,8 +174,6 @@ size_t rand_drbg_get_entropy(RAND_DRBG *drbg,
                                    prediction_resistance,
                                    (unsigned char *)&drbg, sizeof(drbg)) != 0)
                 bytes = bytes_needed;
-            drbg->reseed_next_counter
-                = tsan_load(&drbg->parent->reseed_prop_counter);
             rand_drbg_unlock(drbg->parent);
 
             rand_pool_add_end(pool, bytes, 8 * bytes);
diff --git a/crypto/rand/rand_local.h b/crypto/rand/rand_local.h
index 1bc9bf7d266d..a5de5252dcdc 100644
--- a/crypto/rand/rand_local.h
+++ b/crypto/rand/rand_local.h
@@ -138,9 +138,11 @@ typedef struct rand_drbg_method_st {
  * The state of a DRBG AES-CTR.
  */
 typedef struct rand_drbg_ctr_st {
-    EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx;
+    EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx_ecb;
+    EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx_ctr;
     EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx_df;
-    const EVP_CIPHER *cipher;
+    const EVP_CIPHER *cipher_ecb;
+    const EVP_CIPHER *cipher_ctr;
     size_t keylen;
     unsigned char K[32];
     unsigned char V[16];
@@ -233,7 +235,7 @@ struct rand_drbg_st {
     size_t max_perslen, max_adinlen;
 
     /* Counts the number of generate requests since the last reseed. */
-    unsigned int reseed_gen_counter;
+    unsigned int generate_counter;
     /*
      * Maximum number of generate requests until a reseed is required.
      * This value is ignored if it is zero.
@@ -246,9 +248,15 @@ struct rand_drbg_st {
      * This value is ignored if it is zero.
      */
     time_t reseed_time_interval;
+
+    /*
+     * Enables reseed propagation (see following comment)
+     */
+    unsigned int enable_reseed_propagation;
+
     /*
      * Counts the number of reseeds since instantiation.
-     * This value is ignored if it is zero.
+     * This value is ignored if enable_reseed_propagation is zero.
      *
      * This counter is used only for seed propagation from the <master> DRBG
      * to its two children, the <public> and <private> DRBG. This feature is
@@ -256,8 +264,7 @@ struct rand_drbg_st {
      * is added by RAND_add() or RAND_seed() will have an immediate effect on
      * the output of RAND_bytes() resp. RAND_priv_bytes().
      */
-    TSAN_QUALIFIER unsigned int reseed_prop_counter;
-    unsigned int reseed_next_counter;
+    TSAN_QUALIFIER unsigned int reseed_counter;
 
     size_t seedlen;
     DRBG_STATUS state;
diff --git a/crypto/rand/rand_unix.c b/crypto/rand/rand_unix.c
index fe457cab4a3b..da66773e4ab9 100644
--- a/crypto/rand/rand_unix.c
+++ b/crypto/rand/rand_unix.c
@@ -26,12 +26,12 @@
 #  include <sys/utsname.h>
 # endif
 #endif
-#if defined(__FreeBSD__) && !defined(OPENSSL_SYS_UEFI)
+#if (defined(__FreeBSD__) || defined(__NetBSD__)) && !defined(OPENSSL_SYS_UEFI)
 # include <sys/types.h>
 # include <sys/sysctl.h>
 # include <sys/param.h>
 #endif
-#if defined(__OpenBSD__) || defined(__NetBSD__)
+#if defined(__OpenBSD__)
 # include <sys/param.h>
 #endif
 
@@ -247,10 +247,12 @@ static ssize_t sysctl_random(char *buf, size_t buflen)
      * when the sysctl returns long and we want to request something not a
      * multiple of longs, which should never be the case.
      */
+#if   defined(__FreeBSD__)
     if (!ossl_assert(buflen % sizeof(long) == 0)) {
         errno = EINVAL;
         return -1;
     }
+#endif
 
     /*
      * On NetBSD before 4.0 KERN_ARND was an alias for KERN_URND, and only
@@ -268,7 +270,7 @@ static ssize_t sysctl_random(char *buf, size_t buflen)
     mib[1] = KERN_ARND;
 
     do {
-        len = buflen;
+        len = buflen > 256 ? 256 : buflen;
         if (sysctl(mib, 2, buf, &len, NULL, 0) == -1)
             return done > 0 ? done : -1;
         done += len;
@@ -409,7 +411,8 @@ static struct random_device {
 } random_devices[OSSL_NELEM(random_device_paths)];
 static int keep_random_devices_open = 1;
 
-#   if defined(__linux) && defined(DEVRANDOM_WAIT)
+#   if defined(__linux) && defined(DEVRANDOM_WAIT) \
+       && defined(OPENSSL_RAND_SEED_GETRANDOM)
 static void *shm_addr;
 
 static void cleanup_shm(void)
@@ -487,7 +490,7 @@ static int wait_random_seeded(void)
     }
     return seeded;
 }
-#   else /* defined __linux */
+#   else /* defined __linux && DEVRANDOM_WAIT && OPENSSL_RAND_SEED_GETRANDOM */
 static int wait_random_seeded(void)
 {
     return 1;
diff --git a/crypto/rand/randfile.c b/crypto/rand/randfile.c
index ba121eefbf09..229ce864a312 100644
--- a/crypto/rand/randfile.c
+++ b/crypto/rand/randfile.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 #ifndef OPENSSL_NO_POSIX_IO
 # include <sys/stat.h>
 # include <fcntl.h>
-# ifdef _WIN32
+# if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_WIN32_WCE)
 #  include <windows.h>
 #  include <io.h>
 #  define stat    _stat
diff --git a/crypto/rsa/rsa_ameth.c b/crypto/rsa/rsa_ameth.c
index 6692a51ed8fe..fb045544a832 100644
--- a/crypto/rsa/rsa_ameth.c
+++ b/crypto/rsa/rsa_ameth.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2006-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -118,6 +118,15 @@ static int rsa_pub_decode(EVP_PKEY *pkey, X509_PUBKEY *pubkey)
 
 static int rsa_pub_cmp(const EVP_PKEY *a, const EVP_PKEY *b)
 {
+    /*
+     * Don't check the public/private key, this is mostly for smart
+     * cards.
+     */
+    if (((RSA_flags(a->pkey.rsa) & RSA_METHOD_FLAG_NO_CHECK))
+            || (RSA_flags(b->pkey.rsa) & RSA_METHOD_FLAG_NO_CHECK)) {
+        return 1;
+    }
+
     if (BN_cmp(b->pkey.rsa->n, a->pkey.rsa->n) != 0
         || BN_cmp(b->pkey.rsa->e, a->pkey.rsa->e) != 0)
         return 0;
diff --git a/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-586.pl b/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-586.pl
index f7b85e6c6d7e..b72869b86d4a 100644
--- a/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-586.pl
+++ b/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-586.pl
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ $ymm=1 if ($xmm && !$ymm && $ARGV[0] eq "win32" &&
 		`ml 2>&1` =~ /Version ([0-9]+)\./ &&
 		$1>=10);	# first version supporting AVX
 
-$ymm=1 if ($xmm && !$ymm && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/ &&
+$ymm=1 if ($xmm && !$ymm && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/ &&
 		$2>=3.0);	# first version supporting AVX
 
 $shaext=$xmm;	### set to zero if compiling for 1.0.1
diff --git a/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-mb-x86_64.pl b/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-mb-x86_64.pl
index a78266d62fc3..47c588715163 100755
--- a/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-mb-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-mb-x86_64.pl
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-x86_64.pl b/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-x86_64.pl
index 0680d6d0a2b2..89146d137b9b 100755
--- a/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/sha/asm/sha1-x86_64.pl
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-586.pl b/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-586.pl
index 6989d59bd735..7523dbc165fa 100755
--- a/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-586.pl
+++ b/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-586.pl
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ if ($xmm && !$avx && $ARGV[0] eq "win32" &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if ($xmm && !$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if ($xmm && !$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-mb-x86_64.pl b/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-mb-x86_64.pl
index 81ac814effc4..c8cc6efac95c 100755
--- a/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-mb-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/sha/asm/sha256-mb-x86_64.pl
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/sha/asm/sha512-x86_64.pl b/crypto/sha/asm/sha512-x86_64.pl
index 64ae641c1407..ad37850e6130 100755
--- a/crypto/sha/asm/sha512-x86_64.pl
+++ b/crypto/sha/asm/sha512-x86_64.pl
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ if (!$avx && $win64 && ($flavour =~ /masm/ || $ENV{ASM} =~ /ml64/) &&
 	$avx = ($1>=10) + ($1>=11);
 }
 
-if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:^clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
+if (!$avx && `$ENV{CC} -v 2>&1` =~ /((?:clang|LLVM) version|.*based on LLVM) ([0-9]+\.[0-9]+)/) {
 	$avx = ($2>=3.0) + ($2>3.0);
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/store/loader_file.c b/crypto/store/loader_file.c
index 8f1d20e74aa4..9c9e3bd08506 100644
--- a/crypto/store/loader_file.c
+++ b/crypto/store/loader_file.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -429,6 +429,42 @@ static OSSL_STORE_INFO *try_decode_PrivateKey(const char *pem_name,
         }
     } else {
         int i;
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_ENGINE
+        ENGINE *curengine = ENGINE_get_first();
+
+        while (curengine != NULL) {
+            ENGINE_PKEY_ASN1_METHS_PTR asn1meths =
+                ENGINE_get_pkey_asn1_meths(curengine);
+
+            if (asn1meths != NULL) {
+                const int *nids = NULL;
+                int nids_n = asn1meths(curengine, NULL, &nids, 0);
+
+                for (i = 0; i < nids_n; i++) {
+                    EVP_PKEY_ASN1_METHOD *ameth2 = NULL;
+                    EVP_PKEY *tmp_pkey = NULL;
+                    const unsigned char *tmp_blob = blob;
+
+                    if (!asn1meths(curengine, &ameth2, NULL, nids[i]))
+                        continue;
+                    if (ameth2 == NULL
+                        || ameth2->pkey_flags & ASN1_PKEY_ALIAS)
+                        continue;
+
+                    tmp_pkey = d2i_PrivateKey(ameth2->pkey_id, NULL,
+                                              &tmp_blob, len);
+                    if (tmp_pkey != NULL) {
+                        if (pkey != NULL)
+                            EVP_PKEY_free(tmp_pkey);
+                        else
+                            pkey = tmp_pkey;
+                        (*matchcount)++;
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            curengine = ENGINE_get_next(curengine);
+        }
+#endif
 
         for (i = 0; i < EVP_PKEY_asn1_get_count(); i++) {
             EVP_PKEY *tmp_pkey = NULL;
diff --git a/crypto/store/store_lib.c b/crypto/store/store_lib.c
index fb8184d2d9b5..fb71f84725b1 100644
--- a/crypto/store/store_lib.c
+++ b/crypto/store/store_lib.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -218,7 +218,11 @@ int OSSL_STORE_eof(OSSL_STORE_CTX *ctx)
 
 int OSSL_STORE_close(OSSL_STORE_CTX *ctx)
 {
-    int loader_ret = ctx->loader->close(ctx->loader_ctx);
+    int loader_ret;
+
+    if (ctx == NULL)
+        return 1;
+    loader_ret = ctx->loader->close(ctx->loader_ctx);
 
     OPENSSL_free(ctx);
     return loader_ret;
diff --git a/crypto/ts/ts_rsp_sign.c b/crypto/ts/ts_rsp_sign.c
index 041a187da68c..342582f024b2 100644
--- a/crypto/ts/ts_rsp_sign.c
+++ b/crypto/ts/ts_rsp_sign.c
@@ -57,12 +57,14 @@ static ASN1_INTEGER *def_serial_cb(struct TS_resp_ctx *ctx, void *data)
         goto err;
     if (!ASN1_INTEGER_set(serial, 1))
         goto err;
+
     return serial;
 
  err:
     TSerr(TS_F_DEF_SERIAL_CB, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
     TS_RESP_CTX_set_status_info(ctx, TS_STATUS_REJECTION,
                                 "Error during serial number generation.");
+    ASN1_INTEGER_free(serial);
     return NULL;
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/ui/ui_openssl.c b/crypto/ui/ui_openssl.c
index 168de4630dcc..9526c16536cb 100644
--- a/crypto/ui/ui_openssl.c
+++ b/crypto/ui/ui_openssl.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -439,6 +439,16 @@ static int open_console(UI *ui)
             is_a_tty = 0;
         else
 #  endif
+#  ifdef EPERM
+            /*
+             * Linux can return EPERM (Operation not permitted),
+             * e.g. if a daemon executes openssl via fork()+execve()
+             * This should be ok
+             */
+        if (errno == EPERM)
+            is_a_tty = 0;
+        else
+#  endif
 #  ifdef ENODEV
             /*
              * MacOS X returns ENODEV (Operation not supported by device),
diff --git a/crypto/whrlpool/wp_block.c b/crypto/whrlpool/wp_block.c
index c21c04dbc1bb..39ad009c01bf 100644
--- a/crypto/whrlpool/wp_block.c
+++ b/crypto/whrlpool/wp_block.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2005-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2005-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -63,6 +63,20 @@ typedef unsigned long long u64;
 # undef STRICT_ALIGNMENT
 #endif
 
+#ifndef STRICT_ALIGNMENT
+# ifdef __GNUC__
+typedef u64 u64_a1 __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+# else
+typedef u64 u64_a1;
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
+typedef u64 u64_aX __attribute((__aligned__(1)));
+#else
+typedef u64 u64_aX;
+#endif
+
 #undef SMALL_REGISTER_BANK
 #if defined(__i386) || defined(__i386__) || defined(_M_IX86)
 # define SMALL_REGISTER_BANK
@@ -191,13 +205,13 @@ typedef unsigned long long u64;
 # define LL(c0,c1,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6,c7)   c0,c1,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6,c7, \
                                         c0,c1,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6,c7
 # define C0(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+0))[2*K.c[(i)*8+0]])
-# define C1(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+7))[2*K.c[(i)*8+1]])
-# define C2(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+6))[2*K.c[(i)*8+2]])
-# define C3(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+5))[2*K.c[(i)*8+3]])
-# define C4(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+4))[2*K.c[(i)*8+4]])
-# define C5(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+3))[2*K.c[(i)*8+5]])
-# define C6(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+2))[2*K.c[(i)*8+6]])
-# define C7(K,i)       (((u64*)(Cx.c+1))[2*K.c[(i)*8+7]])
+# define C1(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+7))[2*K.c[(i)*8+1]])
+# define C2(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+6))[2*K.c[(i)*8+2]])
+# define C3(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+5))[2*K.c[(i)*8+3]])
+# define C4(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+4))[2*K.c[(i)*8+4]])
+# define C5(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+3))[2*K.c[(i)*8+5]])
+# define C6(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+2))[2*K.c[(i)*8+6]])
+# define C7(K,i)       (((u64_a1*)(Cx.c+1))[2*K.c[(i)*8+7]])
 #endif
 
 static const
@@ -531,7 +545,7 @@ void whirlpool_block(WHIRLPOOL_CTX *ctx, const void *inp, size_t n)
         } else
 # endif
         {
-            const u64 *pa = (const u64 *)p;
+            const u64_aX *pa = (const u64_aX *)p;
             S.q[0] = (K.q[0] = H->q[0]) ^ pa[0];
             S.q[1] = (K.q[1] = H->q[1]) ^ pa[1];
             S.q[2] = (K.q[2] = H->q[2]) ^ pa[2];
@@ -769,7 +783,7 @@ void whirlpool_block(WHIRLPOOL_CTX *ctx, const void *inp, size_t n)
         } else
 # endif
         {
-            const u64 *pa = (const u64 *)p;
+            const u64_aX *pa = (const u64_aX *)p;
             H->q[0] ^= S.q[0] ^ pa[0];
             H->q[1] ^= S.q[1] ^ pa[1];
             H->q[2] ^= S.q[2] ^ pa[2];
diff --git a/crypto/x509/x509_err.c b/crypto/x509/x509_err.c
index c110d908090e..bdd1e67cd3fd 100644
--- a/crypto/x509/x509_err.c
+++ b/crypto/x509/x509_err.c
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 /*
  * Generated by util/mkerr.pl DO NOT EDIT
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -79,6 +79,7 @@ static const ERR_STRING_DATA X509_str_functs[] = {
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_X509, X509_F_X509_PRINT_EX_FP, 0), "X509_print_ex_fp"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_X509, X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_DECODE, 0),
      "x509_pubkey_decode"},
+    {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_X509, X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET, 0), "X509_PUBKEY_get"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_X509, X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET0, 0), "X509_PUBKEY_get0"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_X509, X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_SET, 0), "X509_PUBKEY_set"},
     {ERR_PACK(ERR_LIB_X509, X509_F_X509_REQ_CHECK_PRIVATE_KEY, 0),
diff --git a/crypto/x509/x509_local.h b/crypto/x509/x509_local.h
index c517a7745637..10807e1def04 100644
--- a/crypto/x509/x509_local.h
+++ b/crypto/x509/x509_local.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2014-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2014-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -145,3 +145,5 @@ DEFINE_STACK_OF(STACK_OF_X509_NAME_ENTRY)
 
 void x509_set_signature_info(X509_SIG_INFO *siginf, const X509_ALGOR *alg,
                              const ASN1_STRING *sig);
+int x509_likely_issued(X509 *issuer, X509 *subject);
+int x509_signing_allowed(const X509 *issuer, const X509 *subject);
diff --git a/crypto/x509/x509_req.c b/crypto/x509/x509_req.c
index 7ba0f26495f9..dd674926ddb5 100644
--- a/crypto/x509/x509_req.c
+++ b/crypto/x509/x509_req.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -286,6 +286,18 @@ void X509_REQ_get0_signature(const X509_REQ *req, const ASN1_BIT_STRING **psig,
         *palg = &req->sig_alg;
 }
 
+void X509_REQ_set0_signature(X509_REQ *req, ASN1_BIT_STRING *psig)
+{
+    if (req->signature)
+           ASN1_BIT_STRING_free(req->signature);
+    req->signature = psig;
+}
+
+int X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo(X509_REQ *req, X509_ALGOR *palg)
+{
+    return X509_ALGOR_copy(&req->sig_alg, palg);
+}
+
 int X509_REQ_get_signature_nid(const X509_REQ *req)
 {
     return OBJ_obj2nid(req->sig_alg.algorithm);
diff --git a/crypto/x509/x509_txt.c b/crypto/x509/x509_txt.c
index 4755b39eb4eb..02bde640d8e8 100644
--- a/crypto/x509/x509_txt.c
+++ b/crypto/x509/x509_txt.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -174,6 +174,8 @@ const char *X509_verify_cert_error_string(long n)
         return "OCSP verification failed";
     case X509_V_ERR_OCSP_CERT_UNKNOWN:
         return "OCSP unknown cert";
+    case X509_V_ERR_EC_KEY_EXPLICIT_PARAMS:
+        return "Certificate public key has explicit ECC parameters";
 
     default:
         /* Printing an error number into a static buffer is not thread-safe */
diff --git a/crypto/x509/x509_vfy.c b/crypto/x509/x509_vfy.c
index 41625e75ad6a..801055f5a087 100644
--- a/crypto/x509/x509_vfy.c
+++ b/crypto/x509/x509_vfy.c
@@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ static int get_issuer_sk(X509 **issuer, X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *x);
 static int check_dane_issuer(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, int depth);
 static int check_key_level(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *cert);
 static int check_sig_level(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *cert);
+static int check_curve(X509 *cert);
 
 static int get_crl_score(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 **pissuer,
                          unsigned int *preasons, X509_CRL *crl, X509 *x);
@@ -104,7 +105,12 @@ static int null_callback(int ok, X509_STORE_CTX *e)
     return ok;
 }
 
-/* Return 1 is a certificate is self signed */
+/*
+ * Return 1 if given cert is considered self-signed, 0 if not or on error.
+ * This does not verify self-signedness but relies on x509v3_cache_extensions()
+ * matching issuer and subject names (i.e., the cert being self-issued) and any
+ * present authority key identifier matching the subject key identifier, etc.
+ */
 static int cert_self_signed(X509 *x)
 {
     if (X509_check_purpose(x, -1, 0) != 1)
@@ -131,10 +137,9 @@ static X509 *lookup_cert_match(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *x)
         xtmp = sk_X509_value(certs, i);
         if (!X509_cmp(xtmp, x))
             break;
+        xtmp = NULL;
     }
-    if (i < sk_X509_num(certs))
-        X509_up_ref(xtmp);
-    else
+    if (xtmp != NULL && !X509_up_ref(xtmp))
         xtmp = NULL;
     sk_X509_pop_free(certs, X509_free);
     return xtmp;
@@ -267,17 +272,24 @@ int X509_verify_cert(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
         return -1;
     }
 
+    if (!X509_up_ref(ctx->cert)) {
+        X509err(X509_F_X509_VERIFY_CERT, ERR_R_INTERNAL_ERROR);
+        ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_UNSPECIFIED;
+        return -1;
+    }
+
     /*
      * first we make sure the chain we are going to build is present and that
      * the first entry is in place
      */
-    if (((ctx->chain = sk_X509_new_null()) == NULL) ||
-        (!sk_X509_push(ctx->chain, ctx->cert))) {
+    if ((ctx->chain = sk_X509_new_null()) == NULL
+            || !sk_X509_push(ctx->chain, ctx->cert)) {
+        X509_free(ctx->cert);
         X509err(X509_F_X509_VERIFY_CERT, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
         ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_OUT_OF_MEM;
         return -1;
     }
-    X509_up_ref(ctx->cert);
+
     ctx->num_untrusted = 1;
 
     /* If the peer's public key is too weak, we can stop early. */
@@ -319,30 +331,26 @@ static X509 *find_issuer(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, STACK_OF(X509) *sk, X509 *x)
     return rv;
 }
 
-/* Given a possible certificate and issuer check them */
-
+/*
+ * Check that the given certificate 'x' is issued by the certificate 'issuer'
+ * and the issuer is not yet in ctx->chain, where the exceptional case
+ * that 'x' is self-issued and ctx->chain has just one element is allowed.
+ */
 static int check_issued(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *x, X509 *issuer)
 {
-    int ret;
-    if (x == issuer)
-        return cert_self_signed(x);
-    ret = X509_check_issued(issuer, x);
-    if (ret == X509_V_OK) {
+    if (x509_likely_issued(issuer, x) != X509_V_OK)
+        return 0;
+    if ((x->ex_flags & EXFLAG_SI) == 0 || sk_X509_num(ctx->chain) != 1) {
         int i;
         X509 *ch;
-        /* Special case: single self signed certificate */
-        if (cert_self_signed(x) && sk_X509_num(ctx->chain) == 1)
-            return 1;
+
         for (i = 0; i < sk_X509_num(ctx->chain); i++) {
             ch = sk_X509_value(ctx->chain, i);
-            if (ch == issuer || !X509_cmp(ch, issuer)) {
-                ret = X509_V_ERR_PATH_LOOP;
-                break;
-            }
+            if (ch == issuer || X509_cmp(ch, issuer) == 0)
+                return 0;
         }
     }
-
-    return (ret == X509_V_OK);
+    return 1;
 }
 
 /* Alternative lookup method: look from a STACK stored in other_ctx */
@@ -350,11 +358,15 @@ static int check_issued(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *x, X509 *issuer)
 static int get_issuer_sk(X509 **issuer, X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *x)
 {
     *issuer = find_issuer(ctx, ctx->other_ctx, x);
-    if (*issuer) {
-        X509_up_ref(*issuer);
-        return 1;
-    } else
-        return 0;
+
+    if (*issuer == NULL || !X509_up_ref(*issuer))
+        goto err;
+
+    return 1;
+
+ err:
+    *issuer = NULL;
+    return 0;
 }
 
 static STACK_OF(X509) *lookup_certs_sk(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509_NAME *nm)
@@ -366,15 +378,21 @@ static STACK_OF(X509) *lookup_certs_sk(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509_NAME *nm)
     for (i = 0; i < sk_X509_num(ctx->other_ctx); i++) {
         x = sk_X509_value(ctx->other_ctx, i);
         if (X509_NAME_cmp(nm, X509_get_subject_name(x)) == 0) {
+            if (!X509_up_ref(x)) {
+                sk_X509_pop_free(sk, X509_free);
+                X509err(X509_F_LOOKUP_CERTS_SK, ERR_R_INTERNAL_ERROR);
+                ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_UNSPECIFIED;
+                return NULL;
+            }
             if (sk == NULL)
                 sk = sk_X509_new_null();
-            if (sk == NULL || sk_X509_push(sk, x) == 0) {
+            if (sk == NULL || !sk_X509_push(sk, x)) {
+                X509_free(x);
                 sk_X509_pop_free(sk, X509_free);
                 X509err(X509_F_LOOKUP_CERTS_SK, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
                 ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_OUT_OF_MEM;
                 return NULL;
             }
-            X509_up_ref(x);
         }
     }
     return sk;
@@ -508,6 +526,14 @@ static int check_chain_extensions(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
                 ret = 1;
             break;
         }
+        if ((ctx->param->flags & X509_V_FLAG_X509_STRICT) && num > 1) {
+            /* Check for presence of explicit elliptic curve parameters */
+            ret = check_curve(x);
+            if (ret < 0)
+                ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_UNSPECIFIED;
+            else if (ret == 0)
+                ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_EC_KEY_EXPLICIT_PARAMS;
+        }
         if ((x->ex_flags & EXFLAG_CA) == 0
             && x->ex_pathlen != -1
             && (ctx->param->flags & X509_V_FLAG_X509_STRICT)) {
@@ -1699,6 +1725,7 @@ int x509_check_cert_time(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *x, int depth)
     return 1;
 }
 
+/* verify the issuer signatures and cert times of ctx->chain */
 static int internal_verify(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
 {
     int n = sk_X509_num(ctx->chain) - 1;
@@ -1717,7 +1744,7 @@ static int internal_verify(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
     }
 
     if (ctx->check_issued(ctx, xi, xi))
-        xs = xi;
+        xs = xi; /* the typical case: last cert in the chain is self-issued */
     else {
         if (ctx->param->flags & X509_V_FLAG_PARTIAL_CHAIN) {
             xs = xi;
@@ -1736,22 +1763,50 @@ static int internal_verify(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
      * is allowed to reset errors (at its own peril).
      */
     while (n >= 0) {
-        EVP_PKEY *pkey;
-
         /*
-         * Skip signature check for self signed certificates unless explicitly
-         * asked for.  It doesn't add any security and just wastes time.  If
-         * the issuer's public key is unusable, report the issuer certificate
-         * and its depth (rather than the depth of the subject).
+         * For each iteration of this loop:
+         * n is the subject depth
+         * xs is the subject cert, for which the signature is to be checked
+         * xi is the supposed issuer cert containing the public key to use
+         * Initially xs == xi if the last cert in the chain is self-issued.
+         *
+         * Skip signature check for self-signed certificates unless explicitly
+         * asked for because it does not add any security and just wastes time.
          */
-        if (xs != xi || (ctx->param->flags & X509_V_FLAG_CHECK_SS_SIGNATURE)) {
+        if (xs != xi || ((ctx->param->flags & X509_V_FLAG_CHECK_SS_SIGNATURE)
+                         && (xi->ex_flags & EXFLAG_SS) != 0)) {
+            EVP_PKEY *pkey;
+            /*
+             * If the issuer's public key is not available or its key usage
+             * does not support issuing the subject cert, report the issuer
+             * cert and its depth (rather than n, the depth of the subject).
+             */
+            int issuer_depth = n + (xs == xi ? 0 : 1);
+            /*
+             * According to https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-6.1.4
+             * step (n) we must check any given key usage extension in a CA cert
+             * when preparing the verification of a certificate issued by it.
+             * According to https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280#section-4.2.1.3
+             * we must not verify a certifiate signature if the key usage of the
+             * CA certificate that issued the certificate prohibits signing.
+             * In case the 'issuing' certificate is the last in the chain and is
+             * not a CA certificate but a 'self-issued' end-entity cert (i.e.,
+             * xs == xi && !(xi->ex_flags & EXFLAG_CA)) RFC 5280 does not apply
+             * (see https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6818#section-2) and thus
+             * we are free to ignore any key usage restrictions on such certs.
+             */
+            int ret = xs == xi && (xi->ex_flags & EXFLAG_CA) == 0
+                ? X509_V_OK : x509_signing_allowed(xi, xs);
+
+            if (ret != X509_V_OK && !verify_cb_cert(ctx, xi, issuer_depth, ret))
+                return 0;
             if ((pkey = X509_get0_pubkey(xi)) == NULL) {
-                if (!verify_cb_cert(ctx, xi, xi != xs ? n+1 : n,
-                        X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_DECODE_ISSUER_PUBLIC_KEY))
+                ret = X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_DECODE_ISSUER_PUBLIC_KEY;
+                if (!verify_cb_cert(ctx, xi, issuer_depth, ret))
                     return 0;
             } else if (X509_verify(xs, pkey) <= 0) {
-                if (!verify_cb_cert(ctx, xs, n,
-                                    X509_V_ERR_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE))
+                ret = X509_V_ERR_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE;
+                if (!verify_cb_cert(ctx, xs, n, ret))
                     return 0;
             }
         }
@@ -3158,7 +3213,16 @@ static int build_chain(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
             /* Drop this issuer from future consideration */
             (void) sk_X509_delete_ptr(sktmp, xtmp);
 
+            if (!X509_up_ref(xtmp)) {
+                X509err(X509_F_BUILD_CHAIN, ERR_R_INTERNAL_ERROR);
+                trust = X509_TRUST_REJECTED;
+                ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_UNSPECIFIED;
+                search = 0;
+                continue;
+            }
+
             if (!sk_X509_push(ctx->chain, xtmp)) {
+                X509_free(xtmp);
                 X509err(X509_F_BUILD_CHAIN, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
                 trust = X509_TRUST_REJECTED;
                 ctx->error = X509_V_ERR_OUT_OF_MEM;
@@ -3166,7 +3230,7 @@ static int build_chain(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx)
                 continue;
             }
 
-            X509_up_ref(x = xtmp);
+            x = xtmp;
             ++ctx->num_untrusted;
             ss = cert_self_signed(xtmp);
 
@@ -3257,6 +3321,32 @@ static int check_key_level(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, X509 *cert)
     return EVP_PKEY_security_bits(pkey) >= minbits_table[level - 1];
 }
 
+/*
+ * Check whether the public key of ``cert`` does not use explicit params
+ * for an elliptic curve.
+ *
+ * Returns 1 on success, 0 if check fails, -1 for other errors.
+ */
+static int check_curve(X509 *cert)
+{
+#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_EC
+    EVP_PKEY *pkey = X509_get0_pubkey(cert);
+
+    /* Unsupported or malformed key */
+    if (pkey == NULL)
+        return -1;
+
+    if (EVP_PKEY_id(pkey) == EVP_PKEY_EC) {
+        int ret;
+
+        ret = EC_KEY_decoded_from_explicit_params(EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY(pkey));
+        return ret < 0 ? ret : !ret;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
 /*
  * Check whether the signature digest algorithm of ``cert`` meets the security
  * level of ``ctx``.  Should not be checked for trust anchors (whether
diff --git a/crypto/x509/x_pubkey.c b/crypto/x509/x_pubkey.c
index 4f694b93fb00..9be7e9286571 100644
--- a/crypto/x509/x_pubkey.c
+++ b/crypto/x509/x_pubkey.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -169,8 +169,11 @@ EVP_PKEY *X509_PUBKEY_get0(X509_PUBKEY *key)
 EVP_PKEY *X509_PUBKEY_get(X509_PUBKEY *key)
 {
     EVP_PKEY *ret = X509_PUBKEY_get0(key);
-    if (ret != NULL)
-        EVP_PKEY_up_ref(ret);
+
+    if (ret != NULL && !EVP_PKEY_up_ref(ret)) {
+        X509err(X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET, ERR_R_INTERNAL_ERROR);
+        ret = NULL;
+    }
     return ret;
 }
 
diff --git a/crypto/x509v3/pcy_data.c b/crypto/x509v3/pcy_data.c
index 073505951322..8c7bc69576a4 100644
--- a/crypto/x509v3/pcy_data.c
+++ b/crypto/x509v3/pcy_data.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2004-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2004-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -52,6 +52,7 @@ X509_POLICY_DATA *policy_data_new(POLICYINFO *policy,
     ret = OPENSSL_zalloc(sizeof(*ret));
     if (ret == NULL) {
         X509V3err(X509V3_F_POLICY_DATA_NEW, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
+        ASN1_OBJECT_free(id);
         return NULL;
     }
     ret->expected_policy_set = sk_ASN1_OBJECT_new_null();
diff --git a/crypto/x509v3/v3_alt.c b/crypto/x509v3/v3_alt.c
index 7ac2911b91af..4dce0041012e 100644
--- a/crypto/x509v3/v3_alt.c
+++ b/crypto/x509v3/v3_alt.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1999-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1999-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -275,6 +275,7 @@ static int copy_issuer(X509V3_CTX *ctx, GENERAL_NAMES *gens)
     num = sk_GENERAL_NAME_num(ialt);
     if (!sk_GENERAL_NAME_reserve(gens, num)) {
         X509V3err(X509V3_F_COPY_ISSUER, ERR_R_MALLOC_FAILURE);
+        sk_GENERAL_NAME_free(ialt);
         goto err;
     }
 
diff --git a/crypto/x509v3/v3_purp.c b/crypto/x509v3/v3_purp.c
index f023c6489548..2b06dba05398 100644
--- a/crypto/x509v3/v3_purp.c
+++ b/crypto/x509v3/v3_purp.c
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@
 #include <openssl/x509v3.h>
 #include <openssl/x509_vfy.h>
 #include "crypto/x509.h"
+#include "../x509/x509_local.h" /* for x509_signing_allowed() */
 #include "internal/tsan_assist.h"
 
 static void x509v3_cache_extensions(X509 *x);
@@ -344,6 +345,21 @@ static int setup_crldp(X509 *x)
     return 1;
 }
 
+/* Check that issuer public key algorithm matches subject signature algorithm */
+static int check_sig_alg_match(const EVP_PKEY *pkey, const X509 *subject)
+{
+    int pkey_nid;
+
+    if (pkey == NULL)
+        return X509_V_ERR_NO_ISSUER_PUBLIC_KEY;
+    if (OBJ_find_sigid_algs(OBJ_obj2nid(subject->cert_info.signature.algorithm),
+                            NULL, &pkey_nid) == 0)
+        return X509_V_ERR_UNSUPPORTED_SIGNATURE_ALGORITHM;
+    if (EVP_PKEY_type(pkey_nid) != EVP_PKEY_base_id(pkey))
+        return X509_V_ERR_SIGNATURE_ALGORITHM_MISMATCH;
+    return X509_V_OK;
+}
+
 #define V1_ROOT (EXFLAG_V1|EXFLAG_SS)
 #define ku_reject(x, usage) \
         (((x)->ex_flags & EXFLAG_KUSAGE) && !((x)->ex_kusage & (usage)))
@@ -496,11 +512,11 @@ static void x509v3_cache_extensions(X509 *x)
         x->ex_flags |= EXFLAG_INVALID;
     /* Does subject name match issuer ? */
     if (!X509_NAME_cmp(X509_get_subject_name(x), X509_get_issuer_name(x))) {
-        x->ex_flags |= EXFLAG_SI;
-        /* If SKID matches AKID also indicate self signed */
-        if (X509_check_akid(x, x->akid) == X509_V_OK &&
-            !ku_reject(x, KU_KEY_CERT_SIGN))
-            x->ex_flags |= EXFLAG_SS;
+        x->ex_flags |= EXFLAG_SI; /* cert is self-issued */
+        if (X509_check_akid(x, x->akid) == X509_V_OK /* SKID matches AKID */
+                /* .. and the signature alg matches the PUBKEY alg: */
+                && check_sig_alg_match(X509_get0_pubkey(x), x) == X509_V_OK)
+            x->ex_flags |= EXFLAG_SS; /* indicate self-signed */
     }
     x->altname = X509_get_ext_d2i(x, NID_subject_alt_name, &i, NULL);
     if (x->altname == NULL && i != -1)
@@ -792,6 +808,23 @@ static int no_check(const X509_PURPOSE *xp, const X509 *x, int ca)
     return 1;
 }
 
+/*-
+ * Check if certificate I<issuer> is allowed to issue certificate I<subject>
+ * according to the B<keyUsage> field of I<issuer> if present
+ * depending on any proxyCertInfo extension of I<subject>.
+ * Returns 0 for OK, or positive for reason for rejection
+ * where reason codes match those for X509_verify_cert().
+ */
+int x509_signing_allowed(const X509 *issuer, const X509 *subject)
+{
+    if (subject->ex_flags & EXFLAG_PROXY) {
+        if (ku_reject(issuer, KU_DIGITAL_SIGNATURE))
+            return X509_V_ERR_KEYUSAGE_NO_DIGITAL_SIGNATURE;
+    } else if (ku_reject(issuer, KU_KEY_CERT_SIGN))
+        return X509_V_ERR_KEYUSAGE_NO_CERTSIGN;
+    return X509_V_OK;
+}
+
 /*-
  * Various checks to see if one certificate issued the second.
  * This can be used to prune a set of possible issuer certificates
@@ -800,12 +833,23 @@ static int no_check(const X509_PURPOSE *xp, const X509 *x, int ca)
  * These are:
  * 1. Check issuer_name(subject) == subject_name(issuer)
  * 2. If akid(subject) exists check it matches issuer
- * 3. If key_usage(issuer) exists check it supports certificate signing
+ * 3. Check that issuer public key algorithm matches subject signature algorithm
+ * 4. If key_usage(issuer) exists check it supports certificate signing
  * returns 0 for OK, positive for reason for mismatch, reasons match
  * codes for X509_verify_cert()
  */
 
 int X509_check_issued(X509 *issuer, X509 *subject)
+{
+    int ret;
+
+    if ((ret = x509_likely_issued(issuer, subject)) != X509_V_OK)
+        return ret;
+    return x509_signing_allowed(issuer, subject);
+}
+
+/* do the checks 1., 2., and 3. as described above for X509_check_issued() */
+int x509_likely_issued(X509 *issuer, X509 *subject)
 {
     if (X509_NAME_cmp(X509_get_subject_name(issuer),
                       X509_get_issuer_name(subject)))
@@ -824,12 +868,8 @@ int X509_check_issued(X509 *issuer, X509 *subject)
             return ret;
     }
 
-    if (subject->ex_flags & EXFLAG_PROXY) {
-        if (ku_reject(issuer, KU_DIGITAL_SIGNATURE))
-            return X509_V_ERR_KEYUSAGE_NO_DIGITAL_SIGNATURE;
-    } else if (ku_reject(issuer, KU_KEY_CERT_SIGN))
-        return X509_V_ERR_KEYUSAGE_NO_CERTSIGN;
-    return X509_V_OK;
+    /* check if the subject signature alg matches the issuer's PUBKEY alg */
+    return check_sig_alg_match(X509_get0_pubkey(issuer), subject);
 }
 
 int X509_check_akid(X509 *issuer, AUTHORITY_KEYID *akid)
diff --git a/doc/man1/CA.pl.pod b/doc/man1/CA.pl.pod
index 6949ec6228ac..4e8958e554dd 100644
--- a/doc/man1/CA.pl.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/CA.pl.pod
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ to standard output. Leverages B<openssl ca> command.
 
 =item B<-signCA>
 
-This option is the same as the B<-signreq> option except it uses the
+This option is the same as the B<-sign> option except it uses the
 configuration file section B<v3_ca> and so makes the signed request a
 valid CA certificate. This is useful when creating intermediate CA from
 a root CA.  Extra params are passed on to B<openssl ca> command.
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ the request and finally create a PKCS#12 file containing it.
 
  CA.pl -newca
  CA.pl -newreq
- CA.pl -signreq
+ CA.pl -sign
  CA.pl -pkcs12 "My Test Certificate"
 
 =head1 DSA CERTIFICATES
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Create the CA directories and files:
 
  CA.pl -newca
 
-enter cacert.pem when prompted for the CA file name.
+enter cacert.pem when prompted for the CA filename.
 
 Create a DSA certificate request and private key (a different set of parameters
 can optionally be created first):
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ can optionally be created first):
 
 Sign the request:
 
- CA.pl -signreq
+ CA.pl -sign
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ L<config(5)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/ca.pod b/doc/man1/ca.pod
index 27bb31493a7f..159d9d812565 100644
--- a/doc/man1/ca.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/ca.pod
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ DNs match the order of the request. This is not needed for Xenroll.
 =item B<-noemailDN>
 
 The DN of a certificate can contain the EMAIL field if present in the
-request DN, however it is good policy just having the e-mail set into
+request DN, however, it is good policy just having the e-mail set into
 the altName extension of the certificate. When this option is set the
 EMAIL field is removed from the certificate' subject and set only in
 the, eventually present, extensions. The B<email_in_dn> keyword can be
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ L<config(5)>, L<x509v3_config(5)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/dgst.pod b/doc/man1/dgst.pod
index ea2c4e3e1598..4c6034cdd6ce 100644
--- a/doc/man1/dgst.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/dgst.pod
@@ -94,8 +94,7 @@ Filename to output to, or standard output by default.
 =item B<-sign filename>
 
 Digitally sign the digest using the private key in "filename". Note this option
-does not support Ed25519 or Ed448 private keys. Use the B<pkeyutl> command
-instead for this.
+does not support Ed25519 or Ed448 private keys.
 
 =item B<-keyform arg>
 
@@ -242,7 +241,7 @@ The FIPS-related options were removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/enc.pod b/doc/man1/enc.pod
index 6f20ac1fc7d5..7bba89ee0783 100644
--- a/doc/man1/enc.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/enc.pod
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ a strong block cipher, such as AES, in CBC mode.
 
 All the block ciphers normally use PKCS#5 padding, also known as standard
 block padding. This allows a rudimentary integrity or password check to
-be performed. However since the chance of random data passing the test
+be performed. However, since the chance of random data passing the test
 is better than 1 in 256 it isn't a very good test.
 
 If padding is disabled then the input data must be a multiple of the cipher
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ The B<-list> option was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1e.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/ocsp.pod b/doc/man1/ocsp.pod
index 736055b1b669..1f724b42bde4 100644
--- a/doc/man1/ocsp.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/ocsp.pod
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Specify the responder URL. Both HTTP and HTTPS (SSL/TLS) URLs can be specified.
 =item B<-host hostname:port>, B<-path pathname>
 
 If the B<host> option is present then the OCSP request is sent to the host
-B<hostname> on port B<port>. B<path> specifies the HTTP path name to use
+B<hostname> on port B<port>. B<path> specifies the HTTP pathname to use
 or "/" by default.  This is equivalent to specifying B<-url> with scheme
 http:// and the given hostname, port, and pathname.
 
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ The -no_alt_chains option was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/pkcs12.pod b/doc/man1/pkcs12.pod
index da887a469978..fdaf6e49cd1d 100644
--- a/doc/man1/pkcs12.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/pkcs12.pod
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ This option is only interpreted by MSIE and similar MS software. Normally
 encryption purposes but arbitrary length keys for signing. The B<-keysig>
 option marks the key for signing only. Signing only keys can be used for
 S/MIME signing, authenticode (ActiveX control signing)  and SSL client
-authentication, however due to a bug only MSIE 5.0 and later support
+authentication, however, due to a bug only MSIE 5.0 and later support
 the use of signing only keys for SSL client authentication.
 
 =item B<-macalg digest>
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ L<pkcs8(1)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/pkcs8.pod b/doc/man1/pkcs8.pod
index b079885d2fc7..9efc8bc11e77 100644
--- a/doc/man1/pkcs8.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/pkcs8.pod
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ one million iterations of the password:
 Test vectors from this PKCS#5 v2.0 implementation were posted to the
 pkcs-tng mailing list using triple DES, DES and RC2 with high iteration
 counts, several people confirmed that they could decrypt the private
-keys produced and Therefore it can be assumed that the PKCS#5 v2.0
+keys produced and therefore, it can be assumed that the PKCS#5 v2.0
 implementation is reasonably accurate at least as far as these
 algorithms are concerned.
 
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ The B<-iter> option was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/pkeyutl.pod b/doc/man1/pkeyutl.pod
index dffc449a4e0e..ae24fdc10045 100644
--- a/doc/man1/pkeyutl.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/pkeyutl.pod
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ B<openssl> B<pkeyutl>
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The B<pkeyutl> command can be used to perform low level public key operations
+The B<pkeyutl> command can be used to perform low-level public key operations
 using any supported algorithm.
 
 =head1 OPTIONS
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ L<EVP_PKEY_CTX_set_hkdf_md(3)>, L<EVP_PKEY_CTX_set_tls1_prf_md(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/s_client.pod b/doc/man1/s_client.pod
index 68a152a272bd..132778b4d907 100644
--- a/doc/man1/s_client.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/s_client.pod
@@ -427,11 +427,11 @@ File to send output of B<-msg> or B<-trace> to, default standard output.
 
 =item B<-nbio_test>
 
-Tests non-blocking I/O
+Tests nonblocking I/O
 
 =item B<-nbio>
 
-Turns on non-blocking I/O
+Turns on nonblocking I/O
 
 =item B<-crlf>
 
@@ -781,14 +781,14 @@ is that a web client complains it has no certificates or gives an empty
 list to choose from. This is normally because the server is not sending
 the clients certificate authority in its "acceptable CA list" when it
 requests a certificate. By using B<s_client> the CA list can be viewed
-and checked. However some servers only request client authentication
+and checked. However, some servers only request client authentication
 after a specific URL is requested. To obtain the list in this case it
 is necessary to use the B<-prexit> option and send an HTTP request
 for an appropriate page.
 
 If a certificate is specified on the command line using the B<-cert>
 option it will not be used unless the server specifically requests
-a client certificate. Therefor merely including a client certificate
+a client certificate. Therefore, merely including a client certificate
 on the command line is no guarantee that the certificate works.
 
 If there are problems verifying a server certificate then the
diff --git a/doc/man1/s_server.pod b/doc/man1/s_server.pod
index 7fa382a8ae33..c78a677abcfc 100644
--- a/doc/man1/s_server.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/s_server.pod
@@ -432,9 +432,9 @@ used in conjunction with B<-early_data>.
 =item B<-id_prefix val>
 
 Generate SSL/TLS session IDs prefixed by B<val>. This is mostly useful
-for testing any SSL/TLS code (eg. proxies) that wish to deal with multiple
+for testing any SSL/TLS code (e.g. proxies) that wish to deal with multiple
 servers, when each of which might be generating a unique range of session
-IDs (eg. with a certain prefix).
+IDs (e.g. with a certain prefix).
 
 =item B<-rand file...>
 
@@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ The
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/s_time.pod b/doc/man1/s_time.pod
index e1a3bef41cfc..1085bfbbb44b 100644
--- a/doc/man1/s_time.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/s_time.pod
@@ -177,14 +177,14 @@ is that a web client complains it has no certificates or gives an empty
 list to choose from. This is normally because the server is not sending
 the clients certificate authority in its "acceptable CA list" when it
 requests a certificate. By using L<s_client(1)> the CA list can be
-viewed and checked. However some servers only request client authentication
+viewed and checked. However, some servers only request client authentication
 after a specific URL is requested. To obtain the list in this case it
 is necessary to use the B<-prexit> option of L<s_client(1)> and
 send an HTTP request for an appropriate page.
 
 If a certificate is specified on the command line using the B<-cert>
 option it will not be used unless the server specifically requests
-a client certificate. Therefor merely including a client certificate
+a client certificate. Therefore, merely including a client certificate
 on the command line is no guarantee that the certificate works.
 
 =head1 BUGS
diff --git a/doc/man1/sess_id.pod b/doc/man1/sess_id.pod
index 6c54ed988bbe..543b5b7de7ff 100644
--- a/doc/man1/sess_id.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/sess_id.pod
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ The PEM encoded session format uses the header and footer lines:
 
 Since the SSL session output contains the master key it is
 possible to read the contents of an encrypted session using this
-information. Therefore appropriate security precautions should be taken if
+information. Therefore, appropriate security precautions should be taken if
 the information is being output by a "real" application. This is however
 strongly discouraged and should only be used for debugging purposes.
 
diff --git a/doc/man1/ts.pod b/doc/man1/ts.pod
index ec57ec7ebbd4..ee700a8f6ea4 100644
--- a/doc/man1/ts.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/ts.pod
@@ -101,23 +101,23 @@ the hash to the TSA.
 =item 2.
 
 The TSA attaches the current date and time to the received hash value,
-signs them and sends the time stamp token back to the client. By
+signs them and sends the timestamp token back to the client. By
 creating this token the TSA certifies the existence of the original
 data file at the time of response generation.
 
 =item 3.
 
-The TSA client receives the time stamp token and verifies the
+The TSA client receives the timestamp token and verifies the
 signature on it. It also checks if the token contains the same hash
 value that it had sent to the TSA.
 
 =back
 
-There is one DER encoded protocol data unit defined for transporting a time
-stamp request to the TSA and one for sending the time stamp response
+There is one DER encoded protocol data unit defined for transporting 
+a timestamp request to the TSA and one for sending the timestamp response
 back to the client. The B<ts> command has three main functions:
-creating a time stamp request based on a data file,
-creating a time stamp response based on a request, verifying if a
+creating a timestamp request based on a data file,
+creating a timestamp response based on a request, verifying if a
 response corresponds to a particular request or a data file.
 
 There is no support for sending the requests/responses automatically
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ requests either by ftp or e-mail.
 
 =head2 Time Stamp Request generation
 
-The B<-query> switch can be used for creating and printing a time stamp
+The B<-query> switch can be used for creating and printing a timestamp
 request with the following options:
 
 =over 4
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ see L<openssl(1)/COMMAND SUMMARY>.
 
 =item B<-data> file_to_hash
 
-The data file for which the time stamp request needs to be
+The data file for which the timestamp request needs to be
 created. stdin is the default if neither the B<-data> nor the B<-digest>
 parameter is specified. (Optional)
 
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ The default is SHA-1. (Optional)
 =item B<-tspolicy> object_id
 
 The policy that the client expects the TSA to use for creating the
-time stamp token. Either the dotted OID notation or OID names defined
+timestamp token. Either the dotted OID notation or OID names defined
 in the config file can be used. If no policy is requested the TSA will
 use its own default policy. (Optional)
 
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ response. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-in> request.tsq
 
-This option specifies a previously created time stamp request in DER
+This option specifies a previously created timestamp request in DER
 format that will be printed into the output file. Useful when you need
 to examine the content of a request in human-readable
 format. (Optional)
@@ -212,13 +212,13 @@ instead of DER. (Optional)
 
 =head2 Time Stamp Response generation
 
-A time stamp response (TimeStampResp) consists of a response status
-and the time stamp token itself (ContentInfo), if the token generation was
-successful. The B<-reply> command is for creating a time stamp
-response or time stamp token based on a request and printing the
+A timestamp response (TimeStampResp) consists of a response status
+and the timestamp token itself (ContentInfo), if the token generation was
+successful. The B<-reply> command is for creating a timestamp
+response or timestamp token based on a request and printing the
 response/token in human-readable format. If B<-token_out> is not
-specified the output is always a time stamp response (TimeStampResp),
-otherwise it is a time stamp token (ContentInfo).
+specified the output is always a timestamp response (TimeStampResp),
+otherwise it is a timestamp token (ContentInfo).
 
 =over 4
 
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ used, see B<CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS> for details. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-queryfile> request.tsq
 
-The name of the file containing a DER encoded time stamp request. (Optional)
+The name of the file containing a DER encoded timestamp request. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-passin> password_src
 
@@ -282,19 +282,19 @@ B<default_policy> config file option. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-in> response.tsr
 
-Specifies a previously created time stamp response or time stamp token
+Specifies a previously created timestamp response or timestamp token
 (if B<-token_in> is also specified) in DER format that will be written
 to the output file. This option does not require a request, it is
 useful e.g. when you need to examine the content of a response or
-token or you want to extract the time stamp token from a response. If
-the input is a token and the output is a time stamp response a default
+token or you want to extract the timestamp token from a response. If
+the input is a token and the output is a timestamp response a default
 'granted' status info is added to the token. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-token_in>
 
 This flag can be used together with the B<-in> option and indicates
-that the input is a DER encoded time stamp token (ContentInfo) instead
-of a time stamp response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
+that the input is a DER encoded timestamp token (ContentInfo) instead
+of a timestamp response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
 
 =item B<-out> response.tsr
 
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ stdout. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-token_out>
 
-The output is a time stamp token (ContentInfo) instead of time stamp
+The output is a timestamp token (ContentInfo) instead of timestamp
 response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
 
 =item B<-text>
@@ -323,8 +323,8 @@ for all available algorithms. Default is builtin. (Optional)
 
 =head2 Time Stamp Response verification
 
-The B<-verify> command is for verifying if a time stamp response or time
-stamp token is valid and matches a particular time stamp request or
+The B<-verify> command is for verifying if a timestamp response or 
+timestamp token is valid and matches a particular timestamp request or
 data file. The B<-verify> command does not use the configuration file.
 
 =over 4
@@ -345,18 +345,18 @@ specified with this one. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-queryfile> request.tsq
 
-The original time stamp request in DER format. The B<-data> and B<-digest>
+The original timestamp request in DER format. The B<-data> and B<-digest>
 options must not be specified with this one. (Optional)
 
 =item B<-in> response.tsr
 
-The time stamp response that needs to be verified in DER format. (Mandatory)
+The timestamp response that needs to be verified in DER format. (Mandatory)
 
 =item B<-token_in>
 
 This flag can be used together with the B<-in> option and indicates
-that the input is a DER encoded time stamp token (ContentInfo) instead
-of a time stamp response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
+that the input is a DER encoded timestamp token (ContentInfo) instead
+of a timestamp response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
 
 =item B<-CApath> trusted_cert_path
 
@@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ See L<ca(1)> for description. (Optional)
 =item B<serial>
 
 The name of the file containing the hexadecimal serial number of the
-last time stamp response created. This number is incremented by 1 for
+last timestamp response created. This number is incremented by 1 for
 each response. If the file does not exist at the time of response
 generation a new file is created with serial number 1. (Mandatory)
 
@@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ the components is missing zero is assumed for that field. (Optional)
 =item B<clock_precision_digits>
 
 Specifies the maximum number of digits, which represent the fraction of
-seconds, that  need to be included in the time field. The trailing zeroes
+seconds, that  need to be included in the time field. The trailing zeros
 must be removed from the time, so there might actually be fewer digits,
 or no fraction of seconds at all. Supported only on UNIX platforms.
 The maximum value is 6, default is 0.
@@ -530,13 +530,13 @@ openssl/apps/openssl.cnf will do.
 
 =head2 Time Stamp Request
 
-To create a time stamp request for design1.txt with SHA-1
+To create a timestamp request for design1.txt with SHA-1
 without nonce and policy and no certificate is required in the response:
 
   openssl ts -query -data design1.txt -no_nonce \
         -out design1.tsq
 
-To create a similar time stamp request with specifying the message imprint
+To create a similar timestamp request with specifying the message imprint
 explicitly:
 
   openssl ts -query -digest b7e5d3f93198b38379852f2c04e78d73abdd0f4b \
@@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ To print the content of the previous request in human readable format:
 
   openssl ts -query -in design1.tsq -text
 
-To create a time stamp request which includes the MD-5 digest
+To create a timestamp request which includes the MD-5 digest
 of design2.txt, requests the signer certificate and nonce,
 specifies a policy id (assuming the tsa_policy1 name is defined in the
 OID section of the config file):
@@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ below assume that cacert.pem contains the certificate of the CA,
 tsacert.pem is the signing certificate issued by cacert.pem and
 tsakey.pem is the private key of the TSA.
 
-To create a time stamp response for a request:
+To create a timestamp response for a request:
 
   openssl ts -reply -queryfile design1.tsq -inkey tsakey.pem \
         -signer tsacert.pem -out design1.tsr
@@ -577,44 +577,44 @@ If you want to use the settings in the config file you could just write:
 
   openssl ts -reply -queryfile design1.tsq -out design1.tsr
 
-To print a time stamp reply to stdout in human readable format:
+To print a timestamp reply to stdout in human readable format:
 
   openssl ts -reply -in design1.tsr -text
 
-To create a time stamp token instead of time stamp response:
+To create a timestamp token instead of timestamp response:
 
   openssl ts -reply -queryfile design1.tsq -out design1_token.der -token_out
 
-To print a time stamp token to stdout in human readable format:
+To print a timestamp token to stdout in human readable format:
 
   openssl ts -reply -in design1_token.der -token_in -text -token_out
 
-To extract the time stamp token from a response:
+To extract the timestamp token from a response:
 
   openssl ts -reply -in design1.tsr -out design1_token.der -token_out
 
-To add 'granted' status info to a time stamp token thereby creating a
+To add 'granted' status info to a timestamp token thereby creating a
 valid response:
 
   openssl ts -reply -in design1_token.der -token_in -out design1.tsr
 
 =head2 Time Stamp Verification
 
-To verify a time stamp reply against a request:
+To verify a timestamp reply against a request:
 
   openssl ts -verify -queryfile design1.tsq -in design1.tsr \
         -CAfile cacert.pem -untrusted tsacert.pem
 
-To verify a time stamp reply that includes the certificate chain:
+To verify a timestamp reply that includes the certificate chain:
 
   openssl ts -verify -queryfile design2.tsq -in design2.tsr \
         -CAfile cacert.pem
 
-To verify a time stamp token against the original data file:
+To verify a timestamp token against the original data file:
   openssl ts -verify -data design2.txt -in design2.tsr \
         -CAfile cacert.pem
 
-To verify a time stamp token against a message imprint:
+To verify a timestamp token against a message imprint:
   openssl ts -verify -digest b7e5d3f93198b38379852f2c04e78d73abdd0f4b \
          -in design2.tsr -CAfile cacert.pem
 
@@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ You could also look at the 'test' directory for more examples.
 
 =item *
 
-No support for time stamps over SMTP, though it is quite easy
+No support for timestamps over SMTP, though it is quite easy
 to implement an automatic e-mail based TSA with L<procmail(1)>
 and L<perl(1)>. HTTP server support is provided in the form of
 a separate apache module. HTTP client support is provided by
@@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ L<tsget(1)>. Pure TCP/IP protocol is not supported.
 
 The file containing the last serial number of the TSA is not
 locked when being read or written. This is a problem if more than one
-instance of L<openssl(1)> is trying to create a time stamp
+instance of L<openssl(1)> is trying to create a timestamp
 response at the same time. This is not an issue when using the apache
 server module, it does proper locking.
 
@@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ L<config(5)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/tsget.pod b/doc/man1/tsget.pod
index 43bf2c7e35ac..8fe417f2a06f 100644
--- a/doc/man1/tsget.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/tsget.pod
@@ -24,15 +24,15 @@ B<-h> server_url
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The B<tsget> command can be used for sending a time stamp request, as
-specified in B<RFC 3161>, to a time stamp server over HTTP or HTTPS and storing
-the time stamp response in a file. This tool cannot be used for creating the
+The B<tsget> command can be used for sending a timestamp request, as
+specified in B<RFC 3161>, to a timestamp server over HTTP or HTTPS and storing
+the timestamp response in a file. This tool cannot be used for creating the
 requests and verifying responses, you can use the OpenSSL B<ts(1)> command to
 do that. B<tsget> can send several requests to the server without closing
 the TCP connection if more than one requests are specified on the command
 line.
 
-The tool sends the following HTTP request for each time stamp request:
+The tool sends the following HTTP request for each timestamp request:
 
         POST url HTTP/1.1
         User-Agent: OpenTSA tsget.pl/<version>
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ written to a file without any interpretation.
 
 =item B<-h> server_url
 
-The URL of the HTTP/HTTPS server listening for time stamp requests.
+The URL of the HTTP/HTTPS server listening for timestamp requests.
 
 =item B<-e> extension
 
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ the input files. Default extension is '.tsr'. (Optional)
 =item B<-o> output
 
 This option can be specified only when just one request is sent to the
-server. The time stamp response will be written to the given output file. '-'
-means standard output. In case of multiple time stamp requests or the absence
+server. The timestamp response will be written to the given output file. '-'
+means standard output. In case of multiple timestamp requests or the absence
 of this argument the names of the output files will be derived from the names
 of the input files and the default or specified extension argument. (Optional)
 
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ The name of an EGD socket to get random data from. (Optional)
 
 =item [request]...
 
-List of files containing B<RFC 3161> DER-encoded time stamp requests. If no
+List of files containing B<RFC 3161> DER-encoded timestamp requests. If no
 requests are specified only one request will be sent to the server and it will be
 read from the standard input. (Optional)
 
@@ -139,35 +139,35 @@ arguments.
 =head1 EXAMPLES
 
 The examples below presume that B<file1.tsq> and B<file2.tsq> contain valid
-time stamp requests, tsa.opentsa.org listens at port 8080 for HTTP requests
+timestamp requests, tsa.opentsa.org listens at port 8080 for HTTP requests
 and at port 8443 for HTTPS requests, the TSA service is available at the /tsa
 absolute path.
 
-Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq over HTTP, output is written to
+Get a timestamp response for file1.tsq over HTTP, output is written to
 file1.tsr:
 
   tsget -h http://tsa.opentsa.org:8080/tsa file1.tsq
 
-Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq and file2.tsq over HTTP showing
+Get a timestamp response for file1.tsq and file2.tsq over HTTP showing
 progress, output is written to file1.reply and file2.reply respectively:
 
   tsget -h http://tsa.opentsa.org:8080/tsa -v -e .reply \
         file1.tsq file2.tsq
 
-Create a time stamp request, write it to file3.tsq, send it to the server and
+Create a timestamp request, write it to file3.tsq, send it to the server and
 write the response to file3.tsr:
 
   openssl ts -query -data file3.txt -cert | tee file3.tsq \
         | tsget -h http://tsa.opentsa.org:8080/tsa \
         -o file3.tsr
 
-Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq over HTTPS without client
+Get a timestamp response for file1.tsq over HTTPS without client
 authentication:
 
   tsget -h https://tsa.opentsa.org:8443/tsa \
         -C cacerts.pem file1.tsq
 
-Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq over HTTPS with certificate-based
+Get a timestamp response for file1.tsq over HTTPS with certificate-based
 client authentication (it will ask for the passphrase if client_key.pem is
 protected):
 
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ B<RFC 3161>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/verify.pod b/doc/man1/verify.pod
index 63ba850b915d..71288be40d4c 100644
--- a/doc/man1/verify.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/verify.pod
@@ -98,8 +98,11 @@ current system time. B<timestamp> is the number of seconds since
 
 =item B<-check_ss_sig>
 
-Verify the signature on the self-signed root CA. This is disabled by default
-because it doesn't add any security.
+Verify the signature of
+the last certificate in a chain if the certificate is supposedly self-signed.
+This is prohibited and will result in an error if it is a non-conforming CA
+certificate with key usage restrictions not including the keyCertSign bit.
+This verification is disabled by default because it doesn't add any security.
 
 =item B<-CRLfile file>
 
@@ -333,7 +336,7 @@ in PEM format.
 =head1 VERIFY OPERATION
 
 The B<verify> program uses the same functions as the internal SSL and S/MIME
-verification, therefore this description applies to these verify operations
+verification, therefore, this description applies to these verify operations
 too.
 
 There is one crucial difference between the verify operations performed
@@ -769,7 +772,7 @@ is silently ignored.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man1/x509.pod b/doc/man1/x509.pod
index 65cec9dbda67..98d285e414b9 100644
--- a/doc/man1/x509.pod
+++ b/doc/man1/x509.pod
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Prints out the start and expiry dates of a certificate.
 =item B<-checkend arg>
 
 Checks if the certificate expires within the next B<arg> seconds and exits
-non-zero if yes it will expire or zero if not.
+nonzero if yes it will expire or zero if not.
 
 =item B<-fingerprint>
 
diff --git a/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod b/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod
index ac6a5799df9d..faf34eb18637 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ instead.
 
 In general an B<ASN1_INTEGER> or B<ASN1_ENUMERATED> type can contain an
 integer of almost arbitrary size and so cannot always be represented by a C
-B<int64_t> type. However in many cases (for example version numbers) they
+B<int64_t> type. However, in many cases (for example version numbers) they
 represent small integers which can be more easily manipulated if converted to
 an appropriate C integer type.
 
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod b/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod
index 85d356540bc3..ab109c2ede78 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ In general it cannot be assumed that the data returned by ASN1_STRING_data()
 is null terminated or does not contain embedded nulls. The actual format
 of the data will depend on the actual string type itself: for example
 for an IA5String the data will be ASCII, for a BMPString two bytes per
-character in big endian format, and for an UTF8String it will be in UTF8 format.
+character in big endian format, and for a UTF8String it will be in UTF8 format.
 
 Similar care should be take to ensure the data is in the correct format
 when calling ASN1_STRING_set().
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ L<ERR_get_error(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2002-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2002-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod b/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod
index 5ed817517dc6..584ae232acf6 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ one or both (depending on the time difference) of B<*pday> and B<*psec>
 will be positive. If B<to> represents a time earlier than B<from> then
 one or both of B<*pday> and B<*psec> will be negative. If B<to> and B<from>
 represent the same time then B<*pday> and B<*psec> will both be zero.
-If both B<*pday> and B<*psec> are non-zero they will always have the same
+If both B<*pday> and B<*psec> are nonzero they will always have the same
 sign. The value of B<*psec> will always be less than the number of seconds
 in a day. If B<from> or B<to> is NULL the current time is used.
 
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ format.
 =head1 BUGS
 
 ASN1_TIME_print(), ASN1_UTCTIME_print() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_print()
-do not print out the time zone: it either prints out "GMT" or nothing. But all
+do not print out the timezone: it either prints out "GMT" or nothing. But all
 certificates complying with RFC5280 et al use GMT anyway.
 
 Use the ASN1_TIME_normalize() function to normalize the time value before
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ The ASN1_TIME_compare() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod b/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod
index fb797220a47f..f14850b39f59 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ up after the call.
 ASN1_TYPE_set1() sets the value of B<a> to B<type> a copy of B<value>.
 
 ASN1_TYPE_cmp() compares ASN.1 types B<a> and B<b> and returns 0 if
-they are identical and non-zero otherwise.
+they are identical and nonzero otherwise.
 
 ASN1_TYPE_unpack_sequence() attempts to parse the SEQUENCE present in
 B<t> using the ASN.1 structure B<it>. If successful it returns a pointer
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ length octets).
 
 ASN1_TYPE_cmp() may not return zero if two types are equivalent but have
 different encodings. For example the single content octet of the boolean TRUE
-value under BER can have any non-zero encoding but ASN1_TYPE_cmp() will
+value under BER can have any nonzero encoding but ASN1_TYPE_cmp() will
 only return zero if the values are the same.
 
 If either or both of the parameters passed to ASN1_TYPE_cmp() is NULL the
-return value is non-zero. Technically if both parameters are NULL the two
-types could be absent OPTIONAL fields and so should match, however passing
+return value is nonzero. Technically if both parameters are NULL the two
+types could be absent OPTIONAL fields and so should match, however, passing
 NULL values could also indicate a programming error (for example an
 unparsable type which returns NULL) for types which do B<not> match. So
 applications should handle the case of two absent values separately.
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ ASN1_TYPE_set() does not return a value.
 
 ASN1_TYPE_set1() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
 
-ASN1_TYPE_cmp() returns 0 if the types are identical and non-zero otherwise.
+ASN1_TYPE_cmp() returns 0 if the types are identical and nonzero otherwise.
 
 ASN1_TYPE_unpack_sequence() returns a pointer to an ASN.1 structure or
 NULL on failure.
diff --git a/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod b/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod
index e4d809c08fd1..0e8c1d8010a2 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ job in B<*fd>. The number of file descriptors returned will be stored in
 B<*numfds>. It is the caller's responsibility to ensure that sufficient memory
 has been allocated in B<*fd> to receive all the file descriptors. Calling
 ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds() with a NULL B<fd> value will return no file
-descriptors but will still populate B<*numfds>. Therefore application code is
+descriptors but will still populate B<*numfds>. Therefore, application code is
 typically expected to call this function twice: once to get the number of fds,
 and then again when sufficient memory has been allocated. If only one
 asynchronous engine is being used then normally this call will only ever return
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ success or 0 on error.
 On Windows platforms the openssl/async.h header is dependent on some
 of the types customarily made available by including windows.h. The
 application developer is likely to require control over when the latter
-is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore
+is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore,
 it is defined as an application developer's responsibility to include
 windows.h prior to async.h.
 
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod b/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod
index b06db76708a2..810b9678731f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ otherwise.
 On Windows platforms the openssl/async.h header is dependent on some
 of the types customarily made available by including windows.h. The
 application developer is likely to require control over when the latter
-is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore
+is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore,
 it is defined as an application developer's responsibility to include
 windows.h prior to async.h.
 
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod b/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod
index b20f634da6f5..02e04b7f34cb 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ recipient needs to know what it was initialized with, or it won't be able
 to decrypt.  Some programs and protocols simplify this, like SSH, where
 B<ivec> is simply initialized to zero.
 BF_cbc_encrypt() operates on data that is a multiple of 8 bytes long, while
-BF_cfb64_encrypt() and BF_ofb64_encrypt() are used to encrypt an variable
+BF_cfb64_encrypt() and BF_ofb64_encrypt() are used to encrypt a variable
 number of bytes (the amount does not have to be an exact multiple of 8).  The
 purpose of the latter two is to simulate stream ciphers, and therefore, they
 need the parameter B<num>, which is a pointer to an integer where the current
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ L<des_modes(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod
index 4b169e8a89c4..e9652ed550e2 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BIO_ADDR_free() frees a B<BIO_ADDR> created with BIO_ADDR_new().
 BIO_ADDR_clear() clears any data held within the provided B<BIO_ADDR> and sets
 it back to an uninitialised state.
 
-BIO_ADDR_rawmake() takes a protocol B<family>, an byte array of
+BIO_ADDR_rawmake() takes a protocol B<family>, a byte array of
 size B<wherelen> with an address in network byte order pointed at
 by B<where> and a port number in network byte order in B<port> (except
 for the B<AF_UNIX> protocol family, where B<port> is meaningless and
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ L<BIO_connect(3)>, L<BIO_s_connect(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod
index 8ca6454abbcb..37609666fdbf 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ information they should return isn't available.
 
 The BIO_lookup_ex() implementation uses the platform provided getaddrinfo()
 function. On Linux it is known that specifying 0 for the protocol will not
-return any SCTP based addresses when calling getaddrinfo(). Therefore if an SCTP
+return any SCTP based addresses when calling getaddrinfo(). Therefore, if an SCTP
 address is required then the B<protocol> parameter to BIO_lookup_ex() should be
 explicitly set to IPPROTO_SCTP. The same may be true on other platforms.
 
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ The BIO_lookup_ex() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod
index 853315aa46a4..0ebf17cacf47 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Enables regular sending of keep-alive messages.
 
 =item BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK
 
-Sets the socket to non-blocking mode.
+Sets the socket to nonblocking mode.
 
 =item BIO_SOCK_NODELAY
 
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Use the functions described above instead.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod
index 60cd10883b54..2e438c3ce952 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Filter BIOs if they do not internally handle a particular BIO_ctrl()
 operation usually pass the operation to the next BIO in the chain.
 This often means there is no need to locate the required BIO for
 a particular operation, it can be called on a chain and it will
-be automatically passed to the relevant BIO. However this can cause
+be automatically passed to the relevant BIO. However, this can cause
 unexpected results: for example no current filter BIOs implement
 BIO_seek(), but this may still succeed if the chain ends in a FILE
 or file descriptor BIO.
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ the case of BIO_seek() on a file BIO for a successful operation.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod
index c3137c4c5588..da1651c7576f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ the BIO. This data can subsequently be retrieved via a call to BIO_get_data().
 This can be used by custom BIOs for storing implementation specific information.
 
 The BIO_set_init() function sets the value of the BIO's "init" flag to indicate
-whether initialisation has been completed for this BIO or not. A non-zero value
+whether initialisation has been completed for this BIO or not. A nonzero value
 indicates that initialisation is complete, whilst zero indicates that it is not.
 Often initialisation will complete during initial construction of the BIO. For
 some BIOs however, initialisation may not complete until after additional steps
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod
index 73cb6100d74e..35c14d1bc1c9 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod
@@ -19,10 +19,10 @@ BIO_parse_hostserv
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
 BIO_parse_hostserv() will parse the information given in B<hostserv>,
-create strings with the host name and service name and give those
+create strings with the hostname and service name and give those
 back via B<host> and B<service>.  Those will need to be freed after
 they are used.  B<hostserv_prio> helps determine if B<hostserv> shall
-be interpreted primarily as a host name or a service name in ambiguous
+be interpreted primarily as a hostname or a service name in ambiguous
 cases.
 
 The syntax the BIO_parse_hostserv() recognises is:
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ L<BIO_ADDRINFO(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod
index 270ab533e543..d0ebf32caace 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ NUL is not included in the length returned by BIO_gets().
 =head1 NOTES
 
 A 0 or -1 return is not necessarily an indication of an error. In
-particular when the source/sink is non-blocking or of a certain type
+particular when the source/sink is nonblocking or of a certain type
 it may merely be an indication that no data is currently available and that
 the application should retry the operation later.
 
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ keep the '\n' at the end of the line in the buffer.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod
index 37b6f4d83912..312c881bbc49 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ however because the accept BIO will still accept additional incoming
 connections. This can be resolved by using BIO_pop() (see above)
 and freeing up the accept BIO after the initial connection.
 
-If the underlying accept socket is non-blocking and BIO_do_accept() is
+If the underlying accept socket is nonblocking and BIO_do_accept() is
 called to await an incoming connection it is possible for
 BIO_should_io_special() with the reason BIO_RR_ACCEPT. If this happens
 then it is an indication that an accept attempt would block: the application
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ down each and finally closes both down.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod
index f78fe13489c6..4837d19440bb 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ without having to go through the SSL-interface.
  ...
  BIO_new_bio_pair(&internal_bio, 0, &network_bio, 0);
  SSL_set_bio(ssl, internal_bio, internal_bio);
- SSL_operations(); /* e.g SSL_read and SSL_write */
+ SSL_operations(); /* e.g. SSL_read and SSL_write */
  ...
 
  application |   TLS-engine
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ without having to go through the SSL-interface.
   ...
 
 As the BIO pair will only buffer the data and never directly access the
-connection, it behaves non-blocking and will return as soon as the write
+connection, it behaves nonblocking and will return as soon as the write
 buffer is full or the read buffer is drained. Then the application has to
 flush the write buffer and/or fill the read buffer.
 
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ L<BIO_should_retry(3)>, L<BIO_read_ex(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod
index 4f145297c587..1223fad831cb 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ If blocking I/O is set then a non positive return value from any
 I/O call is caused by an error condition, although a zero return
 will normally mean that the connection was closed.
 
-If the port name is supplied as part of the host name then this will
+If the port name is supplied as part of the hostname then this will
 override any value set with BIO_set_conn_port(). This may be undesirable
 if the application does not wish to allow connection to arbitrary
 ports. This can be avoided by checking for the presence of the ':'
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Use BIO_set_conn_address() and BIO_get_conn_address() instead.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod
index 2ed0bb3c0f35..f1a75f7c627a 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ in stdio behaviour will be mirrored by the corresponding BIO.
 
 On Windows BIO_new_files reserves for the filename argument to be
 UTF-8 encoded. In other words if you have to make it work in multi-
-lingual environment, encode file names in UTF-8.
+lingual environment, encode filenames in UTF-8.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ L<BIO_set_close(3)>, L<BIO_get_close(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod b/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod
index 291456baa42a..f7ee104c2855 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ BIO_callback_fn_ex, BIO_callback_fn
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
 BIO_set_callback_ex() and BIO_get_callback_ex() set and retrieve the BIO
-callback. The callback is called during most high level BIO operations. It can
+callback. The callback is called during most high-level BIO operations. It can
 be used for debugging purposes to trace operations on a BIO or to modify its
 operation.
 
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ in crypto/bio/bio_cb.c
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BN_add.pod b/doc/man3/BN_add.pod
index 0f0e49556d72..dccd4790ede7 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BN_add.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BN_add.pod
@@ -68,16 +68,16 @@ For division by powers of 2, use BN_rshift(3).
 
 BN_mod() corresponds to BN_div() with I<dv> set to B<NULL>.
 
-BN_nnmod() reduces I<a> modulo I<m> and places the non-negative
+BN_nnmod() reduces I<a> modulo I<m> and places the nonnegative
 remainder in I<r>.
 
-BN_mod_add() adds I<a> to I<b> modulo I<m> and places the non-negative
+BN_mod_add() adds I<a> to I<b> modulo I<m> and places the nonnegative
 result in I<r>.
 
 BN_mod_sub() subtracts I<b> from I<a> modulo I<m> and places the
-non-negative result in I<r>.
+nonnegative result in I<r>.
 
-BN_mod_mul() multiplies I<a> by I<b> and finds the non-negative
+BN_mod_mul() multiplies I<a> by I<b> and finds the nonnegative
 remainder respective to modulus I<m> (C<r=(a*b) mod m>). I<r> may be
 the same B<BIGNUM> as I<a> or I<b>. For more efficient algorithms for
 repeated computations using the same modulus, see
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ L<BN_add_word(3)>, L<BN_set_bit(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod b/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod
index b3cbc8cb665c..67595e05b85a 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ memory.
 
 BN_bn2binpad() also converts the absolute value of B<a> into big-endian form
 and stores it at B<to>. B<tolen> indicates the length of the output buffer
-B<to>. The result is padded with zeroes if necessary. If B<tolen> is less than
+B<to>. The result is padded with zeros if necessary. If B<tolen> is less than
 BN_num_bytes(B<a>) an error is returned.
 
 BN_bin2bn() converts the positive integer in big-endian form of length
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ L<BN_num_bytes(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod b/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod
index f1e63f3b3c4a..25674d0348f7 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ For instance, to reach the 128 bit security level, B<nchecks> should be set to
 
 If B<cb> is not B<NULL>, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, j)> is called
 after the j-th iteration (j = 0, 1, ...). B<ctx> is a
-pre-allocated B<BN_CTX> (to save the overhead of allocating and
+preallocated B<BN_CTX> (to save the overhead of allocating and
 freeing the structure in a loop), or B<NULL>.
 
 BN_GENCB_call() calls the callback function held in the B<BN_GENCB> structure
diff --git a/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod b/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod
index 7f47e94c2b72..911945fd9dba 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ the result in I<r>.
 BN_from_montgomery() performs the Montgomery reduction I<r> = I<a>*R^-1.
 
 BN_to_montgomery() computes Mont(I<a>,R^2), i.e. I<a>*R.
-Note that I<a> must be non-negative and smaller than the modulus.
+Note that I<a> must be nonnegative and smaller than the modulus.
 
 For all functions, I<ctx> is a previously allocated B<BN_CTX> used for
 temporary variables.
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ BN_MONT_CTX_init() was removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod b/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod
index af02983c8fb1..67c2bac24102 100644
--- a/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod
@@ -37,11 +37,11 @@ BN_mask_bits() truncates B<a> to an B<n> bit number
 shorter than B<n> bits.
 
 BN_lshift() shifts B<a> left by B<n> bits and places the result in
-B<r> (C<r=a*2^n>). Note that B<n> must be non-negative. BN_lshift1() shifts
+B<r> (C<r=a*2^n>). Note that B<n> must be nonnegative. BN_lshift1() shifts
 B<a> left by one and places the result in B<r> (C<r=2*a>).
 
 BN_rshift() shifts B<a> right by B<n> bits and places the result in
-B<r> (C<r=a/2^n>). Note that B<n> must be non-negative. BN_rshift1() shifts
+B<r> (C<r=a/2^n>). Note that B<n> must be nonnegative. BN_rshift1() shifts
 B<a> right by one and places the result in B<r> (C<r=a/2>).
 
 For the shift functions, B<r> and B<a> may be the same variable.
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ L<BN_num_bytes(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod b/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod
index be688681cbc6..c7dbb6b6c275 100644
--- a/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ present in B<cms>. The content is written to B<out> if it is not NULL.
 B<flags> is an optional set of flags, which can be used to modify the verify
 operation.
 
-CMS_get0_signers() retrieves the signing certificate(s) from B<cms>, it must
+CMS_get0_signers() retrieves the signing certificate(s) from B<cms>, it may only
 be called after a successful CMS_verify() operation.
 
 =head1 VERIFY PROCESS
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ useful if one merely wishes to write the content to B<out> and its validity
 is not considered important.
 
 Chain verification should arguably be performed using the signing time rather
-than the current time. However since the signing time is supplied by the
+than the current time. However, since the signing time is supplied by the
 signer it cannot be trusted without additional evidence (such as a trusted
 timestamp).
 
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_sign(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2008-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2008-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod b/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod
index b919e2e47816..946147e5d24e 100644
--- a/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ On Windows platforms the CRYPTO_THREAD_* types and functions in the
 openssl/crypto.h header are dependent on some of the types customarily
 made available by including windows.h. The application developer is
 likely to require control over when the latter is included, commonly as
-one of the first included headers. Therefore it is defined as an
+one of the first included headers. Therefore, it is defined as an
 application developer's responsibility to include windows.h prior to
 crypto.h where use of CRYPTO_THREAD_* types and functions is required.
 
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ L<crypto(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/CRYPTO_memcmp.pod b/doc/man3/CRYPTO_memcmp.pod
index 9182d00796c9..20578c557b9e 100644
--- a/doc/man3/CRYPTO_memcmp.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/CRYPTO_memcmp.pod
@@ -19,17 +19,17 @@ contents of the memory regions pointed to by B<a> and B<b>.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
-CRYPTO_memcmp() returns 0 if the memory regions are equal and non-zero
+CRYPTO_memcmp() returns 0 if the memory regions are equal and nonzero
 otherwise.
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
 Unlike memcmp(2), this function cannot be used to order the two memory regions
-as the return value when they differ is undefined, other than being non-zero.
+as the return value when they differ is undefined, other than being nonzero.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2019-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the Apache License 2.0 (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod b/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod
index 04df6ec0dfde..a52099053ec8 100644
--- a/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ is returned.  If the key is a weak key, then -2 is returned.  If an
 error is returned, the key schedule is not generated.
 
 DES_set_key() works like
-DES_set_key_checked() if the I<DES_check_key> flag is non-zero,
+DES_set_key_checked() if the I<DES_check_key> flag is nonzero,
 otherwise like DES_set_key_unchecked().  These functions are available
 for compatibility; it is recommended to use a function that does not
 depend on a global variable.
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ DES_ecb_encrypt() is the basic DES encryption routine that encrypts or
 decrypts a single 8-byte I<DES_cblock> in I<electronic code book>
 (ECB) mode.  It always transforms the input data, pointed to by
 I<input>, into the output data, pointed to by the I<output> argument.
-If the I<encrypt> argument is non-zero (DES_ENCRYPT), the I<input>
+If the I<encrypt> argument is nonzero (DES_ENCRYPT), the I<input>
 (cleartext) is encrypted in to the I<output> (ciphertext) using the
 key_schedule specified by the I<schedule> argument, previously set via
 I<DES_set_key>. If I<encrypt> is zero (DES_DECRYPT), the I<input> (now
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ The macro DES_ecb2_encrypt() is provided to perform two-key Triple-DES
 encryption by using I<ks1> for the final encryption.
 
 DES_ncbc_encrypt() encrypts/decrypts using the I<cipher-block-chaining>
-(CBC) mode of DES.  If the I<encrypt> argument is non-zero, the
+(CBC) mode of DES.  If the I<encrypt> argument is nonzero, the
 routine cipher-block-chain encrypts the cleartext data pointed to by
 the I<input> argument into the ciphertext pointed to by the I<output>
 argument, using the key schedule provided by the I<schedule> argument,
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ on some platforms.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod b/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod
index e878fa005149..6b5e843e4832 100644
--- a/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ DH_get0_engine() returns a handle to the ENGINE that has been set for this DH
 object, or NULL if no such ENGINE has been set.
 
 The DH_get_length() and DH_set_length() functions get and set the optional
-length parameter associated with this DH object. If the length is non-zero then
+length parameter associated with this DH object. If the length is nonzero then
 it is used, otherwise it is ignored. The B<length> parameter indicates the
 length of the secret exponent (private key) in bits.
 
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod b/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod
index ea45961f1500..b36011d627f3 100644
--- a/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ DH_set_method() selects B<meth> to perform all operations using the key B<dh>.
 This will replace the DH_METHOD used by the DH key and if the previous method
 was supplied by an ENGINE, the handle to that ENGINE will be released during the
 change. It is possible to have DH keys that only work with certain DH_METHOD
-implementations (eg. from an ENGINE module that supports embedded
+implementations (e.g. from an ENGINE module that supports embedded
 hardware-protected keys), and in such cases attempting to change the DH_METHOD
 for the key can have unexpected results.
 
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ B<DH_METHOD>s.
 
 DH_set_default_method() returns no value.
 
-DH_set_method() returns non-zero if the provided B<meth> was successfully set as
+DH_set_method() returns nonzero if the provided B<meth> was successfully set as
 the method for B<dh> (including unloading the ENGINE handle if the previous
 method was supplied by an ENGINE).
 
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_meth_new(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod b/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod
index f10307e66d66..f6eb260c316c 100644
--- a/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ DSA_set_method() selects B<meth> to perform all operations using the key
 B<rsa>. This will replace the DSA_METHOD used by the DSA key and if the
 previous method was supplied by an ENGINE, the handle to that ENGINE will
 be released during the change. It is possible to have DSA keys that only
-work with certain DSA_METHOD implementations (eg. from an ENGINE module
+work with certain DSA_METHOD implementations (e.g. from an ENGINE module
 that supports embedded hardware-protected keys), and in such cases
 attempting to change the DSA_METHOD for the key can have unexpected
 results. See L<DSA_meth_new> for information on constructing custom DSA_METHOD
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ B<DSA_METHOD>s.
 
 DSA_set_default_method() returns no value.
 
-DSA_set_method() returns non-zero if the provided B<meth> was successfully set as
+DSA_set_method() returns nonzero if the provided B<meth> was successfully set as
 the method for B<dsa> (including unloading the ENGINE handle if the previous
 method was supplied by an ENGINE).
 
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_meth_new(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod b/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod
index 98511a475f9f..272a8c2ee099 100644
--- a/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ message then the amplification attack has succeeded.
 If DTLS is used over UDP (or any datagram based protocol that does not validate
 the source IP) then it is susceptible to this type of attack. TLSv1.3 is
 designed to operate over a stream-based transport protocol (such as TCP).
-If TCP is being used then there is no need to use SSL_stateless(). However some
+If TCP is being used then there is no need to use SSL_stateless(). However, some
 stream-based transport protocols (e.g. QUIC) may not validate the source
 address. In this case a TLSv1.3 application would be susceptible to this attack.
 
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ will be set up ready to continue the handshake.  the B<peer> value will also be
 filled in.
 
 A return value of 0 indicates a non-fatal error. This could (for
-example) be because of non-blocking IO, or some invalid message having been
+example) be because of nonblocking IO, or some invalid message having been
 received from a peer. Errors may be placed on the OpenSSL error queue with
 further information if appropriate. Typically user code is expected to retry the
 call to DTLSv1_listen() in the event of a non-fatal error.
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ The type of "peer" also changed in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod b/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod
index 6a7d107079d5..010c163c414a 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 ECDSA_SIG_get0, ECDSA_SIG_get0_r, ECDSA_SIG_get0_s, ECDSA_SIG_set0,
 ECDSA_SIG_new, ECDSA_SIG_free, ECDSA_size, ECDSA_sign, ECDSA_do_sign,
 ECDSA_verify, ECDSA_do_verify, ECDSA_sign_setup, ECDSA_sign_ex,
-ECDSA_do_sign_ex - low level elliptic curve digital signature algorithm (ECDSA)
+ECDSA_do_sign_ex - low-level elliptic curve digital signature algorithm (ECDSA)
 functions
 
 =head1 SYNOPSIS
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ functions
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-Note: these functions provide a low level interface to ECDSA. Most
+Note: these functions provide a low-level interface to ECDSA. Most
 applications should use the higher level B<EVP> interface such as
 L<EVP_DigestSignInit(3)> or L<EVP_DigestVerifyInit(3)> instead.
 
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ L<d2i_ECDSA_SIG(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2004-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2004-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod b/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod
index c80b191785c4..b1141a077739 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ specific PK B<params>.
 EC_GROUP_set_curve() sets the curve parameters B<p>, B<a> and B<b>. For a curve
 over Fp B<p> is the prime for the field. For a curve over F2^m B<p> represents
 the irreducible polynomial - each bit represents a term in the polynomial.
-Therefore there will either be three or five bits set dependent on whether the
+Therefore, there will either be three or five bits set dependent on whether the
 polynomial is a trinomial or a pentanomial.
 In either case, B<a> and B<b> represents the coefficients a and b from the
 relevant equation introduced above.
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ L<EC_GFp_simple_method(3)>, L<d2i_ECPKParameters(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2013-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2013-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EC_KEY_new.pod b/doc/man3/EC_KEY_new.pod
index 9d32d78a399e..6507dc95cdff 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EC_KEY_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EC_KEY_new.pod
@@ -9,7 +9,8 @@ EC_KEY_get0_engine,
 EC_KEY_get0_group, EC_KEY_set_group, EC_KEY_get0_private_key,
 EC_KEY_set_private_key, EC_KEY_get0_public_key, EC_KEY_set_public_key,
 EC_KEY_get_conv_form,
-EC_KEY_set_conv_form, EC_KEY_set_asn1_flag, EC_KEY_precompute_mult,
+EC_KEY_set_conv_form, EC_KEY_set_asn1_flag,
+EC_KEY_decoded_from_explicit_params, EC_KEY_precompute_mult,
 EC_KEY_generate_key, EC_KEY_check_key, EC_KEY_set_public_key_affine_coordinates,
 EC_KEY_oct2key, EC_KEY_key2buf, EC_KEY_oct2priv, EC_KEY_priv2oct,
 EC_KEY_priv2buf - Functions for creating, destroying and manipulating
@@ -38,6 +39,7 @@ EC_KEY objects
  point_conversion_form_t EC_KEY_get_conv_form(const EC_KEY *key);
  void EC_KEY_set_conv_form(EC_KEY *eckey, point_conversion_form_t cform);
  void EC_KEY_set_asn1_flag(EC_KEY *eckey, int asn1_flag);
+ int EC_KEY_decoded_from_explicit_params(const EC_KEY *key);
  int EC_KEY_precompute_mult(EC_KEY *key, BN_CTX *ctx);
  int EC_KEY_generate_key(EC_KEY *key);
  int EC_KEY_check_key(const EC_KEY *key);
@@ -118,11 +120,15 @@ EC_KEY_set_asn1_flag() sets the asn1_flag on the underlying EC_GROUP object
 (if set). Refer to L<EC_GROUP_copy(3)> for further information on the
 asn1_flag.
 
+EC_KEY_decoded_from_explicit_params() returns 1 if the group of the I<key> was
+decoded from data with explicitly encoded group parameters, -1 if the I<key>
+is NULL or the group parameters are missing, and 0 otherwise.
+
 EC_KEY_precompute_mult() stores multiples of the underlying EC_GROUP generator
 for faster point multiplication. See also L<EC_POINT_add(3)>.
 
 EC_KEY_oct2key() and EC_KEY_key2buf() are identical to the functions
-EC_POINT_oct2point() and EC_KEY_point2buf() except they use the public key
+EC_POINT_oct2point() and EC_POINT_point2buf() except they use the public key
 EC_POINT in B<eckey>.
 
 EC_KEY_oct2priv() and EC_KEY_priv2oct() convert between the private key
@@ -178,7 +184,7 @@ L<d2i_ECPKParameters(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2013-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2013-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EC_POINT_new.pod b/doc/man3/EC_POINT_new.pod
index 8cadaa75f145..5d2c3f2e9b22 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EC_POINT_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EC_POINT_new.pod
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ EC_POINT_get_Jprojective_coordinates_GFp() respectively.
 
 Points can also be described in terms of their compressed co-ordinates. For a
 point (x, y), for any given value for x such that the point is on the curve
-there will only ever be two possible values for y. Therefore a point can be set
+there will only ever be two possible values for y. Therefore, a point can be set
 using the EC_POINT_set_compressed_coordinates() function where B<x> is the x
 co-ordinate and B<y_bit> is a value 0 or 1 to identify which of the two
 possible values for y should be used.
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ L<EC_GFp_simple_method(3)>, L<d2i_ECPKParameters(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2013-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2013-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ENGINE_add.pod b/doc/man3/ENGINE_add.pod
index a2fc299482fc..369900c248c5 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ENGINE_add.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ENGINE_add.pod
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ implementation includes the following abstractions;
 =head2 Reference counting and handles
 
 Due to the modular nature of the ENGINE API, pointers to ENGINEs need to be
-treated as handles - ie. not only as pointers, but also as references to
+treated as handles - i.e. not only as pointers, but also as references to
 the underlying ENGINE object. Ie. one should obtain a new reference when
 making copies of an ENGINE pointer if the copies will be used (and
 released) independently.
@@ -252,15 +252,15 @@ operational ENGINE for a given cryptographic purpose.
 
 To obtain a functional reference from an existing structural reference,
 call the ENGINE_init() function. This returns zero if the ENGINE was not
-already operational and couldn't be successfully initialised (eg. lack of
+already operational and couldn't be successfully initialised (e.g. lack of
 system drivers, no special hardware attached, etc), otherwise it will
-return non-zero to indicate that the ENGINE is now operational and will
+return nonzero to indicate that the ENGINE is now operational and will
 have allocated a new B<functional> reference to the ENGINE. All functional
 references are released by calling ENGINE_finish() (which removes the
 implicit structural reference as well).
 
 The second way to get a functional reference is by asking OpenSSL for a
-default implementation for a given task, eg. by ENGINE_get_default_RSA(),
+default implementation for a given task, e.g. by ENGINE_get_default_RSA(),
 ENGINE_get_default_cipher_engine(), etc. These are discussed in the next
 section, though they are not usually required by application programmers as
 they are used automatically when creating and using the relevant
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ In the case of other abstractions like RSA, DSA, etc, there is only one
 "algorithm" so all implementations implicitly register using the same 'nid'
 index.
 
-When a default ENGINE is requested for a given abstraction/algorithm/mode, (eg.
+When a default ENGINE is requested for a given abstraction/algorithm/mode, (e.g.
 when calling RSA_new_method(NULL)), a "get_default" call will be made to the
 ENGINE subsystem to process the corresponding state table and return a
 functional reference to an initialised ENGINE whose implementation should be
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ is something for the application to control. Some applications
 will want to allow the user to specify exactly which ENGINE they want used
 if any is to be used at all. Others may prefer to load all support and have
 OpenSSL automatically use at run-time any ENGINE that is able to
-successfully initialise - ie. to assume that this corresponds to
+successfully initialise - i.e. to assume that this corresponds to
 acceleration hardware attached to the machine or some such thing. There are
 probably numerous other ways in which applications may prefer to handle
 things, so we will simply illustrate the consequences as they apply to a
@@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ so that it can be initialised for use. This could include the path to any
 driver or config files it needs to load, required network addresses,
 smart-card identifiers, passwords to initialise protected devices,
 logging information, etc etc. This class of commands typically needs to be
-passed to an ENGINE B<before> attempting to initialise it, ie. before
+passed to an ENGINE B<before> attempting to initialise it, i.e. before
 calling ENGINE_init(). The other class of commands consist of settings or
 operations that tweak certain behaviour or cause certain operations to take
 place, and these commands may work either before or after ENGINE_init(), or
@@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ boolean success or failure.
  }
 
 Note that ENGINE_ctrl_cmd_string() accepts a boolean argument that can
-relax the semantics of the function - if set non-zero it will only return
+relax the semantics of the function - if set nonzero it will only return
 failure if the ENGINE supported the given command name but failed while
 executing it, if the ENGINE doesn't support the command name it will simply
 return success without doing anything. In this case we assume the user is
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ It is possible to discover at run-time the names, numerical-ids, descriptions
 and input parameters of the control commands supported by an ENGINE using a
 structural reference. Note that some control commands are defined by OpenSSL
 itself and it will intercept and handle these control commands on behalf of the
-ENGINE, ie. the ENGINE's ctrl() handler is not used for the control command.
+ENGINE, i.e. the ENGINE's ctrl() handler is not used for the control command.
 openssl/engine.h defines an index, ENGINE_CMD_BASE, that all control commands
 implemented by ENGINEs should be numbered from. Any command value lower than
 this symbol is considered a "generic" command is handled directly by the
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ by applications, administrations, users, etc. These can support arbitrary
 operations via ENGINE_ctrl(), including passing to and/or from the control
 commands data of any arbitrary type. These commands are supported in the
 discovery mechanisms simply to allow applications to determine if an ENGINE
-supports certain specific commands it might want to use (eg. application "foo"
+supports certain specific commands it might want to use (e.g. application "foo"
 might query various ENGINEs to see if they implement "FOO_GET_VENDOR_LOGO_GIF" -
 and ENGINE could therefore decide whether or not to support this "foo"-specific
 extension).
@@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ and should not be used.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2002-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2002-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ERR_get_error.pod b/doc/man3/ERR_get_error.pod
index a76df03882d8..fc155ad08199 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ERR_get_error.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ERR_get_error.pod
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ messages.
 
 ERR_get_error_line(), ERR_peek_error_line() and
 ERR_peek_last_error_line() are the same as the above, but they
-additionally store the file name and line number where
+additionally store the filename and line number where
 the error occurred in *B<file> and *B<line>, unless these are B<NULL>.
 
 ERR_get_error_line_data(), ERR_peek_error_line_data() and
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ L<ERR_GET_LIB(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ERR_print_errors.pod b/doc/man3/ERR_print_errors.pod
index f7e612f61886..78a4b6a8d910 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ERR_print_errors.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ERR_print_errors.pod
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ B<u> as the callback parameters.
 
 The error strings will have the following format:
 
- [pid]:error:[error code]:[library name]:[function name]:[reason string]:[file name]:[line]:[optional text message]
+ [pid]:error:[error code]:[library name]:[function name]:[reason string]:[filename]:[line]:[optional text message]
 
 I<error code> is an 8 digit hexadecimal number. I<library name>,
 I<function name> and I<reason string> are ASCII text, as is I<optional
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ L<ERR_get_error(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/ERR_put_error.pod b/doc/man3/ERR_put_error.pod
index 4fba618db4f2..ee6a61ffe2c2 100644
--- a/doc/man3/ERR_put_error.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/ERR_put_error.pod
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ descriptions. For example, the function ssl3_read_bytes() reports a
 
  SSLerr(SSL_F_SSL3_READ_BYTES, SSL_R_SSL_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE);
 
-Function and reason codes should consist of upper case characters,
+Function and reason codes should consist of uppercase characters,
 numbers and underscores only. The error file generation script translates
 function codes into function names by looking in the header files
 for an appropriate function name, if none is found it just uses
 the capitalized form such as "SSL3_READ_BYTES" in the above example.
 
 The trailing section of a reason code (after the "_R_") is translated
-into lower case and underscores changed to spaces.
+into lowercase and underscores changed to spaces.
 
 Although a library will normally report errors using its own specific
 XXXerr macro, another library's macro can be used. This is normally
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ L<ERR_load_strings(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_DigestInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_DigestInit.pod
index 434e22030fdd..a0ed943a3f60 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_DigestInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_DigestInit.pod
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ EVP_MD_CTX_pkey_ctx, EVP_MD_CTX_set_pkey_ctx - EVP digest routines
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP digest routines are a high level interface to message digests,
+The EVP digest routines are a high-level interface to message digests,
 and should be used instead of the cipher-specific functions.
 
 =over 4
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ This function has no return value.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The B<EVP> interface to message digests should almost always be used in
-preference to the low level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
+preference to the low-level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
 transparent to the digest used and much more flexible.
 
 New applications should use the SHA-2 (such as L<EVP_sha256(3)>) or the SHA-3
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ The EVP_MD_CTX_set_pkey_ctx() function was added in 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_DigestSignInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_DigestSignInit.pod
index 912880a5e1c5..4efc8a497491 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_DigestSignInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_DigestSignInit.pod
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ EVP_DigestSign - EVP signing functions
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP signature routines are a high level interface to digital signatures.
+The EVP signature routines are a high-level interface to digital signatures.
 
 EVP_DigestSignInit() sets up signing context B<ctx> to use digest B<type> from
 ENGINE B<e> and private key B<pkey>. B<ctx> must be created with
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ The error codes can be obtained from L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The B<EVP> interface to digital signatures should almost always be used in
-preference to the low level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
+preference to the low-level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
 transparent to the algorithm used and much more flexible.
 
 EVP_DigestSign() is a one shot operation which signs a single block of data
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_DigestVerifyInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_DigestVerifyInit.pod
index 0806cd5d58c4..e7d8c8318445 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_DigestVerifyInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_DigestVerifyInit.pod
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ EVP_DigestVerify - EVP signature verification functions
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP signature routines are a high level interface to digital signatures.
+The EVP signature routines are a high-level interface to digital signatures.
 
 EVP_DigestVerifyInit() sets up verification context B<ctx> to use digest
 B<type> from ENGINE B<e> and public key B<pkey>. B<ctx> must be created
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ The error codes can be obtained from L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The B<EVP> interface to digital signatures should almost always be used in
-preference to the low level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
+preference to the low-level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
 transparent to the algorithm used and much more flexible.
 
 EVP_DigestVerify() is a one shot operation which verifies a single block of
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.0.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_EncodeInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_EncodeInit.pod
index 8055b100b252..e8b65d381890 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_EncodeInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_EncodeInit.pod
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ EVP_DecodeBlock - EVP base 64 encode/decode routines
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP encode routines provide a high level interface to base 64 encoding and
+The EVP encode routines provide a high-level interface to base 64 encoding and
 decoding. Base 64 encoding converts binary data into a printable form that uses
 the characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, "+" and "/" to represent the data. For every 3
 bytes of binary data provided 4 bytes of base 64 encoded data will be produced
@@ -83,8 +83,8 @@ EVP_ENCODE_CTX_num() will return the number of as yet unprocessed bytes still to
 be encoded or decoded that are pending in the B<ctx> object.
 
 EVP_EncodeBlock() encodes a full block of input data in B<f> and of length
-B<dlen> and stores it in B<t>. For every 3 bytes of input provided 4 bytes of
-output data will be produced. If B<dlen> is not divisible by 3 then the block is
+B<n> and stores it in B<t>. For every 3 bytes of input provided 4 bytes of
+output data will be produced. If B<n> is not divisible by 3 then the block is
 encoded as a final block of data and the output is padded such that it is always
 divisible by 4. Additionally a NUL terminator character will be added. For
 example if 16 bytes of input data is provided then 24 bytes of encoded data is
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ L<evp(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_EncryptInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_EncryptInit.pod
index aaf9975c4c26..0d8a780bb794 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_EncryptInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_EncryptInit.pod
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ EVP_enc_null
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP cipher routines are a high level interface to certain
+The EVP cipher routines are a high-level interface to certain
 symmetric ciphers.
 
 EVP_CIPHER_CTX_new() creates a cipher context.
@@ -146,10 +146,15 @@ appropriate.
 EVP_EncryptUpdate() encrypts B<inl> bytes from the buffer B<in> and
 writes the encrypted version to B<out>. This function can be called
 multiple times to encrypt successive blocks of data. The amount
-of data written depends on the block alignment of the encrypted data:
-as a result the amount of data written may be anything from zero bytes
-to (inl + cipher_block_size - 1) so B<out> should contain sufficient
-room. The actual number of bytes written is placed in B<outl>. It also
+of data written depends on the block alignment of the encrypted data.
+For most ciphers and modes, the amount of data written can be anything
+from zero bytes to (inl + cipher_block_size - 1) bytes.
+For wrap cipher modes, the amount of data written can be anything
+from zero bytes to (inl + cipher_block_size) bytes.
+For stream ciphers, the amount of data written can be anything from zero
+bytes to inl bytes.
+Thus, B<out> should contain sufficient room for the operation being performed.
+The actual number of bytes written is placed in B<outl>. It also
 checks if B<in> and B<out> are partially overlapping, and if they are
 0 is returned to indicate failure.
 
@@ -422,8 +427,8 @@ Sets the CCM B<L> value. If not set a default is used (8 for AES).
 
 =item EVP_CIPHER_CTX_ctrl(ctx, EVP_CTRL_AEAD_SET_IVLEN, ivlen, NULL)
 
-Sets the CCM nonce (IV) length. This call can only be made before specifying an
-nonce value. The nonce length is given by B<15 - L> so it is 7 by default for
+Sets the CCM nonce (IV) length. This call can only be made before specifying 
+a nonce value. The nonce length is given by B<15 - L> so it is 7 by default for
 AES.
 
 =back
@@ -463,10 +468,10 @@ This call is only valid when decrypting data.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 Where possible the B<EVP> interface to symmetric ciphers should be used in
-preference to the low level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
+preference to the low-level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
 transparent to the cipher used and much more flexible. Additionally, the
 B<EVP> interface will ensure the use of platform specific cryptographic
-acceleration such as AES-NI (the low level interfaces do not provide the
+acceleration such as AES-NI (the low-level interfaces do not provide the
 guarantee).
 
 PKCS padding works by adding B<n> padding bytes of value B<n> to make the total
@@ -591,7 +596,7 @@ with a 128-bit key:
 
      /* Don't set key or IV right away; we want to check lengths */
      ctx = EVP_CIPHER_CTX_new();
-     EVP_CipherInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_128_cbc(), NULL, NULL, NULL,
+     EVP_CipherInit_ex(ctx, EVP_aes_128_cbc(), NULL, NULL, NULL,
                        do_encrypt);
      OPENSSL_assert(EVP_CIPHER_CTX_key_length(ctx) == 16);
      OPENSSL_assert(EVP_CIPHER_CTX_iv_length(ctx) == 16);
@@ -654,7 +659,7 @@ EVP_CIPHER_CTX_reset().
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_OpenInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_OpenInit.pod
index 61b4307bca31..37223c8abf4c 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_OpenInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_OpenInit.pod
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ EVP_OpenInit, EVP_OpenUpdate, EVP_OpenFinal - EVP envelope decryption
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP envelope routines are a high level interface to envelope
+The EVP envelope routines are a high-level interface to envelope
 decryption. They decrypt a public key encrypted symmetric key and
 then decrypt data using it.
 
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ L<EVP_SealInit(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_ctrl.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_ctrl.pod
index 16d8462a4263..e4753168abf7 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_ctrl.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_ctrl.pod
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ parameter generation. Use 0 for PKCS#3 DH and 1 for X9.42 DH.
 The default is 0.
 
 The EVP_PKEY_CTX_set_dh_pad() macro sets the DH padding mode. If B<pad> is
-1 the shared secret is padded with zeroes up to the size of the DH prime B<p>.
+1 the shared secret is padded with zeros up to the size of the DH prime B<p>.
 If B<pad> is zero (the default) then no padding is performed.
 
 EVP_PKEY_CTX_set_dh_nid() sets the DH parameters to values corresponding to
@@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ macros were added in 1.1.1, other functions were added in OpenSSL 1.0.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_new.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_new.pod
index f01fc9752297..8c3c796f6fdd 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_CTX_new.pod
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ If B<ctx> is NULL, nothing is done.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The B<EVP_PKEY_CTX> structure is an opaque public key algorithm context used
-by the OpenSSL high level public key API. Contexts B<MUST NOT> be shared between
+by the OpenSSL high-level public key API. Contexts B<MUST NOT> be shared between
 threads: that is it is not permissible to use the same context simultaneously
 in two threads.
 
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.0.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_keygen.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_keygen.pod
index 83cebe7ce2f4..82df15363035 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_keygen.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_keygen.pod
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ generation callback.
 The function EVP_PKEY_CTX_get_keygen_info() returns parameters associated
 with the generation operation. If B<idx> is -1 the total number of
 parameters available is returned. Any non negative value returns the value of
-that parameter. EVP_PKEY_CTX_gen_keygen_info() with a non-negative value for
+that parameter. EVP_PKEY_CTX_gen_keygen_info() with a nonnegative value for
 B<idx> should only be called within the generation callback.
 
 If the callback returns 0 then the key generation operation is aborted and an
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_new.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_new.pod
index 667269cc624e..faf5a117e5ae 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_PKEY_new.pod
@@ -66,7 +66,8 @@ B<EVP_PKEY_X25519>, B<EVP_PKEY_ED25519>, B<EVP_PKEY_X448> or B<EVP_PKEY_ED448>.
 EVP_PKEY_new_CMAC_key() works in the same way as EVP_PKEY_new_raw_private_key()
 except it is only for the B<EVP_PKEY_CMAC> algorithm type. In addition to the
 raw private key data, it also takes a cipher algorithm to be used during
-creation of a CMAC in the B<cipher> argument.
+creation of a CMAC in the B<cipher> argument. The cipher should be a standard
+encryption only cipher. For example AEAD and XTS ciphers should not be used.
 
 EVP_PKEY_new_mac_key() works in the same way as EVP_PKEY_new_raw_private_key().
 New applications should use EVP_PKEY_new_raw_private_key() instead.
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_SealInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_SealInit.pod
index 2c2c89a71b51..4bee44922d53 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_SealInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_SealInit.pod
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ EVP_SealInit, EVP_SealUpdate, EVP_SealFinal - EVP envelope encryption
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP envelope routines are a high level interface to envelope
+The EVP envelope routines are a high-level interface to envelope
 encryption. They generate a random key and IV (if required) then
 "envelope" it by using public key encryption. Data can then be
 encrypted using this key.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ L<RAND(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_SignInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_SignInit.pod
index 22ce747d333f..299c5cf312ee 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_SignInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_SignInit.pod
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ EVP_SignInit, EVP_SignInit_ex, EVP_SignUpdate, EVP_SignFinal
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP signature routines are a high level interface to digital
+The EVP signature routines are a high-level interface to digital
 signatures.
 
 EVP_SignInit_ex() sets up signing context I<ctx> to use digest
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The B<EVP> interface to digital signatures should almost always be used in
-preference to the low level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
+preference to the low-level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
 transparent to the algorithm used and much more flexible.
 
 When signing with DSA private keys the random number generator must be seeded.
diff --git a/doc/man3/EVP_VerifyInit.pod b/doc/man3/EVP_VerifyInit.pod
index 647c99bceb5a..3c6b2daeca78 100644
--- a/doc/man3/EVP_VerifyInit.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/EVP_VerifyInit.pod
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ EVP_VerifyInit, EVP_VerifyUpdate, EVP_VerifyFinal
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-The EVP signature verification routines are a high level interface to digital
+The EVP signature verification routines are a high-level interface to digital
 signatures.
 
 EVP_VerifyInit_ex() sets up verification context B<ctx> to use digest
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The B<EVP> interface to digital signatures should almost always be used in
-preference to the low level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
+preference to the low-level interfaces. This is because the code then becomes
 transparent to the algorithm used and much more flexible.
 
 The call to EVP_VerifyFinal() internally finalizes a copy of the digest context.
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ L<SHA1(3)>, L<dgst(1)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/HMAC.pod b/doc/man3/HMAC.pod
index 30c0e6bac392..27022686f7aa 100644
--- a/doc/man3/HMAC.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/HMAC.pod
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ HMAC_size
  #include <openssl/hmac.h>
 
  unsigned char *HMAC(const EVP_MD *evp_md, const void *key,
-                     int key_len, const unsigned char *d, int n,
+                     int key_len, const unsigned char *d, size_t n,
                      unsigned char *md, unsigned int *md_len);
 
  HMAC_CTX *HMAC_CTX_new(void);
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ HMAC_size
 
  int HMAC_Init_ex(HMAC_CTX *ctx, const void *key, int key_len,
                   const EVP_MD *md, ENGINE *impl);
- int HMAC_Update(HMAC_CTX *ctx, const unsigned char *data, int len);
+ int HMAC_Update(HMAC_CTX *ctx, const unsigned char *data, size_t len);
  int HMAC_Final(HMAC_CTX *ctx, unsigned char *md, unsigned int *len);
 
  void HMAC_CTX_free(HMAC_CTX *ctx);
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ EVP_shake256().
 
 HMAC_CTX_new() creates a new HMAC_CTX in heap memory.
 
-HMAC_CTX_reset() zeroes an existing B<HMAC_CTX> and associated
+HMAC_CTX_reset() zeros an existing B<HMAC_CTX> and associated
 resources, making it suitable for new computations as if it was newly
 created with HMAC_CTX_new().
 
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ OpenSSL before version 1.0.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OCSP_cert_to_id.pod b/doc/man3/OCSP_cert_to_id.pod
index c8d39c191358..49393f7329a0 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OCSP_cert_to_id.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OCSP_cert_to_id.pod
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ corresponding parameter can be set to B<NULL>.
 OCSP_cert_to_id() and OCSP_cert_id_new() return either a pointer to a valid
 B<OCSP_CERTID> structure or B<NULL> if an error occurred.
 
-OCSP_id_cmp() and OCSP_id_issuer_cmp() returns zero for a match and non-zero
+OCSP_id_cmp() and OCSP_id_issuer_cmp() returns zero for a match and nonzero
 otherwise.
 
 OCSP_CERTID_free() does not return a value.
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ L<OCSP_sendreq_new(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OCSP_request_add1_nonce.pod b/doc/man3/OCSP_request_add1_nonce.pod
index 81bf645108f3..777d876d04af 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OCSP_request_add1_nonce.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OCSP_request_add1_nonce.pod
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ performance reasons. As a result they do not support nonces.
 
 The return values of OCSP_check_nonce() can be checked to cover each case.  A
 positive return value effectively indicates success: nonces are both present
-and match, both absent or present in the response only. A non-zero return
+and match, both absent or present in the response only. A nonzero return
 additionally covers the case where the nonce is present in the request only:
 this will happen if the responder doesn't support nonces. A zero return value
 indicates present and mismatched nonces: this should be treated as an error
diff --git a/doc/man3/OCSP_resp_find_status.pod b/doc/man3/OCSP_resp_find_status.pod
index 35f7d35e9976..72dcc426c649 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OCSP_resp_find_status.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OCSP_resp_find_status.pod
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ no freeing of the results is necessary.
 
 OCSP_check_validity() checks the validity of B<thisupd> and B<nextupd> values
 which will be typically obtained from OCSP_resp_find_status() or
-OCSP_single_get0_status(). If B<sec> is non-zero it indicates how many seconds
+OCSP_single_get0_status(). If B<sec> is nonzero it indicates how many seconds
 leeway should be allowed in the check. If B<maxsec> is positive it indicates
 the maximum age of B<thisupd> in seconds.
 
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ can then take appropriate action based on the status of the certificate.
 
 An OCSP response for a certificate contains B<thisUpdate> and B<nextUpdate>
 fields. Normally the current time should be between these two values. To
-account for clock skew the B<maxsec> field can be set to non-zero in
+account for clock skew the B<maxsec> field can be set to nonzero in
 OCSP_check_validity(). Some responders do not set the B<nextUpdate> field, this
 would otherwise mean an ancient response would be considered valid: the
 B<maxsec> parameter to OCSP_check_validity() can be used to limit the permitted
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ L<OCSP_sendreq_new(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OCSP_sendreq_new.pod b/doc/man3/OCSP_sendreq_new.pod
index a129a16bf23c..16d5a21dfcae 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OCSP_sendreq_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OCSP_sendreq_new.pod
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ response header maximum line length of B<maxline>. If B<maxline> is zero a
 default value of 4k is used. The OCSP request B<req> may be set to B<NULL>
 and provided later if required.
 
-OCSP_sendreq_nbio() performs non-blocking I/O on the OCSP request context
+OCSP_sendreq_nbio() performs nonblocking I/O on the OCSP request context
 B<rctx>. When the operation is complete it returns the response in B<*presp>.
 
 OCSP_REQ_CTX_free() frees up the OCSP context B<rctx>.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ corresponding BIO can be examined to determine which operation (read or
 write) should be retried and appropriate action taken (for example a select()
 call on the underlying socket).
 
-OCSP_sendreq_bio() does not support retries and so cannot handle non-blocking
+OCSP_sendreq_bio() does not support retries and so cannot handle nonblocking
 I/O efficiently. It is retained for compatibility and its use in new
 applications is not recommended.
 
diff --git a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_LH_COMPFUNC.pod b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_LH_COMPFUNC.pod
index a312ef7342f4..ae0a4bbf978b 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_LH_COMPFUNC.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_LH_COMPFUNC.pod
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ an unsigned long hash value for its key field.  The hash value is
 normally truncated to a power of 2, so make sure that your hash
 function returns well mixed low order bits.  The B<compare> callback
 takes two arguments (pointers to two hash table entries), and returns
-0 if their keys are equal, non-zero otherwise.
+0 if their keys are equal, nonzero otherwise.
 
 If your hash table
 will contain items of some particular type and the B<hash> and
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ all such parameters as constant.
 
 As an example, a hash table may be maintained by code that, for
 reasons of encapsulation, has only "const" access to the data being
-indexed in the hash table (ie. it is returned as "const" from
+indexed in the hash table (i.e. it is returned as "const" from
 elsewhere in their code) - in this case the LHASH prototypes are
 appropriate as-is.  Conversely, if the caller is responsible for the
 life-time of the data in question, then they may well wish to make
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ type checking.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_config.pod b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_config.pod
index 6294ee1d1be1..528eef0cf927 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_config.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_config.pod
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ initialization (that is before starting any threads).
 
 There are several reasons why calling the OpenSSL configuration routines is
 advisable. For example, to load dynamic ENGINEs from shared libraries (DSOs).
-However very few applications currently support the control interface and so
+However, very few applications currently support the control interface and so
 very few can load and use dynamic ENGINEs. Equally in future more sophisticated
 ENGINEs will require certain control operations to customize them. If an
 application calls OPENSSL_config() it doesn't need to know or care about
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ deprecated in OpenSSL 1.1.0 by OPENSSL_init_crypto().
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2004-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2004-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_ia32cap.pod b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_ia32cap.pod
index 08a181168f79..73c96d70e698 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_ia32cap.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_ia32cap.pod
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ and RORX;
 =item bit #64+19 denoting availability of ADCX and ADOX instructions;
 
 =item bit #64+21 denoting availability of VPMADD52[LH]UQ instructions,
-a.k.a. AVX512IFMA extension;
+aka AVX512IFMA extension;
 
 =item bit #64+29 denoting availability of SHA extension;
 
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Not available.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2004-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2004-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_crypto.pod b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_crypto.pod
index c7823e32d6df..3447f5f1138f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_crypto.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_crypto.pod
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ needs so no explicit initialisation is required. Similarly it will also
 automatically deinitialise as required.
 
 However, there may be situations when explicit initialisation is desirable or
-needed, for example when some non-default initialisation is required. The
+needed, for example when some nondefault initialisation is required. The
 function OPENSSL_init_crypto() can be used for this purpose for
 libcrypto (see also L<OPENSSL_init_ssl(3)> for the libssl
 equivalent).
 
 Numerous internal OpenSSL functions call OPENSSL_init_crypto().
-Therefore, in order to perform non-default initialisation,
+Therefore, in order to perform nondefault initialisation,
 OPENSSL_init_crypto() MUST be called by application code prior to
 any other OpenSSL function calls.
 
@@ -216,10 +216,10 @@ The filename, application name, and flags can be customized by providing a
 non-null B<OPENSSL_INIT_SETTINGS> object.
 The object can be allocated via B<OPENSSL_init_new()>.
 The B<OPENSSL_INIT_set_config_filename()> function can be used to specify a
-non-default filename, which is copied and need not refer to persistent storage.
+nondefault filename, which is copied and need not refer to persistent storage.
 Similarly, OPENSSL_INIT_set_config_appname() can be used to specify a
-non-default application name.
-Finally, OPENSSL_INIT_set_file_flags can be used to specify non-default flags.
+nondefault application name.
+Finally, OPENSSL_INIT_set_file_flags can be used to specify nondefault flags.
 If the B<CONF_MFLAGS_IGNORE_RETURN_CODES> flag is not included, any errors in
 the configuration file will cause an error return from B<OPENSSL_init_crypto>
 or indirectly L<OPENSSL_init_ssl(3)>.
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ and OPENSSL_INIT_free() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_ssl.pod b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_ssl.pod
index b963e5e7a926..cf4f08911409 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_ssl.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OPENSSL_init_ssl.pod
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@ needs so no explicit initialisation is required. Similarly it will also
 automatically deinitialise as required.
 
 However, there may be situations when explicit initialisation is desirable or
-needed, for example when some non-default initialisation is required. The
+needed, for example when some nondefault initialisation is required. The
 function OPENSSL_init_ssl() can be used for this purpose. Calling
 this function will explicitly initialise BOTH libcrypto and libssl. To
 explicitly initialise ONLY libcrypto see the
 L<OPENSSL_init_crypto(3)> function.
 
 Numerous internal OpenSSL functions call OPENSSL_init_ssl().
-Therefore, in order to perform non-default initialisation,
+Therefore, in order to perform nondefault initialisation,
 OPENSSL_init_ssl() MUST be called by application code prior to
 any other OpenSSL function calls.
 
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ The OPENSSL_init_ssl() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/OSSL_STORE_open.pod b/doc/man3/OSSL_STORE_open.pod
index 1e8ebf7ce1ce..71fdd6932f82 100644
--- a/doc/man3/OSSL_STORE_open.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/OSSL_STORE_open.pod
@@ -46,21 +46,22 @@ OSSL_STORE_close() to work together.
 
 =head2 Functions
 
-OSSL_STORE_open() takes a uri or path B<uri>, password UI method
-B<ui_method> with associated data B<ui_data>, and post processing
-callback B<post_process> with associated data B<post_process_data>,
+OSSL_STORE_open() takes a uri or path I<uri>, password UI method
+I<ui_method> with associated data I<ui_data>, and post processing
+callback I<post_process> with associated data I<post_process_data>,
 opens a channel to the data located at that URI and returns a
 B<OSSL_STORE_CTX> with all necessary internal information.
-The given B<ui_method> and B<ui_data_data> will be reused by all
-functions that use B<OSSL_STORE_CTX> when interaction is needed.
-The given B<post_process> and B<post_process_data> will be reused by
+The given I<ui_method> and I<ui_data> will be reused by all
+functions that use B<OSSL_STORE_CTX> when interaction is needed,
+for instance to provide a password.
+The given I<post_process> and I<post_process_data> will be reused by
 OSSL_STORE_load() to manipulate or drop the value to be returned.
-The B<post_process> function drops values by returning B<NULL>, which
+The I<post_process> function drops values by returning NULL, which
 will cause OSSL_STORE_load() to start its process over with loading
-the next object, until B<post_process> returns something other than
-B<NULL>, or the end of data is reached as indicated by OSSL_STORE_eof().
+the next object, until I<post_process> returns something other than
+NULL, or the end of data is reached as indicated by OSSL_STORE_eof().
 
-OSSL_STORE_ctrl() takes a B<OSSL_STORE_CTX>, and command number B<cmd> and
+OSSL_STORE_ctrl() takes a B<OSSL_STORE_CTX>, and command number I<cmd> and
 more arguments not specified here.
 The available loader specific command numbers and arguments they each
 take depends on the loader that's used and is documented together with
@@ -94,6 +95,7 @@ OSSL_STORE_eof() shows that the end of data has been reached.
 OSSL_STORE_close() takes a B<OSSL_STORE_CTX>, closes the channel that was opened
 by OSSL_STORE_open() and frees all other information that was stored in the
 B<OSSL_STORE_CTX>, as well as the B<OSSL_STORE_CTX> itself.
+If I<ctx> is NULL it does nothing.
 
 =head1 SUPPORTED SCHEMES
 
@@ -123,12 +125,12 @@ See L<passphrase-encoding(7)> for further information.
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
 OSSL_STORE_open() returns a pointer to a B<OSSL_STORE_CTX> on success, or
-B<NULL> on failure.
+NULL on failure.
 
 OSSL_STORE_load() returns a pointer to a B<OSSL_STORE_INFO> on success, or
-B<NULL> on error or when end of data is reached.
+NULL on error or when end of data is reached.
 Use OSSL_STORE_error() and OSSL_STORE_eof() to determine the meaning of a
-returned B<NULL>.
+returned NULL.
 
 OSSL_STORE_eof() returns 1 if the end of data has been reached, otherwise
 0.
@@ -149,9 +151,12 @@ OSSL_STORE_CTX(), OSSL_STORE_post_process_info_fn(), OSSL_STORE_open(),
 OSSL_STORE_ctrl(), OSSL_STORE_load(), OSSL_STORE_eof() and OSSL_STORE_close()
 were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
+Handling of NULL I<ctx> argument for OSSL_STORE_close()
+was introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.1h.
+
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/PEM_read_bio_PrivateKey.pod b/doc/man3/PEM_read_bio_PrivateKey.pod
index a8306500fb3c..233df7fca217 100644
--- a/doc/man3/PEM_read_bio_PrivateKey.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/PEM_read_bio_PrivateKey.pod
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ RSA structure. The public key is encoded using a PKCS#1 RSAPublicKey
 structure.
 
 The B<RSA_PUBKEY> functions also process an RSA public key using
-an RSA structure. However the public key is encoded using a
+an RSA structure. However, the public key is encoded using a
 SubjectPublicKeyInfo structure and an error occurs if the public
 key is not RSA.
 
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ The pseudo code to derive the key would look similar to:
 =head1 BUGS
 
 The PEM read routines in some versions of OpenSSL will not correctly reuse
-an existing structure. Therefore the following:
+an existing structure. Therefore, the following:
 
  PEM_read_bio_X509(bp, &x, 0, NULL);
 
@@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ as they will be formally deprecated in a future releases.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/PKCS7_verify.pod b/doc/man3/PKCS7_verify.pod
index ebcdde0795fb..9e238c565952 100644
--- a/doc/man3/PKCS7_verify.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/PKCS7_verify.pod
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ useful if one merely wishes to write the content to B<out> and its validity
 is not considered important.
 
 Chain verification should arguably be performed  using the signing time rather
-than the current time. However since the signing time is supplied by the
+than the current time. However, since the signing time is supplied by the
 signer it cannot be trusted without additional evidence (such as a trusted
 timestamp).
 
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<PKCS7_sign(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2002-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2002-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_new.pod b/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_new.pod
index 5da91be9dfab..ca52e2f3ddfc 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_new.pod
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ its type and to instantiate it.
 
 The optional B<flags> argument specifies a set of bit flags which can be
 joined using the | operator. Currently, the only flag is
-RAND_DRBG_FLAG_CTR_NO_DF, which disables the use of a the derivation function
+RAND_DRBG_FLAG_CTR_NO_DF, which disables the use of the derivation function
 ctr_df. For an explanation, see [NIST SP 800-90A Rev. 1].
 
 If a B<parent> instance is specified then this will be used instead of
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ The RAND_DRBG functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2017-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2017-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_set_callbacks.pod b/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_set_callbacks.pod
index 55e9a8b7af77..4d04645694ce 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_set_callbacks.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RAND_DRBG_set_callbacks.pod
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ does not satisfy the conditions requested by [NIST SP 800-90C], then
 it must also indicate an error by returning a buffer length of 0.
 See NOTES section for more details.
 
-The B<cleanup_entropy>() callback is called from the B<drbg> to to clear and
+The B<cleanup_entropy>() callback is called from the B<drbg> to clear and
 free the buffer allocated previously by get_entropy().
 The values B<out> and B<outlen> are the random buffer's address and length,
 as returned by the get_entropy() callback.
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The RAND_DRBG functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2017-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2017-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RAND_add.pod b/doc/man3/RAND_add.pod
index 4ba6ff977dd1..e4454d44124e 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RAND_add.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RAND_add.pod
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ usage by the random seed sources. Some seed sources maintain open file
 descriptors by default, which allows such sources to operate in a
 chroot(2) jail without the associated device nodes being available. When
 the B<keep> argument is zero, this call disables the retention of file
-descriptors. Conversely, a non-zero argument enables the retention of
+descriptors. Conversely, a nonzero argument enables the retention of
 file descriptors. This function is usually called during initialization
 and it takes effect immediately.
 
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ not be used.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RAND_load_file.pod b/doc/man3/RAND_load_file.pod
index 24f8fdcf4fe8..6ddd2c89b0d6 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RAND_load_file.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RAND_load_file.pod
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ RAND_load_file, RAND_write_file, RAND_file_name - PRNG seed file
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
 RAND_load_file() reads a number of bytes from file B<filename> and
-adds them to the PRNG. If B<max_bytes> is non-negative,
+adds them to the PRNG. If B<max_bytes> is nonnegative,
 up to B<max_bytes> are read;
 if B<max_bytes> is -1, the complete file is read.
 Do not load the same file multiple times unless its contents have
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ file. B<buf> points to a buffer of size B<num> in which to store the
 filename.
 
 On all systems, if the environment variable B<RANDFILE> is set, its
-value will be used as the seed file name.
+value will be used as the seed filename.
 Otherwise, the file is called C<.rnd>, found in platform dependent locations:
 
 =over 4
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Otherwise, the file is called C<.rnd>, found in platform dependent locations:
 =back
 
 If C<$HOME> (on non-Windows and non-VMS system) is not set either, or
-B<num> is too small for the path name, an error occurs.
+B<num> is too small for the pathname, an error occurs.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ L<RAND(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RSA_blinding_on.pod b/doc/man3/RSA_blinding_on.pod
index 5db127f16e3c..85f4453b5cc8 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RSA_blinding_on.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RSA_blinding_on.pod
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ measure the time of RSA decryption or signature operations, blinding
 must be used to protect the RSA operation from that attack.
 
 RSA_blinding_on() turns blinding on for key B<rsa> and generates a
-random blinding factor. B<ctx> is B<NULL> or a pre-allocated and
+random blinding factor. B<ctx> is B<NULL> or a preallocated and
 initialized B<BN_CTX>.
 
 RSA_blinding_off() turns blinding off and frees the memory used for
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ RSA_blinding_off() returns no value.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RSA_private_encrypt.pod b/doc/man3/RSA_private_encrypt.pod
index 060a9000f8b4..6629fff3c95b 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RSA_private_encrypt.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RSA_private_encrypt.pod
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 =head1 NAME
 
-RSA_private_encrypt, RSA_public_decrypt - low level signature operations
+RSA_private_encrypt, RSA_public_decrypt - low-level signature operations
 
 =head1 SYNOPSIS
 
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ RSA_private_encrypt, RSA_public_decrypt - low level signature operations
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-These functions handle RSA signatures at a low level.
+These functions handle RSA signatures at a low-level.
 
 RSA_private_encrypt() signs the B<flen> bytes at B<from> (usually a
 message digest with an algorithm identifier) using the private key
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ L<RSA_sign(3)>, L<RSA_verify(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/RSA_set_method.pod b/doc/man3/RSA_set_method.pod
index 4bb63962cfe1..449b841ed2ad 100644
--- a/doc/man3/RSA_set_method.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/RSA_set_method.pod
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ RSA_set_method() selects B<meth> to perform all operations using the key
 B<rsa>. This will replace the RSA_METHOD used by the RSA key and if the
 previous method was supplied by an ENGINE, the handle to that ENGINE will
 be released during the change. It is possible to have RSA keys that only
-work with certain RSA_METHOD implementations (eg. from an ENGINE module
+work with certain RSA_METHOD implementations (e.g. from an ENGINE module
 that supports embedded hardware-protected keys), and in such cases
 attempting to change the RSA_METHOD for the key can have unexpected
 results.
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ was replaced to always return NULL in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SHA256_Init.pod b/doc/man3/SHA256_Init.pod
index 6a8f2fa0db0e..f50839db6385 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SHA256_Init.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SHA256_Init.pod
@@ -75,9 +75,6 @@ SHA512_DIGEST_LENGTH). Also note that, as for the SHA1() function above, the
 SHA224(), SHA256(), SHA384() and SHA512() functions are not thread safe if
 B<md> is NULL.
 
-The predecessor of SHA-1, SHA, is also implemented, but it should be
-used only when backward compatibility is required.
-
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
 SHA1(), SHA224(), SHA256(), SHA384() and SHA512() return a pointer to the hash
@@ -98,7 +95,7 @@ L<EVP_DigestInit(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CONF_cmd.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CONF_cmd.pod
index 7f2449e379b9..900c4f3a5648 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CONF_cmd.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CONF_cmd.pod
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ B<ClientHello>.
 
 The B<value> argument is a colon separated list of groups. The group can be
 either the B<NIST> name (e.g. B<P-256>), some other commonly used name where
-applicable (e.g. B<X25519>) or an OpenSSL OID name (e.g B<prime256v1>). Group
+applicable (e.g. B<X25519>) or an OpenSSL OID name (e.g. B<prime256v1>). Group
 names are case sensitive. The list should be in order of preference with the
 most preferred group first.
 
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ servers
 The B<value> argument is a curve name or the special value B<auto> which
 picks an appropriate curve based on client and server preferences. The curve
 can be either the B<NIST> name (e.g. B<P-256>) or an OpenSSL OID name
-(e.g B<prime256v1>). Curve names are case sensitive.
+(e.g. B<prime256v1>). Curve names are case sensitive.
 
 =item B<-cipher>
 
@@ -147,13 +147,16 @@ B<SSL_OP_NO_RENEGOTIATION>.
 =item B<-min_protocol>, B<-max_protocol>
 
 Sets the minimum and maximum supported protocol.
-Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>,
-B<TLSv1.1>, B<TLSv1.2>, B<TLSv1.3> for TLS and B<DTLSv1>, B<DTLSv1.2> for DTLS,
-and B<None> for no limit.
-If either bound is not specified then only the other bound applies,
-if specified.
-To restrict the supported protocol versions use these commands rather
-than the deprecated alternative commands below.
+Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>, B<TLSv1.1>,
+B<TLSv1.2>, B<TLSv1.3> for TLS; B<DTLSv1>, B<DTLSv1.2> for DTLS, and B<None>
+for no limit.
+If either the lower or upper bound is not specified then only the other bound
+applies, if specified.
+If your application supports both TLS and DTLS you can specify any of these
+options twice, once with a bound for TLS and again with an appropriate bound
+for DTLS.
+To restrict the supported protocol versions use these commands rather than the
+deprecated alternative commands below.
 
 =item B<-no_ssl3>, B<-no_tls1>, B<-no_tls1_1>, B<-no_tls1_2>, B<-no_tls1_3>
 
@@ -356,7 +359,7 @@ B<ClientHello>.
 
 The B<value> argument is a colon separated list of groups. The group can be
 either the B<NIST> name (e.g. B<P-256>), some other commonly used name where
-applicable (e.g. B<X25519>) or an OpenSSL OID name (e.g B<prime256v1>). Group
+applicable (e.g. B<X25519>) or an OpenSSL OID name (e.g. B<prime256v1>). Group
 names are case sensitive. The list should be in order of preference with the
 most preferred group first.
 
@@ -370,7 +373,11 @@ This sets the minimum supported SSL, TLS or DTLS version.
 
 Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>, B<TLSv1.1>,
 B<TLSv1.2>, B<TLSv1.3>, B<DTLSv1> and B<DTLSv1.2>.
-The value B<None> will disable the limit.
+The SSL and TLS bounds apply only to TLS-based contexts, while the DTLS bounds
+apply only to DTLS-based contexts.
+The command can be repeated with one instance setting a TLS bound, and the
+other setting a DTLS bound.
+The value B<None> applies to both types of contexts and disables the limits.
 
 =item B<MaxProtocol>
 
@@ -378,7 +385,11 @@ This sets the maximum supported SSL, TLS or DTLS version.
 
 Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>, B<TLSv1.1>,
 B<TLSv1.2>, B<TLSv1.3>, B<DTLSv1> and B<DTLSv1.2>.
-The value B<None> will disable the limit.
+The SSL and TLS bounds apply only to TLS-based contexts, while the DTLS bounds
+apply only to DTLS-based contexts.
+The command can be repeated with one instance setting a TLS bound, and the
+other setting a DTLS bound.
+The value B<None> applies to both types of contexts and disables the limits.
 
 =item B<Protocol>
 
@@ -537,7 +548,7 @@ The value is a string without any specific structure.
 
 =item B<SSL_CONF_TYPE_FILE>
 
-The value is a file name.
+The value is a filename.
 
 =item B<SSL_CONF_TYPE_DIR>
 
@@ -683,7 +694,7 @@ B<AllowNoDHEKEX> and B<PrioritizeChaCha> were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2012-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2012-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_dane_enable.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_dane_enable.pod
index 7168bd64fda8..6f9514ae77da 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_dane_enable.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_dane_enable.pod
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ SSL_get0_dane_tlsa() can be used to retrieve the fields of the TLSA record that
 matched the peer certificate chain.
 The return value indicates the match depth or failure to match just as with
 SSL_get0_dane_authority().
-When the return value is non-negative, the storage pointed to by the B<usage>,
+When the return value is nonnegative, the storage pointed to by the B<usage>,
 B<selector>, B<mtype> and B<data> parameters is updated to the corresponding
 TLSA record fields.
 The B<data> field is in binary wire form, and is therefore not NUL-terminated,
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ SSL_CTX_dane_set_flags() and SSL_dane_set_flags() can be used to enable
 optional DANE verification features.
 SSL_CTX_dane_clear_flags() and SSL_dane_clear_flags() can be used to disable
 the same features.
-The B<flags> argument is a bitmask of the features to enable or disable.
+The B<flags> argument is a bit mask of the features to enable or disable.
 The B<flags> set for an B<SSL_CTX> context are copied to each B<SSL> handle
 associated with that context at the time the handle is created.
 Subsequent changes in the context's B<flags> have no effect on the B<flags> set
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ certificate or a public key that fails to parse.
 
 The functions SSL_get0_dane_authority() and SSL_get0_dane_tlsa() return a
 negative value when DANE authentication failed or was not enabled, a
-non-negative value indicates the chain depth at which the TLSA record matched a
+nonnegative value indicates the chain depth at which the TLSA record matched a
 chain certificate, or the depth of the top-most certificate, when the TLSA
 record is a full public key that is its signer.
 
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb.pod
index 56c86097b602..e90caecda425 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb.pod
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ provided by the callback.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The protocol-lists must be in wire-format, which is defined as a vector of
-non-empty, 8-bit length-prefixed, byte strings. The length-prefix byte is not
+nonempty, 8-bit length-prefixed, byte strings. The length-prefix byte is not
 included in the length. Each string is limited to 255 bytes. A byte-string
 length of 0 is invalid. A truncated byte-string is invalid. The length of the
 vector is not in the vector itself, but in a separate variable.
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ L<SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_arg(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id.pod
index 1735c6271b5a..2ad3bf0fbf9d 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id.pod
@@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ server id given, and will fill the rest with pseudo random bytes:
          /*
           * Prefix the session_id with the required prefix. NB: If our
           * prefix is too long, clip it - but there will be worse effects
-          * anyway, eg. the server could only possibly create 1 session
-          * ID (ie. the prefix!) so all future session negotiations will
+          * anyway, e.g. the server could only possibly create 1 session
+          * ID (i.e. the prefix!) so all future session negotiations will
           * fail due to conflicts.
           */
          memcpy(id, session_id_prefix, strlen(session_id_prefix) < *id_len ?
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ L<ssl(7)>, L<SSL_get_version(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_info_callback.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_info_callback.pod
index 01b03f9a59ae..cc032f870934 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_info_callback.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_info_callback.pod
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ the callback function was called. If B<ret> is 0, an error condition occurred.
 If an alert is handled, SSL_CB_ALERT is set and B<ret> specifies the alert
 information.
 
-B<where> is a bitmask made up of the following bits:
+B<where> is a bit mask made up of the following bits:
 
 =over 4
 
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ per state in some situations.
 
 Callback has been called to indicate exit of a handshake function. This will
 happen after the end of a handshake, but may happen at other times too such as
-on error or when IO might otherwise block and non-blocking is being used.
+on error or when IO might otherwise block and nonblocking is being used.
 
 =item SSL_CB_READ
 
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ L<SSL_alert_type_string(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list.pod
index 01936c58470c..3996c97682bc 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list.pod
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ received from a faulty or malicious peer, a maximum size for the certificate
 chain is set.
 
 The default value for the maximum certificate chain size is 100kB (30kB
-on the 16bit DOS platform). This should be sufficient for usual certificate
+on the 16-bit DOS platform). This should be sufficient for usual certificate
 chains (OpenSSL's default maximum chain length is 10, see
 L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>, and certificates
 without special extensions have a typical size of 1-2kB).
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_mode.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_mode.pod
index 387d1ec1ef04..85e3353e0e2c 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_mode.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_mode.pod
@@ -18,13 +18,13 @@ SSL_CTX_set_mode, SSL_CTX_clear_mode, SSL_set_mode, SSL_clear_mode, SSL_CTX_get_
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-SSL_CTX_set_mode() adds the mode set via bitmask in B<mode> to B<ctx>.
+SSL_CTX_set_mode() adds the mode set via bit mask in B<mode> to B<ctx>.
 Options already set before are not cleared.
-SSL_CTX_clear_mode() removes the mode set via bitmask in B<mode> from B<ctx>.
+SSL_CTX_clear_mode() removes the mode set via bit mask in B<mode> from B<ctx>.
 
-SSL_set_mode() adds the mode set via bitmask in B<mode> to B<ssl>.
+SSL_set_mode() adds the mode set via bit mask in B<mode> to B<ssl>.
 Options already set before are not cleared.
-SSL_clear_mode() removes the mode set via bitmask in B<mode> from B<ssl>.
+SSL_clear_mode() removes the mode set via bit mask in B<mode> from B<ssl>.
 
 SSL_CTX_get_mode() returns the mode set for B<ctx>.
 
@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ the behaviour of write().
 
 Make it possible to retry SSL_write_ex() or SSL_write() with changed buffer
 location (the buffer contents must stay the same). This is not the default to
-avoid the misconception that non-blocking SSL_write() behaves like
-non-blocking write().
+avoid the misconception that nonblocking SSL_write() behaves like
+nonblocking write().
 
 =item SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY
 
@@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ If such a non-application data record was processed, the flag
 B<SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY> causes it to try to process the next record instead of
 returning.
 
-In a non-blocking environment applications must be prepared to handle
+In a nonblocking environment applications must be prepared to handle
 incomplete read/write operations.
-Setting B<SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY> for a non-blocking B<BIO> will process
+Setting B<SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY> for a nonblocking B<BIO> will process
 non-application data records until either no more data is available or
 an application data record has been processed.
 
@@ -121,10 +121,10 @@ default since 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
-SSL_CTX_set_mode() and SSL_set_mode() return the new mode bitmask
+SSL_CTX_set_mode() and SSL_set_mode() return the new mode bit mask
 after adding B<mode>.
 
-SSL_CTX_get_mode() and SSL_get_mode() return the current bitmask.
+SSL_CTX_get_mode() and SSL_get_mode() return the current bit mask.
 
 =head1 SEE ALSO
 
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ SSL_MODE_ASYNC was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_options.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_options.pod
index 2d840b62cb24..969e0366c45a 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_options.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_options.pod
@@ -23,16 +23,16 @@ SSL_get_secure_renegotiation_support - manipulate SSL options
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-SSL_CTX_set_options() adds the options set via bitmask in B<options> to B<ctx>.
+SSL_CTX_set_options() adds the options set via bit mask in B<options> to B<ctx>.
 Options already set before are not cleared!
 
-SSL_set_options() adds the options set via bitmask in B<options> to B<ssl>.
+SSL_set_options() adds the options set via bit mask in B<options> to B<ssl>.
 Options already set before are not cleared!
 
-SSL_CTX_clear_options() clears the options set via bitmask in B<options>
+SSL_CTX_clear_options() clears the options set via bit mask in B<options>
 to B<ctx>.
 
-SSL_clear_options() clears the options set via bitmask in B<options> to B<ssl>.
+SSL_clear_options() clears the options set via bit mask in B<options> to B<ssl>.
 
 SSL_CTX_get_options() returns the options set for B<ctx>.
 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Note, this is implemented via a macro.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 The behaviour of the SSL library can be changed by setting several options.
-The options are coded as bitmasks and can be combined by a bitwise B<or>
+The options are coded as bit masks and can be combined by a bitwise B<or>
 operation (|).
 
 SSL_CTX_set_options() and SSL_set_options() affect the (external)
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ the session. In this way the server can operate statelessly - no session
 information needs to be cached locally.
 
 The TLSv1.3 protocol only supports tickets and does not directly support session
-ids. However OpenSSL allows two modes of ticket operation in TLSv1.3: stateful
+ids. However, OpenSSL allows two modes of ticket operation in TLSv1.3: stateful
 and stateless. Stateless tickets work the same way as in TLSv1.2 and below.
 Stateful tickets mimic the session id behaviour available in TLSv1.2 and below.
 The session information is cached on the server and the session id is wrapped up
@@ -340,13 +340,13 @@ and renegotiation between OpenSSL and unpatched clients or servers.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
-SSL_CTX_set_options() and SSL_set_options() return the new options bitmask
+SSL_CTX_set_options() and SSL_set_options() return the new options bit mask
 after adding B<options>.
 
-SSL_CTX_clear_options() and SSL_clear_options() return the new options bitmask
+SSL_CTX_clear_options() and SSL_clear_options() return the new options bit mask
 after clearing B<options>.
 
-SSL_CTX_get_options() and SSL_get_options() return the current bitmask.
+SSL_CTX_get_options() and SSL_get_options() return the current bit mask.
 
 SSL_get_secure_renegotiation_support() returns 1 is the peer supports
 secure renegotiation and 0 if it does not.
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback.pod
index eb4e4f5fa424..0273ccb97a83 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback.pod
@@ -123,7 +123,9 @@ and it will use that in preference. If no such callback is present then it will
 check to see if a callback has been set via SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback() or
 SSL_set_psk_client_callback() and use that. In this case the B<hint> value will
 always be NULL and the handshake digest will default to SHA-256 for any returned
-PSK.
+PSK. TLSv1.3 early data exchanges are possible in PSK connections only with the
+B<SSL_psk_use_session_cb_func> callback, and are not possible with the
+B<SSL_psk_client_cb_func> callback.
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
@@ -133,7 +135,7 @@ A connection established via a TLSv1.3 PSK will appear as if session resumption
 has occurred so that L<SSL_session_reused(3)> will return true.
 
 There are no known security issues with sharing the same PSK between TLSv1.2 (or
-below) and TLSv1.3. However the RFC has this note of caution:
+below) and TLSv1.3. However, the RFC has this note of caution:
 
 "While there is no known way in which the same PSK might produce related output
 in both versions, only limited analysis has been done.  Implementations can
@@ -166,7 +168,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead.pod
index ff037d938dcd..6d1e8bd5e8e9 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead.pod
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ SSL_CTX_get_default_read_ahead
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
 SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead() and SSL_set_read_ahead() set whether we should read as
-many input bytes as possible (for non-blocking reads) or not. For example if
+many input bytes as possible (for nonblocking reads) or not. For example if
 B<x> bytes are currently required by OpenSSL, but B<y> bytes are available from
 the underlying BIO (where B<y> > B<x>), then OpenSSL will read all B<y> bytes
 into its buffer (providing that the buffer is large enough) if reading ahead is
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ L<ssl(7)>, L<SSL_pending(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_security_level.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_security_level.pod
index 0cb6c1f52a22..f85959e7c045 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_security_level.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_security_level.pod
@@ -114,12 +114,6 @@ I<Documentation to be provided.>
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
-B<WARNING> at this time setting the security level higher than 1 for
-general internet use is likely to cause B<considerable> interoperability
-issues and is not recommended. This is because the B<SHA1> algorithm
-is very widely used in certificates and will be rejected at levels
-higher than 1 because it only offers 80 bits of security.
-
 The default security level can be configured when OpenSSL is compiled by
 setting B<-DOPENSSL_TLS_SECURITY_LEVEL=level>. If not set then 1 is used.
 
@@ -180,7 +174,7 @@ These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2014-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2014-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode.pod
index 18c9783fe0b2..38603f250dab 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode.pod
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ session caching (callback) that is configured for the SSL_CTX. This flag will
 prevent sessions being stored in the internal cache (though the application can
 add them manually using L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>). Note:
 in any SSL/TLS servers where external caching is configured, any successful
-session lookups in the external cache (ie. for session-resume requests) would
+session lookups in the external cache (i.e. for session-resume requests) would
 normally be copied into the local cache before processing continues - this flag
 prevents these additions to the internal cache as well.
 
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context.pod
index 4036d3c7b323..ccd37ba681d3 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context.pod
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ B<sid_ctx_len> within which a session can be reused for the B<ssl> object.
 Sessions are generated within a certain context. When exporting/importing
 sessions with B<i2d_SSL_SESSION>/B<d2i_SSL_SESSION> it would be possible,
 to re-import a session generated from another context (e.g. another
-application), which might lead to malfunctions. Therefore each application
+application), which might lead to malfunctions. Therefore, each application
 must set its own session id context B<sid_ctx> which is used to distinguish
 the contexts and is stored in exported sessions. The B<sid_ctx> can be
 any kind of binary data with a given length, it is therefore possible
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ L<ssl(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_ticket_cb.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_ticket_cb.pod
index f3dfb62c231c..aa520f4a6261 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_ticket_cb.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_session_ticket_cb.pod
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ The return value can be any of these values:
 
 The handshake should be aborted, either because of an error or because of some
 policy. Note that in TLSv1.3 a client may send more than one ticket in a single
-handshake. Therefore just because one ticket is unacceptable it does not mean
+handshake. Therefore, just because one ticket is unacceptable it does not mean
 that all of them are. For this reason this option should be used with caution.
 
 =item SSL_TICKET_RETURN_IGNORE
@@ -177,12 +177,12 @@ L<SSL_get_session(3)>
 
 =head1 HISTORY
 
-The SSL_CTX_set_session_ticket_cb(), SSSL_SESSION_set1_ticket_appdata()
+The SSL_CTX_set_session_ticket_cb(), SSL_SESSION_set1_ticket_appdata()
 and SSL_SESSION_get_ticket_appdata() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2017-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2017-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment.pod
index d63ca4157e09..d8fd3f5390c8 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment.pod
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ capability is known as "pipelining" within OpenSSL.
 
 In order to benefit from the pipelining capability. You need to have an engine
 that provides ciphers that support this. The OpenSSL "dasync" engine provides
-AES128-SHA based ciphers that have this capability. However these are for
+AES128-SHA based ciphers that have this capability. However, these are for
 development and test purposes only.
 
 SSL_CTX_set_max_send_fragment() and SSL_set_max_send_fragment() set the
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ and SSL_SESSION_get_max_fragment_length() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback.pod
index e971035734e1..0c21cfdb6bc7 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback.pod
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ value is initialised to SSL_AD_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME.
 =item SSL_TLSEXT_ERR_ALERT_WARNING
 
 If this value is returned then the servername is not accepted by the server.
-However the handshake will continue and send a warning alert instead. The value
+However, the handshake will continue and send a warning alert instead. The value
 of the alert should be stored in the location pointed to by the B<al> parameter
 as for SSL_TLSEXT_ERR_ALERT_FATAL above. Note that TLSv1.3 does not support
 warning alerts, so if TLSv1.3 has been negotiated then this return value is
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Otherwise it returns NULL.
 =item On the client, during or after the handshake and a TLSv1.2 (or below)
 resumption occurred
 
-If the session from the orignal handshake had a servername accepted by the
+If the session from the original handshake had a servername accepted by the
 server then it will return that servername.
 
 Otherwise it returns the servername set via SSL_set_tlsext_host_name() or NULL
@@ -157,12 +157,12 @@ corner cases. This has been fixed from OpenSSL 1.1.1e.
 
 Prior to 1.1.1e, when the client requested a servername in an initial TLSv1.2
 handshake, the server accepted it, and then the client successfully resumed but
-set a different explict servername in the second handshake then when called by
+set a different explicit servername in the second handshake then when called by
 the client it returned the servername from the second handshake. This has now
 been changed to return the servername requested in the original handshake.
 
 Also prior to 1.1.1e, if the client sent a servername in the first handshake but
-the server did not accept it, and then a second handshake occured where TLSv1.2
+the server did not accept it, and then a second handshake occurred where TLSv1.2
 resumption was successful then when called by the server it returned the
 servername requested in the original handshake. This has now been changed to
 NULL.
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb.pod
index 43bddc51e8cf..b2637efc1a72 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb.pod
@@ -136,6 +136,8 @@ Reference Implementation:
                                      unsigned char *iv, EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx,
                                      HMAC_CTX *hctx, int enc)
  {
+     your_type_t *key; /* something that you need to implement */
+
      if (enc) { /* create new session */
          if (RAND_bytes(iv, EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH) <= 0)
              return -1; /* insufficient random */
@@ -154,21 +156,22 @@ Reference Implementation:
          }
          memcpy(key_name, key->name, 16);
 
-         EVP_EncryptInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_128_cbc(), NULL, key->aes_key, iv);
-         HMAC_Init_ex(&hctx, key->hmac_key, 16, EVP_sha256(), NULL);
+         EVP_EncryptInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_256_cbc(), NULL, key->aes_key, iv);
+         HMAC_Init_ex(&hctx, key->hmac_key, 32, EVP_sha256(), NULL);
 
          return 1;
 
      } else { /* retrieve session */
-         key = findkey(name);
+         time_t t = time(NULL);
+         key = findkey(key_name); /* something that you need to implement */
 
-         if (key == NULL || key->expire < now())
+         if (key == NULL || key->expire < t)
              return 0;
 
-         HMAC_Init_ex(&hctx, key->hmac_key, 16, EVP_sha256(), NULL);
-         EVP_DecryptInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_128_cbc(), NULL, key->aes_key, iv);
+         HMAC_Init_ex(&hctx, key->hmac_key, 32, EVP_sha256(), NULL);
+         EVP_DecryptInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_256_cbc(), NULL, key->aes_key, iv);
 
-         if (key->expire < now() - RENEW_TIME) {
+         if (key->expire < t - RENEW_TIME) { /* RENEW_TIME: implement */
              /*
               * return 2 - This session will get a new ticket even though the
               * current one is still valid.
@@ -190,7 +193,7 @@ L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>,
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2014-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2014-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_use_psk_identity_hint.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_use_psk_identity_hint.pod
index 0957ade5e106..b39fc09169ac 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_use_psk_identity_hint.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_CTX_use_psk_identity_hint.pod
@@ -83,7 +83,9 @@ via SSL_CTX_set_psk_find_session_callback() or SSL_set_psk_find_session_callback
 and it will use that in preference. If no such callback is present then it will
 check to see if a callback has been set via SSL_CTX_set_psk_server_callback() or
 SSL_set_psk_server_callback() and use that. In this case the handshake digest
-will default to SHA-256 for any returned PSK.
+will default to SHA-256 for any returned PSK. TLSv1.3 early data exchanges are
+possible in PSK connections only with the B<SSL_psk_find_session_cb_func>
+callback, and are not possible with the B<SSL_psk_server_cb_func> callback.
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
@@ -126,7 +128,7 @@ failure. In the event of failure the connection setup fails.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 There are no known security issues with sharing the same PSK between TLSv1.2 (or
-below) and TLSv1.3. However the RFC has this note of caution:
+below) and TLSv1.3. However, the RFC has this note of caution:
 
 "While there is no known way in which the same PSK might produce related output
 in both versions, only limited analysis has been done.  Implementations can
@@ -145,7 +147,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2006-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2006-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_accept.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_accept.pod
index b1595f7acf34..81c9dbea5748 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_accept.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_accept.pod
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@ The behaviour of SSL_accept() depends on the underlying BIO.
 If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_accept() will only return once the
 handshake has been finished or an error occurred.
 
-If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, SSL_accept() will also return
+If the underlying BIO is B<nonblocking>, SSL_accept() will also return
 when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of SSL_accept()
 to continue the handshake, indicating the problem by the return value -1.
 In this case a call to SSL_get_error() with the
 return value of SSL_accept() will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. The calling process then must repeat the call after
 taking appropriate action to satisfy the needs of SSL_accept().
-The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a non-blocking socket,
+The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a nonblocking socket,
 nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check for the required
 condition. When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data must be written
 into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ established.
 The TLS/SSL handshake was not successful because a fatal error occurred either
 at the protocol level or a connection failure occurred. The shutdown was
 not clean. It can also occur if action is needed to continue the operation
-for non-blocking BIOs. Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret>
+for nonblocking BIOs. Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret>
 to find out the reason.
 
 =back
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_alloc_buffers.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_alloc_buffers.pod
index 94bd05840c84..ac3bd814c67c 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_alloc_buffers.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_alloc_buffers.pod
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ control when buffers are freed and allocated.
 
 After freeing the buffers, the buffers are automatically reallocated upon a
 new read or write. The SSL_alloc_buffers() does not need to be called, but
-can be used to make sure the buffers are pre-allocated. This can be used to
+can be used to make sure the buffers are preallocated. This can be used to
 avoid allocation during data processing or with CRYPTO_set_mem_functions()
 to control where and how buffers are allocated.
 
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ L<CRYPTO_set_mem_functions>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2017-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_connect.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_connect.pod
index f7d9e57db622..0e6b6253586c 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_connect.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_connect.pod
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@ The behaviour of SSL_connect() depends on the underlying BIO.
 If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_connect() will only return once the
 handshake has been finished or an error occurred.
 
-If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, SSL_connect() will also return
+If the underlying BIO is B<nonblocking>, SSL_connect() will also return
 when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of SSL_connect()
 to continue the handshake, indicating the problem by the return value -1.
 In this case a call to SSL_get_error() with the
 return value of SSL_connect() will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. The calling process then must repeat the call after
 taking appropriate action to satisfy the needs of SSL_connect().
-The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a non-blocking socket,
+The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a nonblocking socket,
 nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check for the required
 condition. When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data must be written
 into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ established.
 The TLS/SSL handshake was not successful, because a fatal error occurred either
 at the protocol level or a connection failure occurred. The shutdown was
 not clean. It can also occur if action is needed to continue the operation
-for non-blocking BIOs. Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret>
+for nonblocking BIOs. Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret>
 to find out the reason.
 
 =back
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_do_handshake.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_do_handshake.pod
index 8852f9d3e3dc..fa133d76a8ed 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_do_handshake.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_do_handshake.pod
@@ -25,13 +25,13 @@ The behaviour of SSL_do_handshake() depends on the underlying BIO.
 If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_do_handshake() will only return
 once the handshake has been finished or an error occurred.
 
-If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, SSL_do_handshake() will also return
+If the underlying BIO is B<nonblocking>, SSL_do_handshake() will also return
 when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of SSL_do_handshake()
 to continue the handshake. In this case a call to SSL_get_error() with the
 return value of SSL_do_handshake() will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. The calling process then must repeat the call after
 taking appropriate action to satisfy the needs of SSL_do_handshake().
-The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a non-blocking socket,
+The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a nonblocking socket,
 nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check for the required
 condition. When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data must be written
 into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ established.
 The TLS/SSL handshake was not successful because a fatal error occurred either
 at the protocol level or a connection failure occurred. The shutdown was
 not clean. It can also occur if action is needed to continue the operation
-for non-blocking BIOs. Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret>
+for nonblocking BIOs. Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret>
 to find out the reason.
 
 =back
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_get_all_async_fds.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_get_all_async_fds.pod
index 5b17f091e353..6fa6ed4a62ef 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_get_all_async_fds.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_get_all_async_fds.pod
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ appearing as "read ready" on the file descriptor (no actual data should be read
 from the file descriptor). This function should only be called if the SSL object
 is currently waiting for asynchronous work to complete (i.e.
 SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC has been received - see L<SSL_get_error(3)>). Typically the
-list will only contain one file descriptor. However if multiple asynchronous
+list will only contain one file descriptor. However, if multiple asynchronous
 capable engines are in use then more than one is possible. The number of file
 descriptors returned is stored in B<*numfds> and the file descriptors themselves
 are in B<*fds>. The B<fds> parameter may be NULL in which case no file
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ SSL_get_all_async_fds() and SSL_get_changed_async_fds() return 1 on success or
 On Windows platforms the openssl/async.h header is dependent on some
 of the types customarily made available by including windows.h. The
 application developer is likely to require control over when the latter
-is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore
+is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore,
 it is defined as an application developer's responsibility to include
 windows.h prior to async.h.
 
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ and SSL_get_changed_async_fds() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_get_error.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_get_error.pod
index 5221ccfe1804..e6a1e8b63def 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_get_error.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_get_error.pod
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ indicate that the underlying transport has been closed.
 The operation did not complete and can be retried later.
 
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> is returned when the last operation was a read
-operation from a non-blocking B<BIO>.
+operation from a nonblocking B<BIO>.
 It means that not enough data was available at this time to complete the
 operation.
 If at a later time the underlying B<BIO> has data available for reading the same
@@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ for a blocking B<BIO>.
 See L<SSL_read(3)> for more information.
 
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE> is returned when the last operation was a write
-to a non-blocking B<BIO> and it was unable to sent all data to the B<BIO>.
-When the B<BIO> is writeable again, the same function can be called again.
+to a nonblocking B<BIO> and it was unable to sent all data to the B<BIO>.
+When the B<BIO> is writable again, the same function can be called again.
 
 Note that the retry may again lead to an B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE> condition.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ protocol level.
 
 It is safe to call SSL_read() or SSL_read_ex() when more data is available
 even when the call that set this error was an SSL_write() or SSL_write_ex().
-However if the call was an SSL_write() or SSL_write_ex(), it should be called
+However, if the call was an SSL_write() or SSL_write_ex(), it should be called
 again to continue sending the application data.
 
 For socket B<BIO>s (e.g. when SSL_set_fd() was used), select() or
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_new.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_new.pod
index 222e9d5886d3..b8680526b8db 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_new.pod
@@ -26,10 +26,75 @@ structure are freed.
 SSL_up_ref() increments the reference count for an
 existing B<SSL> structure.
 
-SSL_dup() duplicates an existing B<SSL> structure into a new allocated one. All
-settings are inherited from the original B<SSL> structure. Dynamic data (i.e.
-existing connection details) are not copied, the new B<SSL> is set into an
-initial accept (server) or connect (client) state.
+The function SSL_dup() creates and returns a new B<SSL> structure from the same
+B<SSL_CTX> that was used to create I<s>. It additionally duplicates a subset of
+the settings in I<s> into the new B<SSL> object.
+
+For SSL_dup() to work, the connection MUST be in its initial state and
+MUST NOT have yet started the SSL handshake.  For connections that are not in
+their initial state SSL_dup() just increments an internal
+reference count and returns the I<same> handle.  It may be possible to
+use L<SSL_clear(3)> to recycle an SSL handle that is not in its initial
+state for re-use, but this is best avoided.  Instead, save and restore
+the session, if desired, and construct a fresh handle for each connection.
+
+The subset of settings in I<s> that are duplicated are:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item any session data if configured (including the session_id_context)
+
+=item any tmp_dh settings set via L<SSL_set_tmp_dh(3)>,
+L<SSL_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>, or L<SSL_set_dh_auto(3)>
+
+=item any configured certificates, private keys or certificate chains
+
+=item any configured signature algorithms, or client signature algorithms
+
+=item any DANE settings
+
+=item any Options set via L<SSL_set_options(3)>
+
+=item any Mode set via L<SSL_set_mode(3)>
+
+=item any minimum or maximum protocol settings set via
+L<SSL_set_min_proto_version(3)> or L<SSL_set_max_proto_version(3)> (Note: Only
+from OpenSSL 1.1.1h and above)
+
+=item any Verify mode, callback or depth set via L<SSL_set_verify(3)> or
+L<SSL_set_verify_depth(3)> or any configured X509 verification parameters
+
+=item any msg callback or info callback set via L<SSL_set_msg_callback(3)> or
+L<SSL_set_info_callback(3)>
+
+=item any default password callback set via L<SSL_set_default_passwd_cb(3)>
+
+=item any session id generation callback set via L<SSL_set_generate_session_id(3)>
+
+=item any configured Cipher List
+
+=item initial accept (server) or connect (client) state
+
+=item the max cert list value set via L<SSL_set_max_cert_list(3)>
+
+=item the read_ahead value set via L<SSL_set_read_ahead(3)>
+
+=item application specific data set via L<SSL_set_ex_data(3)>
+
+=item any CA list or client CA list set via L<SSL_set0_CA_list(3)>,
+SSL_set0_client_CA_list() or similar functions
+
+=item any security level settings or callbacks
+
+=item any configured serverinfo data
+
+=item any configured PSK identity hint
+
+=item any configured custom extensions
+
+=item any client certificate types configured via SSL_set1_client_certificate_types
+
+=back
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
@@ -59,7 +124,7 @@ L<ssl(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_pending.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_pending.pod
index c077a318c20e..eb42b554895e 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_pending.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_pending.pod
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ record) may have been read containing more TLS/SSL records. This also applies to
 DTLS and pipelining (see L<SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment(3)>). These
 additional bytes will be buffered by OpenSSL but will remain unprocessed until
 they are needed. As these bytes are still in an unprocessed state SSL_pending()
-will ignore them. Therefore it is possible for no more bytes to be readable from
+will ignore them. Therefore, it is possible for no more bytes to be readable from
 the underlying BIO (because OpenSSL has already read them) and for SSL_pending()
 to return 0, even though readable application data bytes are available (because
 the data is in unprocessed buffered records).
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ The SSL_has_pending() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_read.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_read.pod
index 4da7ad1ae1f4..29ccd9947c32 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_read.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_read.pod
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ invocation of a read function.
 The read functions work based on the SSL/TLS records. The data are received in
 records (with a maximum record size of 16kB). Only when a record has been
 completely received, can it be processed (decryption and check of integrity).
-Therefore data that was not retrieved at the last read call can still be
+Therefore, data that was not retrieved at the last read call can still be
 buffered inside the SSL layer and will be retrieved on the next read
 call. If B<num> is higher than the number of bytes buffered then the read
 functions will return with the bytes buffered. If no more bytes are in the
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ not set.
 Note that if B<SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY> is set and only non-application data is
 available the call will hang.
 
-If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, a read function will also return when
+If the underlying BIO is B<nonblocking>, a read function will also return when
 the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of the function to continue the
 operation.
 In this case a call to L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ a read function can also cause write operations.
 The calling process then must repeat the call after taking appropriate action
 to satisfy the needs of the read function.
 The action depends on the underlying BIO.
-When using a non-blocking socket, nothing is to be done, but select() can be
+When using a nonblocking socket, nothing is to be done, but select() can be
 used to check for the required condition.
 When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data must be written into or
 retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ The SSL_read_ex() and SSL_peek_ex() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_read_early_data.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_read_early_data.pod
index c51fe1359dc3..178bad731f1f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_read_early_data.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_read_early_data.pod
@@ -58,10 +58,11 @@ SSL_set_allow_early_data_cb
 These functions are used to send and receive early data where TLSv1.3 has been
 negotiated. Early data can be sent by the client immediately after its initial
 ClientHello without having to wait for the server to complete the handshake.
-Early data can only be sent if a session has previously been established with
-the server, and the server is known to support it. Additionally these functions
-can be used to send data from the server to the client when the client has not
-yet completed the authentication stage of the handshake.
+Early data can be sent if a session has previously been established with the
+server or when establishing a new session using an out-of-band PSK, and only
+when the server is known to support it. Additionally these functions can be used
+to send data from the server to the client when the client has not yet completed
+the authentication stage of the handshake.
 
 Early data has weaker security properties than other data sent over an SSL/TLS
 connection. In particular the data does not have forward secrecy. There are also
@@ -202,7 +203,7 @@ early data settings for the SSL_CTX and SSL objects respectively. Generally a
 server application will either use both of SSL_read_early_data() and
 SSL_CTX_set_max_early_data() (or SSL_set_max_early_data()), or neither of them,
 since there is no practical benefit from using only one of them. If the maximum
-early data setting for a server is non-zero then replay protection is
+early data setting for a server is nonzero then replay protection is
 automatically enabled (see L</REPLAY PROTECTION> below).
 
 If the server rejects the early data sent by a client then it will skip over
@@ -220,7 +221,7 @@ max_early_data for the session and the recv_max_early_data setting for the
 server. If a client sends more data than this then the connection will abort.
 
 The configured value for max_early_data on a server may change over time as
-required. However clients may have tickets containing the previously configured
+required. However, clients may have tickets containing the previously configured
 max_early_data value. The recv_max_early_data should always be equal to or
 higher than any recently configured max_early_data value in order to avoid
 aborted connections. The recv_max_early_data should never be set to less than
@@ -285,7 +286,7 @@ retry with a lower maximum protocol version.
 When early data is in use the TLS protocol provides no security guarantees that
 the same early data was not replayed across multiple connections. As a
 mitigation for this issue OpenSSL automatically enables replay protection if the
-server is configured with a non-zero max early data value. With replay
+server is configured with a nonzero max early data value. With replay
 protection enabled sessions are forced to be single use only. If a client
 attempts to reuse a session ticket more than once, then the second and
 subsequent attempts will fall back to a full handshake (and any early data that
@@ -316,7 +317,7 @@ cache. Applications should be designed with this in mind in order to minimise
 the possibility of replay attacks.
 
 The OpenSSL replay protection does not apply to external Pre Shared Keys (PSKs)
-(e.g. see SSL_CTX_set_psk_find_session_callback(3)). Therefore extreme caution
+(e.g. see SSL_CTX_set_psk_find_session_callback(3)). Therefore, extreme caution
 should be applied when combining external PSKs with early data.
 
 Some applications may mitigate the replay risks in other ways. For those
@@ -364,7 +365,7 @@ All of the functions described above were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2017-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2017-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_set1_host.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_set1_host.pod
index 4ae9f6e7f3d1..5754d480c84a 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_set1_host.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_set1_host.pod
@@ -19,9 +19,9 @@ SSL server verification parameters
 These functions configure server hostname checks in the SSL client.
 
 SSL_set1_host() sets the expected DNS hostname to B<name> clearing
-any previously specified host name or names.  If B<name> is NULL,
+any previously specified hostname or names.  If B<name> is NULL,
 or the empty string the list of hostnames is cleared, and name
-checks are not performed on the peer certificate.  When a non-empty
+checks are not performed on the peer certificate.  When a nonempty
 B<name> is specified, certificate verification automatically checks
 the peer hostname via L<X509_check_host(3)> with B<flags> as specified
 via SSL_set_hostflags().  Clients that enable DANE TLSA authentication
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_set_bio.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_set_bio.pod
index 1fa0d3492600..b824b5ae20ac 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_set_bio.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_set_bio.pod
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ SSL_set_bio, SSL_set0_rbio, SSL_set0_wbio - connect the SSL object with a BIO
 
 SSL_set0_rbio() connects the BIO B<rbio> for the read operations of the B<ssl>
 object. The SSL engine inherits the behaviour of B<rbio>. If the BIO is
-non-blocking then the B<ssl> object will also have non-blocking behaviour. This
+nonblocking then the B<ssl> object will also have nonblocking behaviour. This
 function transfers ownership of B<rbio> to B<ssl>. It will be automatically
 freed using L<BIO_free_all(3)> when the B<ssl> is freed. On calling this
 function, any existing B<rbio> that was previously set will also be freed via a
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ the same value as previously).
 SSL_set0_wbio() works in the same as SSL_set0_rbio() except that it connects
 the BIO B<wbio> for the write operations of the B<ssl> object. Note that if the
 rbio and wbio are the same then SSL_set0_rbio() and SSL_set0_wbio() each take
-ownership of one reference. Therefore it may be necessary to increment the
+ownership of one reference. Therefore, it may be necessary to increment the
 number of references available using L<BIO_up_ref(3)> before calling the set0
 functions.
 
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ SSL_set0_rbio() and SSL_set0_wbio() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_set_fd.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_set_fd.pod
index d5ec951e0bb8..6780d515f91f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_set_fd.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_set_fd.pod
@@ -20,8 +20,8 @@ socket file descriptor of a network connection.
 
 When performing the operation, a B<socket BIO> is automatically created to
 interface between the B<ssl> and B<fd>. The BIO and hence the SSL engine
-inherit the behaviour of B<fd>. If B<fd> is non-blocking, the B<ssl> will
-also have non-blocking behaviour.
+inherit the behaviour of B<fd>. If B<fd> is nonblocking, the B<ssl> will
+also have nonblocking behaviour.
 
 If there was already a BIO connected to B<ssl>, BIO_free() will be called
 (for both the reading and writing side, if different).
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(7)> , L<bio(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_set_shutdown.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_set_shutdown.pod
index b1cf58920be4..1d08f6c2cf0f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_set_shutdown.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_set_shutdown.pod
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ SSL_get_shutdown() returns the shutdown mode of B<ssl>.
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
-The shutdown state of an ssl connection is a bitmask of:
+The shutdown state of an ssl connection is a bit mask of:
 
 =over 4
 
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_shutdown.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_shutdown.pod
index 732e5ada04ae..a77721c85269 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_shutdown.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_shutdown.pod
@@ -95,13 +95,13 @@ The behaviour of SSL_shutdown() additionally depends on the underlying BIO.
 If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_shutdown() will only return once the
 handshake step has been finished or an error occurred.
 
-If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, SSL_shutdown() will also return
+If the underlying BIO is B<nonblocking>, SSL_shutdown() will also return
 when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of SSL_shutdown()
 to continue the handshake. In this case a call to SSL_get_error() with the
 return value of SSL_shutdown() will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
 B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. The calling process then must repeat the call after
 taking appropriate action to satisfy the needs of SSL_shutdown().
-The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a non-blocking socket,
+The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a nonblocking socket,
 nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check for the required
 condition. When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data must be written
 into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
@@ -116,6 +116,16 @@ state but not actually send the close_notify alert messages,
 see L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>.
 When "quiet shutdown" is enabled, SSL_shutdown() will always succeed
 and return 1.
+Note that this is not standard compliant behaviour.
+It should only be done when the peer has a way to make sure all
+data has been received and doesn't wait for the close_notify alert
+message, otherwise an unexpected EOF will be reported.
+
+There are implementations that do not send the required close_notify alert.
+If there is a need to communicate with such an implementation, and it's clear
+that all data has been received, do not wait for the peer's close_notify alert.
+Waiting for the close_notify alert when the peer just closes the connection will
+result in an error being generated.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
@@ -128,8 +138,10 @@ The following return values can occur:
 The shutdown is not yet finished: the close_notify was sent but the peer
 did not send it back yet.
 Call SSL_read() to do a bidirectional shutdown.
-The output of L<SSL_get_error(3)> may be misleading, as an
-erroneous SSL_ERROR_SYSCALL may be flagged even though no error occurred.
+
+Unlike most other function, returning 0 does not indicate an error.
+L<SSL_get_error(3)> should not get called, it may misleadingly
+indicate an error even though no error occurred.
 
 =item Z<>1
 
@@ -140,7 +152,7 @@ and the peer's close_notify alert was received.
 
 The shutdown was not successful.
 Call L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the return value B<ret> to find out the reason.
-It can occur if an action is needed to continue the operation for non-blocking
+It can occur if an action is needed to continue the operation for nonblocking
 BIOs.
 
 It can also occur when not all data was read using SSL_read().
@@ -157,7 +169,7 @@ L<ssl(7)>, L<bio(7)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_state_string.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_state_string.pod
index 505945a94252..54dfdd6c231f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_state_string.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_state_string.pod
@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ maintained. Querying the state information is not very informative before
 or when a connection has been established. It however can be of significant
 interest during the handshake.
 
-When using non-blocking sockets, the function call performing the handshake
+When using nonblocking sockets, the function call performing the handshake
 may return with SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ or SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE condition,
 so that SSL_state_string[_long]() may be called.
 
-For both blocking or non-blocking sockets, the details state information
+For both blocking or nonblocking sockets, the details state information
 can be used within the info_callback function set with the
 SSL_set_info_callback() call.
 
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ L<ssl(7)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_want.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_want.pod
index 6840ccbfb626..4827e7eeac7f 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_want.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_want.pod
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ return values are similar to that of L<SSL_get_error(3)>.
 Unlike L<SSL_get_error(3)>, which also evaluates the
 error queue, the results are obtained by examining an internal state flag
 only. The information must therefore only be used for normal operation under
-non-blocking I/O. Error conditions are not handled and must be treated
+nonblocking I/O. Error conditions are not handled and must be treated
 using L<SSL_get_error(3)>.
 
 The result returned by SSL_want() should always be consistent with
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/SSL_write.pod b/doc/man3/SSL_write.pod
index a76ffbb8fd15..5e3ce1e7e4dd 100644
--- a/doc/man3/SSL_write.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/SSL_write.pod
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ before the first call to a write function.
 If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, the write functions will only return, once
 the write operation has been finished or an error occurred.
 
-If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking> the write functions will also return
+If the underlying BIO is B<nonblocking> the write functions will also return
 when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of the function to continue
 the operation. In this case a call to L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the
 return value of the write function will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ>
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ or B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. As at any time a re-negotiation is possible, a
 call to a write function can also cause read operations! The calling process
 then must repeat the call after taking appropriate action to satisfy the needs
 of the write function. The action depends on the underlying BIO. When using a
-non-blocking socket, nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check
+nonblocking socket, nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check
 for the required condition. When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data
 must be written into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
 
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ The SSL_write_ex() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/UI_UTIL_read_pw.pod b/doc/man3/UI_UTIL_read_pw.pod
index a59cc4f3862a..a6528a0300aa 100644
--- a/doc/man3/UI_UTIL_read_pw.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/UI_UTIL_read_pw.pod
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ UI_UTIL_read_pw_string() asks for a passphrase, using B<prompt> as a
 prompt, and stores it in B<buf>.
 The maximum allowed size is given with B<length>, including the
 terminating NUL byte.
-If B<verify> is non-zero, the password will be verified as well.
+If B<verify> is nonzero, the password will be verified as well.
 
 UI_UTIL_read_pw() does the same as UI_UTIL_read_pw_string(), the
 difference is that you can give it an external buffer B<buff> for the
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ L<UI_get_default_method(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/UI_create_method.pod b/doc/man3/UI_create_method.pod
index a01e1012dcf9..c9295ff52649 100644
--- a/doc/man3/UI_create_method.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/UI_create_method.pod
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ interface method creation and destruction
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-A method contains a few functions that implement the low level of the
+A method contains a few functions that implement the low-level of the
 User Interface.
 These functions are:
 
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ and UI_method_get_data_destructor() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/UI_new.pod b/doc/man3/UI_new.pod
index 3042b13f1f1a..f40b65df40e9 100644
--- a/doc/man3/UI_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/UI_new.pod
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ UI_construct_prompt() is a helper function that can be used to create
 a prompt from two pieces of information: an description and a name.
 The default constructor (if there is none provided by the method used)
 creates a string "Enter I<description> for I<name>:".  With the
-description "pass phrase" and the file name "foo.key", that becomes
+description "pass phrase" and the filename "foo.key", that becomes
 "Enter pass phrase for foo.key:".  Other methods may create whatever
 string and may include encodings that will be processed by the other
 method functions.
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ The UI_dup_user_data() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2001-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2001-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509V3_get_d2i.pod b/doc/man3/X509V3_get_d2i.pod
index ac560b21e978..159948b17029 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509V3_get_d2i.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509V3_get_d2i.pod
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ of a certificate a CRL or a CRL entry respectively.
 =head1 NOTES
 
 In almost all cases an extension can occur at most once and multiple
-occurrences is an error. Therefore the B<idx> parameter is usually B<NULL>.
+occurrences is an error. Therefore, the B<idx> parameter is usually B<NULL>.
 
 The B<flags> parameter may be one of the following values.
 
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ L<X509_verify_cert(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_ALGOR_dup.pod b/doc/man3/X509_ALGOR_dup.pod
index 4aeaa591ebec..de2faf8547af 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_ALGOR_dup.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_ALGOR_dup.pod
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 =head1 NAME
 
-X509_ALGOR_dup, X509_ALGOR_set0, X509_ALGOR_get0, X509_ALGOR_set_md, X509_ALGOR_cmp - AlgorithmIdentifier functions
+X509_ALGOR_dup, X509_ALGOR_set0, X509_ALGOR_get0, X509_ALGOR_set_md, X509_ALGOR_cmp, X509_ALGOR_copy - AlgorithmIdentifier functions
 
 =head1 SYNOPSIS
 
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ X509_ALGOR_dup, X509_ALGOR_set0, X509_ALGOR_get0, X509_ALGOR_set_md, X509_ALGOR_
                       const void **ppval, const X509_ALGOR *alg);
  void X509_ALGOR_set_md(X509_ALGOR *alg, const EVP_MD *md);
  int X509_ALGOR_cmp(const X509_ALGOR *a, const X509_ALGOR *b);
+ int X509_ALGOR_copy(X509_ALGOR *dest, const X509_ALGOR *src);
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
@@ -34,23 +35,30 @@ X509_ALGOR_set_md() sets the B<AlgorithmIdentifier> B<alg> to appropriate
 values for the message digest B<md>.
 
 X509_ALGOR_cmp() compares B<a> and B<b> and returns 0 if they have identical
-encodings and non-zero otherwise.
+encodings and nonzero otherwise.
+
+X509_ALGOR_copy() copies the source values into the dest structs; making
+a duplicate of each (and free any thing pointed to from within *dest).
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
 X509_ALGOR_dup() returns a valid B<X509_ALGOR> structure or NULL if an error
 occurred.
 
-X509_ALGOR_set0() returns 1 on success or 0 on error.
+X509_ALGOR_set0() and X509_ALGOR_copy() return 1 on success or 0 on error.
 
 X509_ALGOR_get0() and X509_ALGOR_set_md() return no values.
 
 X509_ALGOR_cmp() returns 0 if the two parameters have identical encodings and
-non-zero otherwise.
+nonzero otherwise.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The X509_ALGOR_copy() was added in 1.1.1e.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2002-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2002-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_hash_dir.pod b/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_hash_dir.pod
index dd41f78b1240..365d0dea1c76 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_hash_dir.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_hash_dir.pod
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ upon each lookup, so that newer CRLs are as soon as they appear in
 the directory.
 
 The directory should contain one certificate or CRL per file in PEM format,
-with a file name of the form I<hash>.I<N> for a certificate, or
+with a filename of the form I<hash>.I<N> for a certificate, or
 I<hash>.B<r>I<N> for a CRL.
 The I<hash> is the value returned by the L<X509_NAME_hash(3)> function applied
 to the subject name for certificates or issuer name for CRLs.
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ L<X509_LOOKUP_meth_new(3)>,
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_meth_new.pod b/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_meth_new.pod
index a4e7466395dd..ad581d4b421e 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_meth_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_LOOKUP_meth_new.pod
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Implementations must add objects they find to the B<X509_STORE> object
 using X509_STORE_add_cert() or X509_STORE_add_crl().  This increments
 its reference count.  However, the X509_STORE_CTX_get_by_subject()
 function also increases the reference count which leads to one too
-many references being held.  Therefore applications should
+many references being held.  Therefore, applications should
 additionally call X509_free() or X509_CRL_free() to decrement the
 reference count again.
 
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_get_error.pod b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_get_error.pod
index bdbf86ae9695..74a28c07aa53 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_get_error.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_get_error.pod
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ it might be used in a verification callback to set an error based on additional
 checks.
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_get_error_depth() returns the B<depth> of the error. This is a
-non-negative integer representing where in the certificate chain the error
+nonnegative integer representing where in the certificate chain the error
 occurred. If it is zero it occurred in the end entity certificate, one if
 it is the certificate which signed the end entity certificate and so on.
 
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ verification error B<n>.
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_get_error() returns B<X509_V_OK> or an error code.
 
-X509_STORE_CTX_get_error_depth() returns a non-negative error depth.
+X509_STORE_CTX_get_error_depth() returns a nonnegative error depth.
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_get_current_cert() returns the certificate which caused the
 error or B<NULL> if no certificate is relevant to the error.
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ L<X509_free(3)>.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2009-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2009-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_new.pod b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_new.pod
index c5042858be85..aba7fff781e5 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_new.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_new.pod
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ by X509_verify_cert().
 X509_STORE_CTX_new() returns a newly initialised B<X509_STORE_CTX> structure.
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_cleanup() internally cleans up an B<X509_STORE_CTX> structure.
-The context can then be reused with an new call to X509_STORE_CTX_init().
+The context can then be reused with a new call to X509_STORE_CTX_init().
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_free() completely frees up B<ctx>. After this call B<ctx>
 is no longer valid.
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ X509_STORE_CTX_set0_verified_chain() sets the validated chain used
 by B<ctx> to be B<chain>.
 Ownership of the chain is transferred to B<ctx> and should not be
 free'd by the caller.
-X509_STORE_CTX_get0_chain() returns a the internal pointer used by the
+X509_STORE_CTX_get0_chain() returns the internal pointer used by the
 B<ctx> that contains the validated chain.
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_set0_crls() sets a set of CRLs to use to aid certificate
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ should be made or reference counts increased instead.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
-X509_STORE_CTX_new() returns an newly allocates context or B<NULL> is an
+X509_STORE_CTX_new() returns a newly allocated context or B<NULL> if an
 error occurred.
 
 X509_STORE_CTX_init() returns 1 for success or 0 if an error occurred.
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ The X509_STORE_CTX_get_num_untrusted() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2009-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2009-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_set_verify_cb.pod b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_set_verify_cb.pod
index 7cd661f215c1..81fe0b25a9b2 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_set_verify_cb.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_CTX_set_verify_cb.pod
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ The verification callback can be used to customise the operation of certificate
 verification, either by overriding error conditions or logging errors for
 debugging purposes.
 
-However a verification callback is B<not> essential and the default operation
+However, a verification callback is B<not> essential and the default operation
 is often sufficient.
 
 The B<ok> parameter to the callback indicates the value the callback should
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ and X509_STORE_CTX_get_cleanup() functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2009-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2009-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_set_verify_cb_func.pod b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_set_verify_cb_func.pod
index d16881edd83d..526790938acd 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_STORE_set_verify_cb_func.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_STORE_set_verify_cb_func.pod
@@ -137,7 +137,9 @@ I<If no function to get the issuer is provided, the internal default
 function will be used instead.>
 
 X509_STORE_set_check_issued() sets the function to check that a given
-certificate B<x> is issued with the issuer certificate B<issuer>.
+certificate B<x> is issued by the issuer certificate B<issuer> and
+the issuer is not yet in the chain contained in <ctx>, where the exceptional
+case that B<x> is self-issued and ctx->chain has just one element is allowed.
 This function must return 0 on failure (among others if B<x> hasn't
 been issued with B<issuer>) and 1 on success.
 I<If no function to get the issuer is provided, the internal default
@@ -256,7 +258,7 @@ were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2009-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2009-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags.pod b/doc/man3/X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags.pod
index 7593dea7dab9..f6f304bf7bd0 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags.pod
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ interoperable, though it will, for example, reject MD5 signatures or RSA keys
 shorter than 1024 bits.
 
 X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set1_host() sets the expected DNS hostname to
-B<name> clearing any previously specified host name or names.  If
+B<name> clearing any previously specified hostname or names.  If
 B<name> is NULL, or empty the list of hostnames is cleared, and
 name checks are not performed on the peer certificate.  If B<name>
 is NUL-terminated, B<namelen> may be zero, otherwise B<namelen>
@@ -264,12 +264,15 @@ they are enabled.
 If B<X509_V_FLAG_USE_DELTAS> is set delta CRLs (if present) are used to
 determine certificate status. If not set deltas are ignored.
 
-B<X509_V_FLAG_CHECK_SS_SIGNATURE> enables checking of the root CA self signed
-certificate signature. By default this check is disabled because it doesn't
+B<X509_V_FLAG_CHECK_SS_SIGNATURE> requests checking the signature of
+the last certificate in a chain if the certificate is supposedly self-signed.
+This is prohibited and will result in an error if it is a non-conforming CA
+certificate with key usage restrictions not including the keyCertSign bit.
+By default this check is disabled because it doesn't
 add any additional security but in some cases applications might want to
-check the signature anyway. A side effect of not checking the root CA
-signature is that disabled or unsupported message digests on the root CA
-are not treated as fatal errors.
+check the signature anyway. A side effect of not checking the self-signature
+of such a certificate is that disabled or unsupported message digests used for
+the signature are not treated as fatal errors.
 
 When B<X509_V_FLAG_TRUSTED_FIRST> is set, construction of the certificate chain
 in L<X509_verify_cert(3)> will search the trust store for issuer certificates
@@ -376,7 +379,7 @@ The X509_VERIFY_PARAM_get_hostflags() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0i.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2009-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2009-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_check_ca.pod b/doc/man3/X509_check_ca.pod
index 38f0811dd0f5..b70ecb787a68 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_check_ca.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_check_ca.pod
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ B<keyUsage> extension with bit B<keyCertSign> set, but without
 B<basicConstraints>, and 5 if it has outdated Netscape Certificate Type
 extension telling that it is CA certificate.
 
-Actually, any non-zero value means that this certificate could have been
+Actually, any nonzero value means that this certificate could have been
 used to sign other certificates.
 
 =head1 SEE ALSO
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ L<X509_check_purpose(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_check_host.pod b/doc/man3/X509_check_host.pod
index dba6a6976e07..b8bdd4c83156 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_check_host.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_check_host.pod
@@ -19,13 +19,13 @@ X509_check_host, X509_check_email, X509_check_ip, X509_check_ip_asc - X.509 cert
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
 The certificate matching functions are used to check whether a
-certificate matches a given host name, email address, or IP address.
+certificate matches a given hostname, email address, or IP address.
 The validity of the certificate and its trust level has to be checked by
 other means.
 
 X509_check_host() checks if the certificate Subject Alternative
-Name (SAN) or Subject CommonName (CN) matches the specified host
-name, which must be encoded in the preferred name syntax described
+Name (SAN) or Subject CommonName (CN) matches the specified hostname, 
+which must be encoded in the preferred name syntax described
 in section 3.5 of RFC 1034.  By default, wildcards are supported
 and they match  only in the left-most label; but they may match
 part of that label with an explicit prefix or suffix.  For example,
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Per section 6.4.2 of RFC 6125, B<name> values representing international
 domain names must be given in A-label form.  The B<namelen> argument
 must be the number of characters in the name string or zero in which
 case the length is calculated with strlen(B<name>).  When B<name> starts
-with a dot (e.g ".example.com"), it will be matched by a certificate
+with a dot (e.g. ".example.com"), it will be matched by a certificate
 valid for any sub-domain of B<name>, (see also
 B<X509_CHECK_FLAG_SINGLE_LABEL_SUBDOMAINS> below).
 
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.0.2.
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2012-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2012-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_check_issued.pod b/doc/man3/X509_check_issued.pod
index f9a541ef71de..55f75ac84bb4 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_check_issued.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_check_issued.pod
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 =head1 NAME
 
-X509_check_issued - checks if certificate is issued by another
+X509_check_issued - checks if certificate is apparently issued by another
 certificate
 
 =head1 SYNOPSIS
@@ -14,13 +14,14 @@ certificate
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
 
-This function checks if certificate I<subject> was issued using CA
-certificate I<issuer>. This function takes into account not only
-matching of issuer field of I<subject> with subject field of I<issuer>,
-but also compares B<authorityKeyIdentifier> extension of I<subject> with
-B<subjectKeyIdentifier> of I<issuer> if B<authorityKeyIdentifier>
-present in the I<subject> certificate and checks B<keyUsage> field of
-I<issuer>.
+X509_check_issued() checks if certificate I<subject> was apparently issued
+using (CA) certificate I<issuer>. This function takes into account not only
+matching of the issuer field of I<subject> with the subject field of I<issuer>,
+but also compares all sub-fields of the B<authorityKeyIdentifier> extension of
+I<subject>, as far as present, with the respective B<subjectKeyIdentifier>,
+serial number, and issuer fields of I<issuer>, as far as present. It also checks
+if the B<keyUsage> field (if present) of I<issuer> allows certificate signing.
+It does not check the certificate signature.
 
 =head1 RETURN VALUES
 
@@ -35,7 +36,7 @@ L<verify(1)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_check_purpose.pod b/doc/man3/X509_check_purpose.pod
index bc38138743cd..6af9e79815e4 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_check_purpose.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_check_purpose.pod
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ For non-CA checks
 
 =over 4
 
-=item -1 an error condition has occured
+=item -1 an error condition has occurred
 
 =item E<32>1 if the certificate was created to perform the purpose represented by I<id>
 
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ For CA checks the below integers could be returned with the following meanings:
 
 =over 4
 
-=item -1 an error condition has occured
+=item -1 an error condition has occurred
 
 =item E<32>0 not a CA or does not have the purpose represented by I<id>
 
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509_get0_signature.pod b/doc/man3/X509_get0_signature.pod
index 4133bc37a9af..99565e2a1d80 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509_get0_signature.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509_get0_signature.pod
@@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
 
 =head1 NAME
 
-X509_get0_signature, X509_get_signature_nid, X509_get0_tbs_sigalg,
-X509_REQ_get0_signature, X509_REQ_get_signature_nid, X509_CRL_get0_signature,
-X509_CRL_get_signature_nid, X509_get_signature_info, X509_SIG_INFO_get,
-X509_SIG_INFO_set - signature information
+X509_get0_signature, X509_REQ_set0_signature, X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo,
+X509_get_signature_nid, X509_get0_tbs_sigalg, X509_REQ_get0_signature, 
+X509_REQ_get_signature_nid, X509_CRL_get0_signature, X509_CRL_get_signature_nid, 
+X509_get_signature_info, X509_SIG_INFO_get, X509_SIG_INFO_set - signature information
 
 =head1 SYNOPSIS
 
@@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ X509_SIG_INFO_set - signature information
  void X509_get0_signature(const ASN1_BIT_STRING **psig,
                           const X509_ALGOR **palg,
                           const X509 *x);
+ void X509_REQ_set0_signature(X509_REQ *req, ASN1_BIT_STRING *psig);
+ int X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo(X509_REQ *req, X509_ALGOR *palg);
  int X509_get_signature_nid(const X509 *x);
  const X509_ALGOR *X509_get0_tbs_sigalg(const X509 *x);
 
@@ -41,6 +43,9 @@ X509_get0_signature() sets B<*psig> to the signature of B<x> and B<*palg>
 to the signature algorithm of B<x>. The values returned are internal
 pointers which B<MUST NOT> be freed up after the call.
 
+X509_set0_signature() and X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo() are the
+equivalent setters for the two values of X509_get0_signature().
+
 X509_get0_tbs_sigalg() returns the signature algorithm in the signed
 portion of B<x>.
 
@@ -88,6 +93,10 @@ X509_get_signature_info() returns 1 if the signature information
 returned is valid or 0 if the information is not available (e.g.
 unknown algorithms or malformed parameters).
 
+X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo() returns 0 on success; or 1 on an
+error (e.g. null ALGO pointer). X509_REQ_set0_signature does
+not return an error value.
+
 =head1 SEE ALSO
 
 L<d2i_X509(3)>,
@@ -118,9 +127,12 @@ X509_REQ_get0_signature(), X509_REQ_get_signature_nid(),
 X509_CRL_get0_signature() and X509_CRL_get_signature_nid() were
 added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
 
+The X509_REQ_set0_signature() and X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo()
+were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1e.
+
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/X509v3_get_ext_by_NID.pod b/doc/man3/X509v3_get_ext_by_NID.pod
index c81d46365099..67a7df58823d 100644
--- a/doc/man3/X509v3_get_ext_by_NID.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/X509v3_get_ext_by_NID.pod
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ the extension is found its index is returned otherwise B<-1> is returned.
 
 X509v3_get_ext_by_critical() is similar to X509v3_get_ext_by_NID() except it
 looks for an extension of criticality B<crit>. A zero value for B<crit>
-looks for a non-critical extension a non-zero value looks for a critical
+looks for a non-critical extension a nonzero value looks for a critical
 extension.
 
 X509v3_delete_ext() deletes the extension with index B<loc> from B<x>. The
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ L<X509V3_get_d2i(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2015-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/d2i_DHparams.pod b/doc/man3/d2i_DHparams.pod
index d4e34fe877fe..5be0c2986e53 100644
--- a/doc/man3/d2i_DHparams.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/d2i_DHparams.pod
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ d2i_DHparams, i2d_DHparams - PKCS#3 DH parameter functions
 
  #include <openssl/dh.h>
 
- DH *d2i_DHparams(DH **a, unsigned char **pp, long length);
+ DH *d2i_DHparams(DH **a, const unsigned char **pp, long length);
  int i2d_DHparams(DH *a, unsigned char **pp);
 
 =head1 DESCRIPTION
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ L<d2i_X509(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man3/d2i_X509.pod b/doc/man3/d2i_X509.pod
index a8319bd4715b..e42049d2baec 100644
--- a/doc/man3/d2i_X509.pod
+++ b/doc/man3/d2i_X509.pod
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ i2d_X509_VAL,
 
 =for comment generic
 
- TYPE *d2i_TYPE(TYPE **a, unsigned char **ppin, long length);
+ TYPE *d2i_TYPE(TYPE **a, const unsigned char **ppin, long length);
  TYPE *d2i_TYPE_bio(BIO *bp, TYPE **a);
  TYPE *d2i_TYPE_fp(FILE *fp, TYPE **a);
 
@@ -436,8 +436,8 @@ The actual TYPE structure passed to i2d_TYPE() must be a valid
 populated B<TYPE> structure -- it B<cannot> simply be fed with an
 empty structure such as that returned by TYPE_new().
 
-The encoded data is in binary form and may contain embedded zeroes.
-Therefore any FILE pointers or BIOs should be opened in binary mode.
+The encoded data is in binary form and may contain embedded zeros.
+Therefore, any FILE pointers or BIOs should be opened in binary mode.
 Functions such as strlen() will B<not> return the correct length
 of the encoded structure.
 
@@ -529,7 +529,8 @@ Allocate and encode the DER encoding of an X509 structure:
 Attempt to decode a buffer:
 
  X509 *x;
- unsigned char *buf, *p;
+ unsigned char *buf;
+ const unsigned char *p;
  int len;
 
  /* Set up buf and len to point to the input buffer. */
@@ -541,7 +542,8 @@ Attempt to decode a buffer:
 Alternative technique:
 
  X509 *x;
- unsigned char *buf, *p;
+ unsigned char *buf;
+ const unsigned char *p;
  int len;
 
  /* Set up buf and len to point to the input buffer. */
diff --git a/doc/man5/config.pod b/doc/man5/config.pod
index 7b50b099198c..3cc2d73a526d 100644
--- a/doc/man5/config.pod
+++ b/doc/man5/config.pod
@@ -262,13 +262,11 @@ Example of a configuration with the system default:
  ssl_conf = ssl_sect
 
  [ssl_sect]
-
  system_default = system_default_sect
 
  [system_default_sect]
-
  MinProtocol = TLSv1.2
-
+ MinProtocol = DTLSv1.2
 
 =head1 NOTES
 
@@ -355,8 +353,8 @@ Simple OpenSSL library configuration example to enter FIPS mode:
 Note: in the above example you will get an error in non FIPS capable versions
 of OpenSSL.
 
-Simple OpenSSL library configuration to make TLS 1.3 the system-default
-minimum TLS version:
+Simple OpenSSL library configuration to make TLS 1.2 and DTLS 1.2 the
+system-default minimum TLS and DTLS versions, respectively:
 
  # Toplevel section for openssl (including libssl)
  openssl_conf = default_conf_section
@@ -369,7 +367,12 @@ minimum TLS version:
  system_default = system_default_section
 
  [system_default_section]
- MinProtocol = TLSv1.3
+ MinProtocol = TLSv1.2
+ MinProtocol = DTLSv1.2
+
+The minimum TLS protocol is applied to B<SSL_CTX> objects that are TLS-based,
+and the minimum DTLS protocol to those are DTLS-based.
+The same applies also to maximum versions set with B<MaxProtocol>.
 
 More complex OpenSSL library configuration. Add OID and don't enter FIPS mode:
 
@@ -432,7 +435,7 @@ the value.
 The escaping isn't quite right: if you want to use sequences like B<\n>
 you can't use any quote escaping on the same line.
 
-Files are loaded in a single pass. This means that an variable expansion
+Files are loaded in a single pass. This means that a variable expansion
 will only work if the variables referenced are defined earlier in the
 file.
 
diff --git a/doc/man5/x509v3_config.pod b/doc/man5/x509v3_config.pod
index 803b12b3edeb..5c0caa5b2bf6 100644
--- a/doc/man5/x509v3_config.pod
+++ b/doc/man5/x509v3_config.pod
@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ The following sections describe each supported extension in detail.
 
 This is a multi valued extension which indicates whether a certificate is
 a CA certificate. The first (mandatory) name is B<CA> followed by B<TRUE> or
-B<FALSE>. If B<CA> is B<TRUE> then an optional B<pathlen> name followed by an
-non-negative value can be included.
+B<FALSE>. If B<CA> is B<TRUE> then an optional B<pathlen> name followed by a
+nonnegative value can be included.
 
 For example:
 
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ L<ASN1_generate_nconf(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2004-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2004-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man7/SM2.pod b/doc/man7/SM2.pod
index c8fceffa1cfc..43786749b1eb 100644
--- a/doc/man7/SM2.pod
+++ b/doc/man7/SM2.pod
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Then an ID should be set by calling:
  EVP_PKEY_CTX_set1_id(pctx, id, id_len);
 
 When calling the EVP_DigestSignInit() or EVP_DigestVerifyInit() functions, a
-pre-allocated B<EVP_PKEY_CTX> should be assigned to the B<EVP_MD_CTX>. This is
+preallocated B<EVP_PKEY_CTX> should be assigned to the B<EVP_MD_CTX>. This is
 done by calling:
 
  EVP_MD_CTX_set_pkey_ctx(mctx, pctx);
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ L<EVP_MD_CTX_set_pkey_ctx(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2018-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2018-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man7/evp.pod b/doc/man7/evp.pod
index e493dacd2313..fd8d6c7fe38d 100644
--- a/doc/man7/evp.pod
+++ b/doc/man7/evp.pod
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ functions.
 Symmetric encryption is available with the L<B<EVP_Encrypt>I<XXX>|EVP_EncryptInit(3)>
 functions.  The L<B<EVP_Digest>I<XXX>|EVP_DigestInit(3)> functions provide message digests.
 
-The B<EVP_PKEY>I<XXX> functions provide a high level interface to
+The B<EVP_PKEY>I<XXX> functions provide a high-level interface to
 asymmetric algorithms. To create a new EVP_PKEY see
 L<EVP_PKEY_new(3)>. EVP_PKEYs can be associated
 with a private key of a particular algorithm by using the functions
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The EVP_PKEY functions support the full range of asymmetric algorithm operations
 =item For signing and verifying see L<EVP_PKEY_sign(3)>,
 L<EVP_PKEY_verify(3)> and L<EVP_PKEY_verify_recover(3)>.
 However, note that
-these functions do not perform a digest of the data to be signed. Therefore
+these functions do not perform a digest of the data to be signed. Therefore,
 normally you would use the L<EVP_DigestSignInit(3)>
 functions for this purpose.
 
@@ -72,12 +72,12 @@ as defaults, then the various EVP functions will automatically use those
 implementations automatically in preference to built in software
 implementations. For more information, consult the engine(3) man page.
 
-Although low level algorithm specific functions exist for many algorithms
+Although low-level algorithm specific functions exist for many algorithms
 their use is discouraged. They cannot be used with an ENGINE and ENGINE
-versions of new algorithms cannot be accessed using the low level functions.
+versions of new algorithms cannot be accessed using the low-level functions.
 Also makes code harder to adapt to new algorithms and some options are not
-cleanly supported at the low level and some operations are more efficient
-using the high level interface.
+cleanly supported at the low-level and some operations are more efficient
+using the high-level interface.
 
 =head1 SEE ALSO
 
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ L<ENGINE_by_id(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2000-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/doc/man7/ossl_store.pod b/doc/man7/ossl_store.pod
index 6e75abd314b7..b70619685103 100644
--- a/doc/man7/ossl_store.pod
+++ b/doc/man7/ossl_store.pod
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ ossl_store - Store retrieval functions
 =head2 General
 
 A STORE is a layer of functionality to retrieve a number of supported
-objects from a repository of any kind, addressable as a file name or
+objects from a repository of any kind, addressable as a filename or
 as a URI.
 
 The functionality supports the pattern "open a channel to the
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ L<OSSL_STORE_SEARCH(3)>
 
 =head1 COPYRIGHT
 
-Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
 
 Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
 this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
diff --git a/e_os.h b/e_os.h
index 34223a0bcdb6..9af7f3758d94 100644
--- a/e_os.h
+++ b/e_os.h
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ extern FILE *_imp___iob;
 # if defined(OPENSSL_SYS_WINDOWS)
 #  define strcasecmp _stricmp
 #  define strncasecmp _strnicmp
-#  if (_MSC_VER >= 1310)
+#  if (_MSC_VER >= 1310) && !defined(_WIN32_WCE)
 #   define open _open
 #   define fdopen _fdopen
 #   define close _close
diff --git a/include/openssl/bn.h b/include/openssl/bn.h
index 8af05d00e59a..d87766049a42 100644
--- a/include/openssl/bn.h
+++ b/include/openssl/bn.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ extern "C" {
  * avoid leaking exponent information through timing,
  * BN_mod_exp_mont() will call BN_mod_exp_mont_consttime,
  * BN_div() will call BN_div_no_branch,
- * BN_mod_inverse() will call BN_mod_inverse_no_branch.
+ * BN_mod_inverse() will call bn_mod_inverse_no_branch.
  */
 # define BN_FLG_CONSTTIME        0x04
 # define BN_FLG_SECURE           0x08
diff --git a/include/openssl/e_os2.h b/include/openssl/e_os2.h
index 97a776cdacc7..cf308eee2cd2 100644
--- a/include/openssl/e_os2.h
+++ b/include/openssl/e_os2.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ typedef UINT64 uint64_t;
      defined(__osf__) || defined(__sgi) || defined(__hpux) || \
      defined(OPENSSL_SYS_VMS) || defined (__OpenBSD__)
 #  include <inttypes.h>
-# elif defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER<=1500
+# elif defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER<1600
 /*
  * minimally required typdefs for systems not supporting inttypes.h or
  * stdint.h: currently just older VC++
diff --git a/include/openssl/ec.h b/include/openssl/ec.h
index 5af9ebdc7fce..44cc139966ef 100644
--- a/include/openssl/ec.h
+++ b/include/openssl/ec.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2002-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2002-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -829,6 +829,8 @@ void EC_KEY_set_flags(EC_KEY *key, int flags);
 
 void EC_KEY_clear_flags(EC_KEY *key, int flags);
 
+int EC_KEY_decoded_from_explicit_params(const EC_KEY *key);
+
 /** Creates a new EC_KEY object using a named curve as underlying
  *  EC_GROUP object.
  *  \param  nid  NID of the named curve.
diff --git a/include/openssl/ecerr.h b/include/openssl/ecerr.h
index f7b91834564e..51738113dc7d 100644
--- a/include/openssl/ecerr.h
+++ b/include/openssl/ecerr.h
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 /*
  * Generated by util/mkerr.pl DO NOT EDIT
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -243,6 +243,7 @@ int ERR_load_EC_strings(void);
 #  define EC_R_LADDER_POST_FAILURE                         136
 #  define EC_R_LADDER_PRE_FAILURE                          153
 #  define EC_R_LADDER_STEP_FAILURE                         162
+#  define EC_R_MISSING_OID                                 167
 #  define EC_R_MISSING_PARAMETERS                          124
 #  define EC_R_MISSING_PRIVATE_KEY                         125
 #  define EC_R_NEED_NEW_SETUP_VALUES                       157
diff --git a/include/openssl/opensslconf.h.in b/include/openssl/opensslconf.h.in
index bc98cad51a64..06270922c2ac 100644
--- a/include/openssl/opensslconf.h.in
+++ b/include/openssl/opensslconf.h.in
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 /*
  * {- join("\n * ", @autowarntext) -}
  *
- * Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2016-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -77,6 +77,11 @@ extern "C" {
 #   undef DECLARE_DEPRECATED
 #   define DECLARE_DEPRECATED(f)    f __attribute__ ((deprecated));
 #  endif
+# elif defined(__SUNPRO_C)
+#  if (__SUNPRO_C >= 0x5130)
+#   undef DECLARE_DEPRECATED
+#   define DECLARE_DEPRECATED(f)    f __attribute__ ((deprecated));
+#  endif
 # endif
 #endif
 
diff --git a/include/openssl/opensslv.h b/include/openssl/opensslv.h
index 17d271f54c7f..7cf31d3625cc 100644
--- a/include/openssl/opensslv.h
+++ b/include/openssl/opensslv.h
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ extern "C" {
  * (Prior to 0.9.5a beta1, a different scheme was used: MMNNFFRBB for
  *  major minor fix final patch/beta)
  */
-# define OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER  0x1010107fL
-# define OPENSSL_VERSION_TEXT    "OpenSSL 1.1.1g  21 Apr 2020"
+# define OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER  0x1010108fL
+# define OPENSSL_VERSION_TEXT    "OpenSSL 1.1.1h  22 Sep 2020"
 
 /*-
  * The macros below are to be used for shared library (.so, .dll, ...)
diff --git a/include/openssl/pemerr.h b/include/openssl/pemerr.h
index 0c45918f3c1d..4f7e3574b34a 100644
--- a/include/openssl/pemerr.h
+++ b/include/openssl/pemerr.h
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 /*
  * Generated by util/mkerr.pl DO NOT EDIT
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -61,6 +61,7 @@ int ERR_load_PEM_strings(void);
 # define PEM_F_PEM_SIGNFINAL                              112
 # define PEM_F_PEM_WRITE                                  113
 # define PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO                              114
+# define PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_BIO_PRIVATEKEY_TRADITIONAL       147
 # define PEM_F_PEM_WRITE_PRIVATEKEY                       139
 # define PEM_F_PEM_X509_INFO_READ                         115
 # define PEM_F_PEM_X509_INFO_READ_BIO                     116
@@ -99,5 +100,6 @@ int ERR_load_PEM_strings(void);
 # define PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_CIPHER                         113
 # define PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_ENCRYPTION                     114
 # define PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_KEY_COMPONENTS                 126
+# define PEM_R_UNSUPPORTED_PUBLIC_KEY_TYPE                110
 
 #endif
diff --git a/include/openssl/ssl.h b/include/openssl/ssl.h
index 6724ccf2d252..fd0c5a99967f 100644
--- a/include/openssl/ssl.h
+++ b/include/openssl/ssl.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  * Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
  *
@@ -1393,7 +1393,7 @@ DECLARE_PEM_rw(SSL_SESSION, SSL_SESSION)
 # define SSL_get1_groups(s, glist) \
         SSL_ctrl(s,SSL_CTRL_GET_GROUPS,0,(int*)(glist))
 # define SSL_CTX_set1_groups(ctx, glist, glistlen) \
-        SSL_CTX_ctrl(ctx,SSL_CTRL_SET_GROUPS,glistlen,(char *)(glist))
+        SSL_CTX_ctrl(ctx,SSL_CTRL_SET_GROUPS,glistlen,(int *)(glist))
 # define SSL_CTX_set1_groups_list(ctx, s) \
         SSL_CTX_ctrl(ctx,SSL_CTRL_SET_GROUPS_LIST,0,(char *)(s))
 # define SSL_set1_groups(s, glist, glistlen) \
diff --git a/include/openssl/ssl3.h b/include/openssl/ssl3.h
index 8d01fcc48765..07effba287d3 100644
--- a/include/openssl/ssl3.h
+++ b/include/openssl/ssl3.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -292,6 +292,9 @@ extern "C" {
 
 # define TLS1_FLAGS_STATELESS                    0x0800
 
+/* Set if extended master secret extension required on renegotiation */
+# define TLS1_FLAGS_REQUIRED_EXTMS               0x1000
+
 # define SSL3_MT_HELLO_REQUEST                   0
 # define SSL3_MT_CLIENT_HELLO                    1
 # define SSL3_MT_SERVER_HELLO                    2
diff --git a/include/openssl/x509.h b/include/openssl/x509.h
index 39ca0ba57561..b97ec342e2c9 100644
--- a/include/openssl/x509.h
+++ b/include/openssl/x509.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  * Copyright (c) 2002, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
@@ -478,6 +478,7 @@ void X509_ALGOR_get0(const ASN1_OBJECT **paobj, int *pptype,
                      const void **ppval, const X509_ALGOR *algor);
 void X509_ALGOR_set_md(X509_ALGOR *alg, const EVP_MD *md);
 int X509_ALGOR_cmp(const X509_ALGOR *a, const X509_ALGOR *b);
+int X509_ALGOR_copy(X509_ALGOR *dest, const X509_ALGOR *src);
 
 X509_NAME *X509_NAME_dup(X509_NAME *xn);
 X509_NAME_ENTRY *X509_NAME_ENTRY_dup(X509_NAME_ENTRY *ne);
@@ -679,6 +680,8 @@ X509_NAME *X509_REQ_get_subject_name(const X509_REQ *req);
 int X509_REQ_set_subject_name(X509_REQ *req, X509_NAME *name);
 void X509_REQ_get0_signature(const X509_REQ *req, const ASN1_BIT_STRING **psig,
                              const X509_ALGOR **palg);
+void X509_REQ_set0_signature(X509_REQ *req, ASN1_BIT_STRING *psig);
+int X509_REQ_set1_signature_algo(X509_REQ *req, X509_ALGOR *palg);
 int X509_REQ_get_signature_nid(const X509_REQ *req);
 int i2d_re_X509_REQ_tbs(X509_REQ *req, unsigned char **pp);
 int X509_REQ_set_pubkey(X509_REQ *x, EVP_PKEY *pkey);
diff --git a/include/openssl/x509_vfy.h b/include/openssl/x509_vfy.h
index adb8bce7cb43..25c79f1be2f0 100644
--- a/include/openssl/x509_vfy.h
+++ b/include/openssl/x509_vfy.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -184,6 +184,10 @@ void X509_STORE_CTX_set_depth(X509_STORE_CTX *ctx, int depth);
 # define         X509_V_ERR_OCSP_VERIFY_NEEDED                   73  /* Need OCSP verification */
 # define         X509_V_ERR_OCSP_VERIFY_FAILED                   74  /* Couldn't verify cert through OCSP */
 # define         X509_V_ERR_OCSP_CERT_UNKNOWN                    75  /* Certificate wasn't recognized by the OCSP responder */
+# define         X509_V_ERR_SIGNATURE_ALGORITHM_MISMATCH         76
+# define         X509_V_ERR_NO_ISSUER_PUBLIC_KEY                 77
+# define         X509_V_ERR_UNSUPPORTED_SIGNATURE_ALGORITHM      78
+# define         X509_V_ERR_EC_KEY_EXPLICIT_PARAMS               79
 
 /* Certificate verify flags */
 
diff --git a/include/openssl/x509err.h b/include/openssl/x509err.h
index 0273853172d9..cd08673f8f69 100644
--- a/include/openssl/x509err.h
+++ b/include/openssl/x509err.h
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 /*
  * Generated by util/mkerr.pl DO NOT EDIT
- * Copyright 1995-2019 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -11,9 +11,7 @@
 #ifndef HEADER_X509ERR_H
 # define HEADER_X509ERR_H
 
-# ifndef HEADER_SYMHACKS_H
-#  include <openssl/symhacks.h>
-# endif
+# include <openssl/symhacks.h>
 
 # ifdef  __cplusplus
 extern "C"
@@ -65,6 +63,7 @@ int ERR_load_X509_strings(void);
 # define X509_F_X509_OBJECT_NEW                           150
 # define X509_F_X509_PRINT_EX_FP                          118
 # define X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_DECODE                        148
+# define X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET                           161
 # define X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_GET0                          119
 # define X509_F_X509_PUBKEY_SET                           120
 # define X509_F_X509_REQ_CHECK_PRIVATE_KEY                144
diff --git a/ssl/bio_ssl.c b/ssl/bio_ssl.c
index ab9e6668cd57..53129bfb8811 100644
--- a/ssl/bio_ssl.c
+++ b/ssl/bio_ssl.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -284,6 +284,7 @@ static long ssl_ctrl(BIO *b, int cmd, long num, void *ptr)
             ssl_free(b);
             if (!ssl_new(b))
                 return 0;
+            bs = BIO_get_data(b);
         }
         BIO_set_shutdown(b, num);
         ssl = (SSL *)ptr;
diff --git a/ssl/record/ssl3_buffer.c b/ssl/record/ssl3_buffer.c
index 605f8f9b75be..9b2a6964c689 100644
--- a/ssl/record/ssl3_buffer.c
+++ b/ssl/record/ssl3_buffer.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ int ssl3_setup_write_buffer(SSL *s, size_t numwpipes, size_t len)
             headerlen = SSL3_RT_HEADER_LENGTH;
 
 #if defined(SSL3_ALIGN_PAYLOAD) && SSL3_ALIGN_PAYLOAD!=0
-        align = (-SSL3_RT_HEADER_LENGTH) & (SSL3_ALIGN_PAYLOAD - 1);
+        align = SSL3_ALIGN_PAYLOAD - 1;
 #endif
 
         len = ssl_get_max_send_fragment(s)
diff --git a/ssl/ssl_conf.c b/ssl/ssl_conf.c
index 8ef29bb34535..0a3fef7c8c14 100644
--- a/ssl/ssl_conf.c
+++ b/ssl/ssl_conf.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2012-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2012-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -305,6 +305,13 @@ static int protocol_from_string(const char *value)
         const char *name;
         int version;
     };
+    /*
+     * Note: To avoid breaking previously valid configurations, we must retain
+     * legacy entries in this table even if the underlying protocol is no
+     * longer supported.  This also means that the constants SSL3_VERSION, ...
+     * need to be retained indefinitely.  This table can only grow, never
+     * shrink.
+     */
     static const struct protocol_versions versions[] = {
         {"None", 0},
         {"SSLv3", SSL3_VERSION},
diff --git a/ssl/ssl_lib.c b/ssl/ssl_lib.c
index 7c7e59789ccd..b1df374817c7 100644
--- a/ssl/ssl_lib.c
+++ b/ssl/ssl_lib.c
@@ -1200,6 +1200,8 @@ void SSL_free(SSL *s)
     OPENSSL_free(s->ext.ocsp.resp);
     OPENSSL_free(s->ext.alpn);
     OPENSSL_free(s->ext.tls13_cookie);
+    if (s->clienthello != NULL)
+        OPENSSL_free(s->clienthello->pre_proc_exts);
     OPENSSL_free(s->clienthello);
     OPENSSL_free(s->pha_context);
     EVP_MD_CTX_free(s->pha_dgst);
@@ -2895,7 +2897,8 @@ int SSL_export_keying_material(SSL *s, unsigned char *out, size_t olen,
                                const unsigned char *context, size_t contextlen,
                                int use_context)
 {
-    if (s->version < TLS1_VERSION && s->version != DTLS1_BAD_VER)
+    if (s->session == NULL
+        || (s->version < TLS1_VERSION && s->version != DTLS1_BAD_VER))
         return -1;
 
     return s->method->ssl3_enc->export_keying_material(s, out, olen, label,
@@ -3824,6 +3827,8 @@ SSL *SSL_dup(SSL *s)
         goto err;
     ret->version = s->version;
     ret->options = s->options;
+    ret->min_proto_version = s->min_proto_version;
+    ret->max_proto_version = s->max_proto_version;
     ret->mode = s->mode;
     SSL_set_max_cert_list(ret, SSL_get_max_cert_list(s));
     SSL_set_read_ahead(ret, SSL_get_read_ahead(s));
@@ -3839,21 +3844,6 @@ SSL *SSL_dup(SSL *s)
     if (!CRYPTO_dup_ex_data(CRYPTO_EX_INDEX_SSL, &ret->ex_data, &s->ex_data))
         goto err;
 
-    /* setup rbio, and wbio */
-    if (s->rbio != NULL) {
-        if (!BIO_dup_state(s->rbio, (char *)&ret->rbio))
-            goto err;
-    }
-    if (s->wbio != NULL) {
-        if (s->wbio != s->rbio) {
-            if (!BIO_dup_state(s->wbio, (char *)&ret->wbio))
-                goto err;
-        } else {
-            BIO_up_ref(ret->rbio);
-            ret->wbio = ret->rbio;
-        }
-    }
-
     ret->server = s->server;
     if (s->handshake_func) {
         if (s->server)
diff --git a/ssl/ssl_rsa.c b/ssl/ssl_rsa.c
index b9693527b3d2..6457c0c0efa3 100644
--- a/ssl/ssl_rsa.c
+++ b/ssl/ssl_rsa.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 1995-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 1995-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -148,15 +148,6 @@ static int ssl_set_pkey(CERT *c, EVP_PKEY *pkey)
         EVP_PKEY_copy_parameters(pktmp, pkey);
         ERR_clear_error();
 
-#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_RSA
-        /*
-         * Don't check the public/private key, this is mostly for smart
-         * cards.
-         */
-        if (EVP_PKEY_id(pkey) == EVP_PKEY_RSA
-            && RSA_flags(EVP_PKEY_get0_RSA(pkey)) & RSA_METHOD_FLAG_NO_CHECK) ;
-        else
-#endif
         if (!X509_check_private_key(c->pkeys[i].x509, pkey)) {
             X509_free(c->pkeys[i].x509);
             c->pkeys[i].x509 = NULL;
@@ -342,16 +333,6 @@ static int ssl_set_cert(CERT *c, X509 *x)
         EVP_PKEY_copy_parameters(pkey, c->pkeys[i].privatekey);
         ERR_clear_error();
 
-#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_RSA
-        /*
-         * Don't check the public/private key, this is mostly for smart
-         * cards.
-         */
-        if (EVP_PKEY_id(c->pkeys[i].privatekey) == EVP_PKEY_RSA
-            && RSA_flags(EVP_PKEY_get0_RSA(c->pkeys[i].privatekey)) &
-            RSA_METHOD_FLAG_NO_CHECK) ;
-        else
-#endif                          /* OPENSSL_NO_RSA */
         if (!X509_check_private_key(x, c->pkeys[i].privatekey)) {
             /*
              * don't fail for a cert/key mismatch, just free current private
@@ -1082,13 +1063,6 @@ static int ssl_set_cert_and_key(SSL *ssl, SSL_CTX *ctx, X509 *x509, EVP_PKEY *pr
             EVP_PKEY_copy_parameters(pubkey, privatekey);
         } /* else both have parameters */
 
-        /* Copied from ssl_set_cert/pkey */
-#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_RSA
-        if ((EVP_PKEY_id(privatekey) == EVP_PKEY_RSA) &&
-            ((RSA_flags(EVP_PKEY_get0_RSA(privatekey)) & RSA_METHOD_FLAG_NO_CHECK)))
-            /* no-op */ ;
-        else
-#endif
         /* check that key <-> cert match */
         if (EVP_PKEY_cmp(pubkey, privatekey) != 1) {
             SSLerr(SSL_F_SSL_SET_CERT_AND_KEY, SSL_R_PRIVATE_KEY_MISMATCH);
diff --git a/ssl/statem/extensions.c b/ssl/statem/extensions.c
index 4ef8b417b820..c785ab785d38 100644
--- a/ssl/statem/extensions.c
+++ b/ssl/statem/extensions.c
@@ -1168,14 +1168,26 @@ static int init_etm(SSL *s, unsigned int context)
 
 static int init_ems(SSL *s, unsigned int context)
 {
-    if (!s->server)
+    if (s->s3->flags & TLS1_FLAGS_RECEIVED_EXTMS) {
         s->s3->flags &= ~TLS1_FLAGS_RECEIVED_EXTMS;
+        s->s3->flags |= TLS1_FLAGS_REQUIRED_EXTMS;
+    }
 
     return 1;
 }
 
 static int final_ems(SSL *s, unsigned int context, int sent)
 {
+    /*
+     * Check extended master secret extension is not dropped on
+     * renegotiation.
+     */
+    if (!(s->s3->flags & TLS1_FLAGS_RECEIVED_EXTMS)
+        && (s->s3->flags & TLS1_FLAGS_REQUIRED_EXTMS)) {
+        SSLfatal(s, SSL_AD_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE, SSL_F_FINAL_EMS,
+                 SSL_R_INCONSISTENT_EXTMS);
+        return 0;
+    }
     if (!s->server && s->hit) {
         /*
          * Check extended master secret extension is consistent with
diff --git a/ssl/statem/extensions_srvr.c b/ssl/statem/extensions_srvr.c
index 3b07c6b940f4..3c7395c0eb26 100644
--- a/ssl/statem/extensions_srvr.c
+++ b/ssl/statem/extensions_srvr.c
@@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ int tls_parse_ctos_psk(SSL *s, PACKET *pkt, unsigned int context, X509 *x,
             if (sesstmp == NULL) {
                 SSLfatal(s, SSL_AD_INTERNAL_ERROR,
                          SSL_F_TLS_PARSE_CTOS_PSK, ERR_R_INTERNAL_ERROR);
-                return 0;
+                goto err;
             }
             SSL_SESSION_free(sess);
             sess = sesstmp;
diff --git a/ssl/statem/statem_lib.c b/ssl/statem/statem_lib.c
index 43d6fd5de941..364f77f08a4e 100644
--- a/ssl/statem/statem_lib.c
+++ b/ssl/statem/statem_lib.c
@@ -1341,6 +1341,7 @@ int tls_get_message_body(SSL *s, size_t *len)
 static const X509ERR2ALERT x509table[] = {
     {X509_V_ERR_APPLICATION_VERIFICATION, SSL_AD_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE},
     {X509_V_ERR_CA_KEY_TOO_SMALL, SSL_AD_BAD_CERTIFICATE},
+    {X509_V_ERR_EC_KEY_EXPLICIT_PARAMS, SSL_AD_BAD_CERTIFICATE},
     {X509_V_ERR_CA_MD_TOO_WEAK, SSL_AD_BAD_CERTIFICATE},
     {X509_V_ERR_CERT_CHAIN_TOO_LONG, SSL_AD_UNKNOWN_CA},
     {X509_V_ERR_CERT_HAS_EXPIRED, SSL_AD_CERTIFICATE_EXPIRED},
@@ -1656,11 +1657,22 @@ int ssl_check_version_downgrade(SSL *s)
  */
 int ssl_set_version_bound(int method_version, int version, int *bound)
 {
+    int valid_tls;
+    int valid_dtls;
+
     if (version == 0) {
         *bound = version;
         return 1;
     }
 
+    valid_tls = version >= SSL3_VERSION && version <= TLS_MAX_VERSION;
+    valid_dtls =
+        DTLS_VERSION_LE(version, DTLS_MAX_VERSION) &&
+        DTLS_VERSION_GE(version, DTLS1_BAD_VER);
+
+    if (!valid_tls && !valid_dtls)
+        return 0;
+
     /*-
      * Restrict TLS methods to TLS protocol versions.
      * Restrict DTLS methods to DTLS protocol versions.
@@ -1671,31 +1683,24 @@ int ssl_set_version_bound(int method_version, int version, int *bound)
      * configurations.  If the MIN (supported) version ever rises, the user's
      * "floor" remains valid even if no longer available.  We don't expect the
      * MAX ceiling to ever get lower, so making that variable makes sense.
+     *
+     * We ignore attempts to set bounds on version-inflexible methods,
+     * returning success.
      */
     switch (method_version) {
     default:
-        /*
-         * XXX For fixed version methods, should we always fail and not set any
-         * bounds, always succeed and not set any bounds, or set the bounds and
-         * arrange to fail later if they are not met?  At present fixed-version
-         * methods are not subject to controls that disable individual protocol
-         * versions.
-         */
-        return 0;
+        break;
 
     case TLS_ANY_VERSION:
-        if (version < SSL3_VERSION || version > TLS_MAX_VERSION)
-            return 0;
+        if (valid_tls)
+            *bound = version;
         break;
 
     case DTLS_ANY_VERSION:
-        if (DTLS_VERSION_GT(version, DTLS_MAX_VERSION) ||
-            DTLS_VERSION_LT(version, DTLS1_BAD_VER))
-            return 0;
+        if (valid_dtls)
+            *bound = version;
         break;
     }
-
-    *bound = version;
     return 1;
 }
 
diff --git a/ssl/t1_lib.c b/ssl/t1_lib.c
index 76b4baa38893..48d46f8a48bd 100644
--- a/ssl/t1_lib.c
+++ b/ssl/t1_lib.c
@@ -2439,46 +2439,48 @@ int SSL_check_chain(SSL *s, X509 *x, EVP_PKEY *pk, STACK_OF(X509) *chain)
 #ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DH
 DH *ssl_get_auto_dh(SSL *s)
 {
+    DH *dhp = NULL;
+    BIGNUM *p = NULL, *g = NULL;
     int dh_secbits = 80;
-    if (s->cert->dh_tmp_auto == 2)
-        return DH_get_1024_160();
-    if (s->s3->tmp.new_cipher->algorithm_auth & (SSL_aNULL | SSL_aPSK)) {
-        if (s->s3->tmp.new_cipher->strength_bits == 256)
-            dh_secbits = 128;
-        else
-            dh_secbits = 80;
-    } else {
-        if (s->s3->tmp.cert == NULL)
-            return NULL;
-        dh_secbits = EVP_PKEY_security_bits(s->s3->tmp.cert->privatekey);
+    if (s->cert->dh_tmp_auto != 2) {
+        if (s->s3->tmp.new_cipher->algorithm_auth & (SSL_aNULL | SSL_aPSK)) {
+            if (s->s3->tmp.new_cipher->strength_bits == 256)
+                dh_secbits = 128;
+            else
+                dh_secbits = 80;
+        } else {
+            if (s->s3->tmp.cert == NULL)
+                return NULL;
+            dh_secbits = EVP_PKEY_security_bits(s->s3->tmp.cert->privatekey);
+        }
     }
 
-    if (dh_secbits >= 128) {
-        DH *dhp = DH_new();
-        BIGNUM *p, *g;
-        if (dhp == NULL)
-            return NULL;
-        g = BN_new();
-        if (g == NULL || !BN_set_word(g, 2)) {
-            DH_free(dhp);
-            BN_free(g);
-            return NULL;
-        }
-        if (dh_secbits >= 192)
-            p = BN_get_rfc3526_prime_8192(NULL);
-        else
-            p = BN_get_rfc3526_prime_3072(NULL);
-        if (p == NULL || !DH_set0_pqg(dhp, p, NULL, g)) {
-            DH_free(dhp);
-            BN_free(p);
-            BN_free(g);
-            return NULL;
-        }
-        return dhp;
+    dhp = DH_new();
+    if (dhp == NULL)
+        return NULL;
+    g = BN_new();
+    if (g == NULL || !BN_set_word(g, 2)) {
+        DH_free(dhp);
+        BN_free(g);
+        return NULL;
     }
-    if (dh_secbits >= 112)
-        return DH_get_2048_224();
-    return DH_get_1024_160();
+    if (dh_secbits >= 192)
+        p = BN_get_rfc3526_prime_8192(NULL);
+    else if (dh_secbits >= 152)
+        p = BN_get_rfc3526_prime_4096(NULL);
+    else if (dh_secbits >= 128)
+        p = BN_get_rfc3526_prime_3072(NULL);
+    else if (dh_secbits >= 112)
+        p = BN_get_rfc3526_prime_2048(NULL);
+    else
+        p = BN_get_rfc2409_prime_1024(NULL);
+    if (p == NULL || !DH_set0_pqg(dhp, p, NULL, g)) {
+        DH_free(dhp);
+        BN_free(p);
+        BN_free(g);
+        return NULL;
+    }
+    return dhp;
 }
 #endif
 
diff --git a/ssl/t1_trce.c b/ssl/t1_trce.c
index 5c84339314cd..e2c397b75657 100644
--- a/ssl/t1_trce.c
+++ b/ssl/t1_trce.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 /*
- * Copyright 2012-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+ * Copyright 2012-2020 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
  *
  * Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
  * this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
@@ -656,7 +656,10 @@ static int ssl_print_random(BIO *bio, int indent,
 
     if (*pmsglen < 32)
         return 0;
-    tm = (p[0] << 24) | (p[1] << 16) | (p[2] << 8) | p[3];
+    tm = ((unsigned int)p[0] << 24)
+         | ((unsigned int)p[1] << 16)
+         | ((unsigned int)p[2] << 8)
+         | (unsigned int)p[3];
     p += 4;
     BIO_indent(bio, indent, 80);
     BIO_puts(bio, "Random:\n");
@@ -864,8 +867,10 @@ static int ssl_print_extension(BIO *bio, int indent, int server,
             break;
         if (extlen != 4)
             return 0;
-        max_early_data = (ext[0] << 24) | (ext[1] << 16) | (ext[2] << 8)
-                         | ext[3];
+        max_early_data = ((unsigned int)ext[0] << 24)
+                         | ((unsigned int)ext[1] << 16)
+                         | ((unsigned int)ext[2] << 8)
+                         | (unsigned int)ext[3];
         BIO_indent(bio, indent + 2, 80);
         BIO_printf(bio, "max_early_data=%u\n", max_early_data);
         break;
@@ -1356,7 +1361,10 @@ static int ssl_print_ticket(BIO *bio, int indent, const SSL *ssl,
     }
     if (msglen < 4)
         return 0;
-    tick_life = (msg[0] << 24) | (msg[1] << 16) | (msg[2] << 8) | msg[3];
+    tick_life = ((unsigned int)msg[0] << 24)
+                | ((unsigned int)msg[1] << 16)
+                | ((unsigned int)msg[2] << 8)
+                | (unsigned int)msg[3];
     msglen -= 4;
     msg += 4;
     BIO_indent(bio, indent + 2, 80);
@@ -1367,7 +1375,10 @@ static int ssl_print_ticket(BIO *bio, int indent, const SSL *ssl,
         if (msglen < 4)
             return 0;
         ticket_age_add =
-            (msg[0] << 24) | (msg[1] << 16) | (msg[2] << 8) | msg[3];
+            ((unsigned int)msg[0] << 24)
+            | ((unsigned int)msg[1] << 16)
+            | ((unsigned int)msg[2] << 8)
+            | (unsigned int)msg[3];
         msglen -= 4;
         msg += 4;
         BIO_indent(bio, indent + 2, 80);
diff --git a/ssl/tls13_enc.c b/ssl/tls13_enc.c
index 86754dc9677c..b8fb07f210ef 100644
--- a/ssl/tls13_enc.c
+++ b/ssl/tls13_enc.c
@@ -390,11 +390,18 @@ static int derive_secret_key_and_iv(SSL *s, int sending, const EVP_MD *md,
         uint32_t algenc;
 
         ivlen = EVP_CCM_TLS_IV_LEN;
-        if (s->s3->tmp.new_cipher == NULL) {
+        if (s->s3->tmp.new_cipher != NULL) {
+            algenc = s->s3->tmp.new_cipher->algorithm_enc;
+        } else if (s->session->cipher != NULL) {
             /* We've not selected a cipher yet - we must be doing early data */
             algenc = s->session->cipher->algorithm_enc;
+        } else if (s->psksession != NULL && s->psksession->cipher != NULL) {
+            /* We must be doing early data with out-of-band PSK */
+            algenc = s->psksession->cipher->algorithm_enc;
         } else {
-            algenc = s->s3->tmp.new_cipher->algorithm_enc;
+            SSLfatal(s, SSL_AD_INTERNAL_ERROR, SSL_F_DERIVE_SECRET_KEY_AND_IV,
+                     ERR_R_EVP_LIB);
+            goto err;
         }
         if (algenc & (SSL_AES128CCM8 | SSL_AES256CCM8))
             taglen = EVP_CCM8_TLS_TAG_LEN;